2007 Mercedes Benz Gl Owners Manual

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Operator’s ManualGL-Class

Order No. 6515 4272 13 Part No. 164 584 72 82 USA Edition D 2007 GL-C

lass1 6 4 5 8 4 7 2 8 2

GL 320 CDIGL 450

Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.

Your selection of our product is a demon-stration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de-sire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.

Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-men. To help assure your driving pleasure, and also the safety of you and your passen-gers, we ask you to make a small invest-ment of time:

� Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.

� Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are de-signed to acquaint you with the opera-tion of your Mercedes-Benz.

� Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occu-pants.

We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCA DaimlerChrysler Company

Contents

Introduction .......................................... 9Product information................................ 9Operator’s Manual ............................... 10

Service and warranty information .. 10Important notice for Californiaretail buyers and lessees ofMercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11Maintenance .................................. 12Roadside Assistance ...................... 12Change of address or ownership.... 13Operating your vehicleoutside the USA or Canada............ 13

Where to find it .................................... 15Symbols............................................... 16Operating safety .................................. 17

Proper use of the vehicle ............... 17Problems with your vehicle.................. 18Reporting safety defects...................... 19

Reporting safety defects ................ 19Vehicle data recording......................... 20

Information regarding electronicrecording devices........................... 20

At a glance .......................................... 21Exterior view......................................... 22Cockpit................................................. 24Instrument cluster ................................ 26Instrument cluster ................................ 28Multifunction steering wheel ................ 30Center console ..................................... 31

Upper part (Vehicles withoutenhanced off-road package*) ......... 31Upper part (Vehicles withenhanced off-road package*) ......... 32Lower part ...................................... 33

Overhead control panel ........................ 34Door control panel................................ 35Storage compartments......................... 36

Getting started ................................... 39Unlocking ............................................. 40

Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 40Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 41Starter switch positions.................. 41

Adjusting .............................................. 45Seats .............................................. 45Steering wheel................................ 49Mirrors............................................ 52

Driving.................................................. 54Fastening the seat belts ................. 54Starting the engine ......................... 57Parking brake ................................. 60Driving off ....................................... 61Switching on headlamps................. 62Turn signals .................................... 63Windshield wipers........................... 63Rear window wiper/washer............ 65Problems while driving.................... 66

Parking and locking.............................. 68Parking brake ................................. 68Switching off headlamps................. 69Turning off the engine..................... 69Releasing seat belts........................ 71Locking ........................................... 71

Contents

Safety and Security ........................... 73Occupant safety................................... 74

Air bags .......................................... 76Occupant Classification System*... 81BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system (Canada only) ..................... 87Seat belts ....................................... 88Active head restraint ...................... 92Rear head restraints....................... 93Children in the vehicle.................... 93Blocking of rear doorwindow operation......................... 100

Panic alarm........................................ 102Activating ..................................... 102Deactivating ................................. 102

Driving safety systems....................... 103ABS .............................................. 103BAS .............................................. 105ESP®............................................. 105EBP............................................... 1094-ETS............................................ 109

Anti-theft systems.............................. 111Immobilizer................................... 111Anti-theft alarm system................ 111

Controls in detail ............................. 113Locking and unlocking ....................... 114

SmartKey ..................................... 114SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 117Checking batteries in theSmartKey or SmartKey withKEYLESS-GO* .............................. 122Loss of the SmartKey orSmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 122Opening the doorsfrom the inside............................. 122Tailgate/Power tailgate*.............. 123Automatic central locking ............ 130Locking and unlockingfrom the inside............................. 130

Seats ................................................. 132Easy-entry/exit feature forthird-row seats ............................. 132Front seat active head restraints . 135Rear seats .................................... 135Lumbar support............................ 139Multicontour seat*....................... 140Seat heating*............................... 140Seat ventilation* .......................... 142

Memory function* ............................. 143Storing positions into memory..... 144Recalling positions from memory. 144

Lighting ............................................. 145Exterior lamp switch .................... 145Combination switch ..................... 149Corner-illuminatingfront fog lamps*........................... 150Hazard warning flasher ................ 151Interior lighting ............................ 151Door entry lamps ......................... 154Cargo compartment lamp ............ 154

Instrument cluster ............................. 155Adjusting instrumentcluster illumination ...................... 155Resetting trip odometer ............... 156Tachometer.................................. 156Outside temperature indicator ..... 156

Contents

Control system .................................. 157Multifunction display.................... 157Multifunction steering wheel........ 158Menus .......................................... 160Standard display menu ................ 164Audio menu.................................. 166NAV* menu.................................. 168Off-road menu.............................. 168DISTRONIC* menu....................... 169Vehicle status messagememory menu.............................. 169Settings menu.............................. 170Vehicle configuration ................... 185Trip computer menu..................... 187TEL* menu ................................... 189

Automatic transmission..................... 192Gear selector lever....................... 192Shifting procedure ....................... 195Transmission positions................. 195Driving tips................................... 198Gear ranges ................................. 200Steering wheel gearshift control .. 201Emergency operation(Limp-Home Mode) ...................... 202

Transfer case..................................... 203LOW RANGE mode* ..................... 203

Differential locks* .............................. 206A few words about differentialsand differential locks* .................. 206Switching differential locks*......... 207

Good visibility ..................................... 210Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 210Rear view mirrors.......................... 210Power folding exteriorrear view mirrors*......................... 211Sun visors ..................................... 213Rear panorama roof sunshade...... 214Rear window defroster.................. 215

Climate control................................... 216Deactivating theclimate control system ................. 220Operating the climate controlsystem in automatic mode............ 220Setting the temperature................ 221Adjusting air distribution............... 221Adjusting air volume ..................... 222Air vents in the roof linerover the second-row seats*.......... 222Front defroster.............................. 223Air recirculation mode .................. 224Air conditioning............................. 226Residual heat and ventilation........ 227

Rear climate control* ................... 2283-zone automatic climate control*..... 230

Deactivating the automaticclimate control system ................. 234Operating the automaticclimate control systemin automatic mode........................ 235Setting the temperature ............... 235Adjusting air distribution .............. 236Adjusting air volume ..................... 237Front defroster ............................. 237Maximum cooling MAXCOOL........ 239Air recirculation mode .................. 239Air conditioning ............................ 241Using driver-side settingsfor all temperature zones.............. 242Residual heat and ventilation........ 242Rear automatic climate control..... 243

Power windows .................................. 248Opening and closing ..................... 248Synchronizing the door windows .. 251Summer opening feature .............. 251Convenience closing feature......... 252

Contents

Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ................ 253Opening and closing..................... 253Synchronizing............................... 255

Driving systems ................................. 257Cruise control............................... 257Distronic*..................................... 262Distance warning function*.......... 274Downhill Speed Regulation(DSR)............................................ 275Off-road driving program(Vehicles withoutenhanced off-road package*)....... 279Air suspension package ............... 280Adaptive Damping System(ADS)*.......................................... 280Vehicle level control ..................... 281Parktronic system* ...................... 290Rear view camera*....................... 295

Loading .............................................. 297Carriers* ...................................... 297Loading instructions..................... 303Cargo tie-down rings .................... 304Hooks........................................... 306Expanding cargo compartment .... 306Cargo compartment cover blind... 312Cargo net* ................................... 313

Useful features .................................. 316Storage compartments ................ 316Parcel nets ................................... 320Cup holders.................................. 321Ashtrays* ..................................... 322Cigarette lighter* ......................... 324Power outlets ............................... 325Floormats*................................... 326Seat cover underthird-row seats ............................. 327Heated steering wheel* ............... 328Telephone* .................................. 329Tele Aid ........................................ 332Garage door opener ..................... 339Compass ...................................... 345Infrared reflecting windshield*..... 345

Operation ......................................... 347The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 348Driving instructions ........................... 349

Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 349Drinking and driving ..................... 349Pedals .......................................... 349Power assistance ......................... 350Brakes.......................................... 350Driving off .................................... 352Parking......................................... 352Tires............................................. 353Hydroplaning................................ 354Tire traction ................................. 354Tire speed rating .......................... 354Winter driving instructions ........... 355Standing water............................. 356Off-road driving ............................ 357Trailer towing ............................... 366Passenger compartment.............. 371Driving abroad ............................. 372Control and operation ofradio transmitters ........................ 372Catalytic converter(gasoline engine).......................... 373Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) 373

Contents

Emission control .......................... 373Coolant temperature.................... 374

At the gas station .............................. 375Refueling...................................... 375Check regularly andbefore a long trip.......................... 377

Engine compartment ......................... 379Hood ............................................ 379Engine oil ..................................... 381Transmission fluid level................ 382Coolant level ................................ 382Windshield/rear windowwasher system andheadlamp cleaning system* ........ 384

Tires and wheels................................ 385Important guidelines .................... 385Tire care and maintenance........... 386Direction of rotation..................... 388Loading the vehicle ...................... 388Recommended tireinflation pressure ......................... 394Checking tire inflation pressure ... 396Tire labeling.................................. 406Load identification ....................... 410DOT, Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) ............................... 410

Maximum tire load ........................ 412Maximum tire inflation pressure ... 412Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (U.S. vehicles).............. 413Tire ply material ............................ 415Tire and loading terminology......... 415Rotating tires ................................ 418

Winter driving ..................................... 420Winter tires ................................... 420Snow chains.................................. 421

Maintenance....................................... 422Maintenance service indicator message ....................................... 422Calling up the maintenanceservice indicator display ............... 424Resetting the maintenanceservice indicator ........................... 424

Vehicle care........................................ 425Cleaning and care of the vehicle... 425

Practical hints .................................. 435What to do if …................................... 436

Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 436Lamp in center console ................ 448Vehicle status messages inthe multifunction display .............. 451

Where will I find ...? ............................ 495First aid kit.................................... 495Vehicle tool kit.............................. 495Spare wheel.................................. 499

Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 500Unlocking the vehicle ................... 500Locking the vehicle....................... 501Fuel filler flap ................................ 501

Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 503Power tilt/sliding sunroof*........... 503

Resetting activated head restraints.... 504Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 506Replacing bulbs .................................. 508

Bulbs............................................. 508Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 511Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 515Adjusting headlamp aim ............... 518

Contents

Replacing wiper blades ...................... 520Front wiper blades ....................... 520Rear wiper blade .......................... 521

Flat tire .............................................. 523Preparing the vehicle.................... 523Mounting the spare wheel ............ 524

Bleeding the fuel system(diesel engine only) ............................ 529Battery ............................................... 530

Disconnecting, removing,reinstalling andreconnecting the battery.............. 532Charging the battery .................... 537

Jump starting ..................................... 538Towing the vehicle ............................. 540

Installing towing eye bolt.............. 542Stranded vehicle .......................... 543

Fuses ................................................. 544Fuse box in engine compartment . 545Fuse box in cargo compartment... 545Fuse box inpassenger compartment .............. 546Emergency engine shut-down ...... 546

Technical data ................................. 547Parts service ...................................... 548Warranty coverage............................. 549

Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet ..................... 549

Identification labels ........................... 550Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 552

GL 320 CDI .................................. 552GL 450 ......................................... 552

Engine................................................ 553Rims and tires.................................... 554

Same size tires............................. 555Minispare wheel ........................... 556

Electrical system ............................... 557Main Dimensions ............................... 558Weights.............................................. 559

Fuels, coolants, lubricants................. 560Capacities .................................... 560Engine oils ................................... 562Engine oil additives ...................... 562Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 562Brake fluid.................................... 562Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine).......................... 563Fuel requirements........................ 563Gasoline additives(gasoline engine).......................... 564Coolants ...................................... 565Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*......... 567

Index................................................. 569

Introduction

Product information

�
Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest:
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.

We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in indi-vidual cases an official approval or authori-zation by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and acces-sories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center where you will receive comprehen-sive information, also on permissible tech-nical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.

9

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving.

For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-structions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in dam-age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail-ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.

We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-mation, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.

Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instruc-tions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.

If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating proce-dures.

The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.

Service and warranty information

The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz, including:

� New Light Truck Limited Warranty

� Emission System Warranty

� Emission Performance Warranty

� California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only)

� State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws)

10

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles

Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal-functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles (approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following oc-curs:

(1) the same substantial defect or mal-function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or mal-function of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct-ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub-stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.

Written notification should not be sent to a dealer, it should be addressed to Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

11

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

Maintenance

The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.

Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory-trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)

will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Roadside Assistance will be provided in accordance with standard program guide-lines which include providing service to the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a paved roadway. We will make every effort to assist in a breakdown situation, howev-er, the accessibility of your vehicle will be determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center techni-cian or the tow service provider on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor in our ability to respond.

Additional charges may be applicable for a breakdown location determined not to be a reasonably accessible roadside location as determined by our authorized technician and tow service provider.

For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio.

12

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

Change of address or ownership

If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail-able to the next operator.

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Truck” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-eign countries, please be aware that:

� service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,

� unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be avail-able; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts,

� gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.

13

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

Warning! G

This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.

This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a signifi-cantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

14

Introduction

Where to find it

�
Where to find it This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-vide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each section has its own reference color.
At a glance

Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.

Getting started

Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-ing or borrowing this vehicle.

Safety and Security

Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle.

Controls in detail

Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed on your ve-hicle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes techni-cal innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

Operation

Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi-cle.

Practical hints

This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter.

Technical data

All important technical data for your vehi-cle can be found in this section.

Indexes

The table of contents and the index are de-signed to help you find information quickly and easily.

The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation:

� this Operator’s Manual

� the Maintenance Booklet

Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehi-cle.

15

Introduction

Symbols

Trademarks:

� ESP® is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler.

� BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

� HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.

The following symbols are found in this Operator’s Manual:

* Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehi-cle.

� This symbol points to instructions for you to follow.

� A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple-step procedure.

� page This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic.

�� This continuation symbol marks a warning which is continued on the next page.

�� This continuation symbol marks a procedure which is continued on the next page.

-> This symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term defini-tions.

Display Words appearing in the multi-function display are printed in the type shown here.

Warning! G

Warning notices draw your attention to haz-ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.

i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful.

16

Introduction

Operating safety

�
Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules:

� the safety precautions in this manual

� the “Technical data” section in this manual

� traffic rules and regulations

� motor vehicle laws and safety stan-dards

Warning! G

Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components are in-terconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other sys-tems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components.

Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle.

Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore nev-er turn off the engine while driving.

Warning! G

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur-bance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or re-pairs.

Warning! G

Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Re-moval of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or per-sonal injury.

17

Introduction

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:

In the USA:

Customer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:

Customer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9

18

Introduction

Reporting safety defects

�
Reporting safety defects For the USA only:The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

19

Introduction

Vehicle data recording

Information regarding electronicrecording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may transmit some data in certain accidents.

This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety. DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others

� for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes

� with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee

� in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency

� for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or

� as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system.

20

21

At a glance

Exterior view

Cockpit

Instrument cluster

Multifunction steering wheel

Center console

Overhead control panel

Door control panel

Storage compartments

At a glance

Exterior view

22

At a glance

Exterior view

Item Page

1 Tailgate 124

Power tailgate* 125

Cargo compartment

� Loading instructions 303

� Cargo tie-down rings 304

� Hooks 306

� Expanding 306

� Cover blind 312

� Cargo net* 313

Vehicle tool kit 495

Spare wheel 499

2 Rear window defroster 215

3 Rear lamps 509

4 Fuel filler flap 375

Refueling 375

Fuel 376,563

Item Page

5 Exterior rear view mirrors

Adjusting 52

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*

211

Power folding* 211

6 Towing

Installing towing eye bolt 542

7 Tires and wheels 385,554

Checking tire inflation pressure

396

General information 385

Flat tire 523

Spare wheel 499

8 Hood 379

Opening 379

Engine oil 381

Coolant 382

Item Page

9 Windshield wipers 63

Wiper blades, replacing 520

Wiper blades, cleaning 431

a Windshield

Cleaning with wiper fluid 65

Cleaning 431

b Roof rails 297

Carriers* 298

c Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 253

d Doors

Locking and unlocking 114

Opening and closing 122

Locking/unlocking in an emergency

500

e Front lamps 509

f Headlamp cleaning system* 210

23

At a glance

Cockpit

24

At a glance

Cockpit

Item Page

1 Cruise control lever 258

2 Instrument cluster 26

3 Multifunction steering wheel

30

4 Horn

5 Steering wheel gearshift buttons

201

6 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission

58

7 Front Parktronic* warning indicators

292

8 Overhead control panel 34

9 Glove box releaseGlove box lock

316317

Item Page

a Glove box 316

CD changer* 316

AUX-socket 316

b Power outlet 325

c Center console 31

d Starter switch 42

e Steering wheel adjustment, manual

50

f Hood lock release 379

g Parking brake release 60

h Parking brake pedal 68

j Power tailgate switch* 126

k Door control panel 35

Item Page

l Headlamp washer switch* 210

m Exterior lamp switch 62145

n Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*Heated steering wheel*

51

328

o Combination switch

� High beam

� Turn signals

� Windshield wipers

� Rear window wiper

149

63

63

63

65

25

At a glance

Instrument cluster

26

At a glance

Instrument cluster

Item Page

1 L Left turn signal indicator lamp

2 To dim instrument cluster illumination

155

3 Reset button for:

� Resetting trip odometer

� Resetting all settings

156

171

4 To brighten instrument cluster illumination

155

5 K Right turn signal indicator lamp

6 Clock

Setting the time 176

Item Page

7 Speedometer with:

- Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp

436

’ Variable speed limiter indicator lamp1

l Distance warning lamp2

265,445

1 Lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.

2 Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.

Item Page

; Brake warning lamp, USA only

437

3 Brake warning lamp, Canada only

437

v Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) warning lamp

441

H Combination low tire pressure/TPMS mal-function telltale, USA only

Low tire pressure telltale, Canada only

446

446

27

At a glance

Instrument cluster

28

At a glance

Instrument cluster

Item Page

8 Multifunction display with:

� Trip odometer 156

� Main odometer 157

9 Tachometer with:

< Seat belt telltale 91,443

1 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) indicator lamp

74,445

q Preglow indicator lamp1

1 Vehicles with Diesel engine only.

58

? Engine malfunction indicator lamp, USA only

439

± Engine malfunction indicator lamp, Canada only

439

A High beam headlamp indicator

63,149

Item Page

a Fuel gauge with:

Fuel tank reserve warning lamp

442

4 Fuel filler flap indica-tor: The fuel filler flap is located on the rear right-hand side.

375

b Multifunction display with:

� Outside temperature indicator or digital speed-ometer (depending on selected setting in the control system)

157,175

� Transmission position indicator

195

� Gear range indicator 200

Item Page

� Distance warning func-tion* indicator

186

� LOW RANGE mode* indicator

204

� Downhill Speed Regula-tion (DSR) indicator

277

� Off-road driving program indicator

280

� Rear window wiper indicator

66

29

At a glance


Item Page

1 Multifunction display 157

Operating the control system

158

2 Telephone*:Press button

s to take a callto dialto redial

t to end a callto reject anincoming call

3 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume:Press button

æ up/to increase

ç down/to decrease

Item Page

4 Voice control System*1, see separate operating instructions

5 Moving within a menu:Press button

j for next display

k for previous display

6 Voice control System*1, see separate operating instructions

7 Menu systems:Press button

è for next menu

ÿ for previous menu

1 Vehicles without Voice Control System*: Button without function.

30

At a glance

Center console

�
Center console Upper part (Vehicles without enhanced off-road package*)
Item Page

1 COMAND system, see sepa-rate operating instructions

2 Climate control 216

3-zone automatic climate control*

230

Rear window defroster 215

3 Seat heating*, front passenger side

140

4 Seat ventilation*, front passenger side

142

5 Parktronic system* deactivation switch

293

6 Vehicle level control switch 283

7 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp

85,448,450

Item Page

8 Storage compartment* 318

9 Alarm system indicator lamp

112

a Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) switch

107

b Adaptive damping system (ADS)* switch (USA only)

280

c Seat ventilation*, driver’s side

142

d Seat heating*, driver’s side 140

e Switch for Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)

276

f Hazard warning flasher 151

g Switch for Off-road driving program

280

31

At a glance

Center console

Upper part (Vehicles with enhanced off-road package*)

Item Page

1 COMAND system, see sepa-rate operating instructions

2 Climate control 216


230

Rear window defroster 215

3 Seat heating*, front passenger side

140

4 Seat ventilation*, front passenger side

142

5 Rotary switch for differential locks*

207

6 Switch for LOW RANGE mode*

204

7 Switch for Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)

276

8 Rotary switch for vehicle level control

285

Item Page


112

a Seat ventilation*, driver’s side

142

b Seat heating*, driver’s side 140

c Adaptive damping system (ADS)* switch

280

d Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) switch

107

e Parktronic system* deactivation switch

293

f Hazard warning flasher 151

g Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp

85,448,450

32

At a glance

Center console

Lower part Item Page

1 Storage compartment 318

� Power outlet 325

� Ashtray with cigarette lighter*

322

2 Cup holder 321

3 Armrest telephone* tray release

318

4 Armrest storage compart-ment release

318

5 Card, ticket holder (removable)

321

33

At a glance

Overhead control panel

Item Page

1 Left reading lamp switch 151

2 Rear interior lighting switch 151

3 Automatic interior lighting switch

151

4 Front interior lighting switch 151

5 Right reading lamp switch 151

6 Front right interior lamp 151

7 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* switch

253

8 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button

335

9 Interior rear view mirror 210

a Front right reading lamp 151

Item Page

b Front left reading lamp 151

c Garage door opener 340

d Vehicles without telephone* installed:Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid (emergency call system)

332

e Vehicles with telephone* installed:Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid (emergency call system) and telephone*

332

f Front left interior lamp 151

34

At a glance

Door control panel

�
Door control panel
Item Page

1 Inside door handle 122

2 Central unlocking switchCentral locking switch

131131

3 Exterior rear view mirror adjustment

52

4 Selection buttons for exteri-or rear view mirror adjust-mentPower-folding exterior rear view mirrors*

52

211

5 Switches for opening/clos-ing front and rear door windows

248

6 Rear door window override switch

100

7 Hinged quarter window switch*

250

8 Remote tailgate release switch, power tailgate*

126125

35

At a glance


36

At a glance


Item Page

1 Parcel net in front passen-ger footwell

320

2 Glove box/CD changer 316

3 Door pocket

4 Parcel net on front passen-ger seat backrest

320

5 Door pocket

6 Cup holder 322

7 Vehicle tool kit, spare wheel 495

8 First aid kit 495

9 Cup holder 322

a Door pocket

b Parcel net on driver’s seat backrest

320

Item Page

c Door pocket

d Holder for gas cards 213

e Depending on vehicle con-figuration:Storage compartmentAshtray*

318322

f Cup holders 321

g Telephone* trayStorage compartment with coin holder

318

318

h Rear storage compartment 319

j Cup holder in rear armrest 321

37

38

39

Getting started

Unlocking

Adjusting

Driving

Parking and locking

Getting started

The “Getting started” section provides an overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor-mation given here.

If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the “Controls in detail” section will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.

Unlocking

40

Unlocking with the SmartKey

SmartKey

1 ‹ Lock button2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate3 Œ Unlock button4 Â Panic button (� page 102)

� Press unlock button Œ on the SmartKey.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. The locator light-ing comes on if the feature is enabled in the control system (� page 179).

� Enter the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

For more information, see “Locking and unlocking” (� page 114).

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Getting started

Unlocking

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*

With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can lock or unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the SmartKey and start the engine without in-serting the SmartKey into the starter switch.

� Grasp an outside door handle.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The ve-hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. The locator light-ing comes on if the feature is enabled in the control system (� page 179).

� Enter the vehicle.

For more information, see “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*” (� page 117).

Starter switch positions

i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away from the respective door.

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

i If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

41

Getting started

Unlocking

SmartKey

Starter switch

0 For removing SmartKey1 Power supply for some electrical con-

sumers, such as seat adjustment2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical

consumers) and driving positionAll lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instru-ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster re-

mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (� page 436).

3 Starting position

i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-tor and warning lamps (except high beam head-lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (ex-cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) will go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.

i When the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch and the automatic transmission is in a position other than P, the automatic trans-mission automatically shifts to P.

! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient-ly charged.

� Check the battery and charge it if necessary (� page 530).

� Get a jump start (� page 538).

To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation.

42

Getting started

Unlocking

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO feature are supplied with a SmartKey with integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inserted and the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO present in the vehicle, press-ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

� without the brake pedal depressed corresponds to the various starter switch positions (� page 44)

� with the brake pedal firmly depressed will start the engine (� page 57)

If you wish or should there be a need to insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the starter switch, the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be easily removed by pulling it out of the starter switch.

1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button2 Starter switch

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

3 USA only4 Canada only

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.

� Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 into starter switch 2 (if not inserted already).

� Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P (� page 194).

� Do not depress the brake pedal.

i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does not need to be removed from the starter switch when you leave the vehicle. However, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you when you leave the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s electrical systems can be switched on or the engine can be started using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

43

Getting started

Unlocking

Position 0

Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).

Position 1

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.

This supplies power for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment.

Ignition (or Position 2)

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.

This supplies power for all electrical consumers.

All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instru-ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster re-mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (� page 436).

For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*” (� page 59).

For more information on KEYLESS-GO, see “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*” (� page 117).

i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

� once more, the ignition (position 2) is switched on

� twice more, the power supply is again switched off i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO

start/stop button once more, the power supply is again switched off.

i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica-tor lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.

44

Getting started

Adjusting

�
Adjusting
Seats

Warning! G

All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas-tening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion.

Warning! G

Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-domen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the

wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and belts are properly positioned on the body.

Warning! G

Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (� page 54).

Observe the following points:

� Adjust the backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steer-ing wheel

� Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The po-sition should be as far back as possible with the driver still able to operate the controls properly.

� Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level.

� Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is be-ing adjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle.

Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open.

Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

45

Getting started

Adjusting

Seat adjustment

The seat adjustment switch is located on the entry side of each front seat base.

1 Head restraint height (vehicles with memory function)*

2 Seat cushion tilt3 Seat height4 Backrest tilt5 Seat fore and aft adjustment

Warning! G

Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag deactiva-tion system, Canada only:Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the front passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

Warning! G

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat-ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For addi-tional information, see “Children in the vehi-cle” (� page 93).

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

46

Getting started

Adjusting

� Switch on the ignition (� page 42).

or

Vehicles with memory function*:

� Open the respective door.

The seat can be adjusted with the respective door opened.

or

Vehicles without memory function*:

� The seat can be adjusted within 3 minutes after either front door has been opened.

Seat fore and aft adjustment

� Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 5.

Seat height

� Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 3.

Seat cushion tilt

� Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 until your upper legs are lightly supported.

Seat backrest tilt

� Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4.

! When moving the seats, make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats; otherwise you could damage the seats.

! When the second-row seats are folded forward, e.g. for cargo compartment expansion (� page 306), the front seats may not be moved to the rearmost position. Otherwise you could damage the front and second-row seats.

! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and head restraint height, make sure the sun visor is folded up (� page 213). If the head restraint is in the uppermost position, it could hit and damage the sun visor.

i The memory function* (� page 143) lets you store the settings for the seat positions together with the settings for the steering wheel column and the exterior rear view mirrors.

47

Getting started

Adjusting

Head restraint height

Vehicles with memory function*:

� Press switch 1 (� page 46) up or down in direction of arrow.

Vehicles without memory function*:

1 Head restraint2 Release button

Raising:

� Manually adjust the height of head restraint 1 by pulling it upward.

If head restraint 1 is fully retracted, push release button 2 in direction of arrow and pull head restraint 1 up-ward.

Lowering:

� To lower head restraint 1, push release button 2 in direction of arrow and press down on head restraint 1.

Warning! G

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intend-ed to help reduce injuries during an accident.

With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly.

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned and engaged head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-tential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

! Do not attempt to remove front seat head restraints. They can only be removed by qualified technicians. We recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

48

Getting started

Adjusting

Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.

� While seated, reach behind you with both hands and find lower edge of the head restraint.

� Adjust the head restraint to the desired position by pushing or pulling on the lower edge of the head restraint cush-ion.

For more information, see “Seats” (� page 132).

Steering wheel

Easy-entry/exit feature*

This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle. When entering and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in its uppermost position.

The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the control system (� page 184).

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you:

� close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on

or

� insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (� page 43) once with the driver’s door closed

Warning! G

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To stop steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

� Move steering wheel adjustment stalk* (� page 52).

� Press one of the memory position buttons or memory button M* (� page 144).

Do not leave children unattended in the ve-hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

49

Getting started

Adjusting

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards when you:

� remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

or

� open the driver’s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 (� page 41) or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 1 (� page 43)

Steering wheel adjustment, manual

Make sure that

� you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows

� you can move your legs freely

� all displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible

The steering wheel adjustment release handle is located on the lower left of the steering column.

i The last set steering wheel position is stored when

� the ignition is switched off (� page 41)

� the position is stored in memory (� page 144)

i If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted, when the engine is started.

Warning! G

Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in mo-tion. All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in mo-tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose con-trol of the vehicle.

Warning! G

Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehi-cle at a standstill and make sure the steer-ing wheel is securely locked in place before driving off.

Driving without the steering wheel adjust-ment locked may cause an unexpected steering wheel movement which could cause the driver to lose control of the vehi-cle. Make sure the steering wheel is secure-ly locked by trying to move it up and down, and in and out before driving off.

50

Getting started

Adjusting

1 Release handle

� To unlock the steering column, pull release handle 1 out to its stop limit.

� Move steering wheel to the desired position.

� Push release handle 1 back to its original position to relock the steering column.

The steering column is locked into po-sition again.

� Make sure the steering column is securely locked by trying to move the steering wheel up and down as well as in and out before driving off.

Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*

Make sure that

� you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows

� you can move your legs freely

� all displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible

The steering wheel adjustment stalk is located on the lower left of the steering column.

Warning! G

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-ing could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle.

Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

i The memory function* (� page 143) lets you store the settings for the steering wheel col-umn together with the settings for seat positions and the exterior rear view mirrors.

51

Getting started

Adjusting

1 Adjusting steering column, in or out2 Adjusting steering column, up or down


or

� Open the driver’s door.

Adjusting steering column in or out

� Move stalk forward or back in direction of arrow 1.

Adjusting steering column up or down

� Move stalk up or down in direction of arrow 2.

Mirrors

Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi-tions.

Interior rear view mirror

� Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror.

For more information, see “Rear view mir-rors” (� page 210).

Exterior rear view mirrors

The buttons are located on the driver’s door.

1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror button

2 Adjustment button3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-

ror button


� Press button 1 for the driver’s side ex-terior rear view mirror or button 3 for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.

The indicator lamp on the respective button comes on for approximately 15 seconds.

Warning! G

Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Ob-jects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

52

Getting started

Adjusting

� Push adjustment button 2 up, down, left, or right according to the desired setting.

For more information, see “Rear view mir-rors” (� page 210).

i If you do not make adjustments to the selected exterior rear view mirror within 15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. You will then have to select the desired exterior rear view mirror again before any adjustments can be made. Adjustments can only be made with the indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear view mirror button illuminated.

! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place. The mirror housing is then properly posi-tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.

! Vehicle with power folding exterior rear view mirrors*:If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), press fold button 1 (� page 212) to fold mirrors in, then press fold button 1 (� page 212) again to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjustment mechanism.

The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual man-ner.

i The memory function* (� page 143) lets you store the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the setting for the steering wheel column and the seat positions.

At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.

i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.

53

Getting started

Driving

Fastening the seat belts

Warning! G

Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-structing the pedal’s range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance.

During sudden driving or braking maneu-vers, the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.

Warning! G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts (� page 88).

Warning! G


54

Getting started

Driving

Warning! G

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat-ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle” (� page 93).


Warning! G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-domen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning! G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-rectly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one per-son at a time.

Warning! G

Read and observe the additional warning no-tices printed in the “Safety and Security” section (� page 78) and (� page 88).

55

Getting started

Driving

1 Seat belt outlet2 Latch plate3 Buckle4 Release button

� With a smooth motion, pull the belt out of seat belt outlet 1.

� Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips.

� Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 (� page 56) until it clicks.

� If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.

Seat belt height adjustment

1 Release button

� Press release button 1 and move the seat belt height adjuster upward or downward.

Proper use of seat belts

� Do not twist the belt when fastening.

� Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm. For this purpose, you can adjust the height of the belt outlet (� page 56).

� Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen.

� Place the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible.

56

Getting started

Driving

� Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

� Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

� Check your seat belt periodically during travel to make sure that it is properly positioned.

� Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing.

Starting the engineWarning! G

Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.

Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effective-ness of the belts.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-consciousness and possible death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one win-dow fully open.

57

Getting started

Driving

Automatic transmission

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

P Park positionR Reverse gearN NeutralD Drive position

For more information on how to operate the gear selector lever, see “Automatic transmission” (� page 192).

Starting with the SmartKey

For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey, see “Turning off the en-gine” (� page 69).

Gasoline engine

� Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P.

The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P (� page 157).

� Do not depress the accelerator.

� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (� page 41) and hold until the engine starts.

Diesel engine




� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 (� page 42).

Preglow indicator lamp q in the instrument cluster comes on.

� As soon as preglow indicator lamp q goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (� page 42) and release it.

The engine starts automatically.i You can also use the “touch-start” function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts auto-matically.

i If the engine is at operating temperature, preglow indicator lamp q may not stay on and you can start the engine without preglowing.

58

Getting started

Driving

Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the starter switch.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

1 USA only2 Canada only

� Make sure KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 is inserted in the starter switch (� page 43).

For information on turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*” (� page 70).

Gasoline engine



� Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure.


� Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 once.

The engine starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.

Warning! G

As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise acci-dentally start the engine.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

i If you wish to start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO feature, remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the starter switch (� page 43).

59

Getting started

Driving

Diesel engine


The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P.

� Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure.


� Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 once.

The engine preglows and starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.

Starting difficulties

If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps:

� If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure.

� If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

Or:

� Remove KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button from starter switch (� page 43).

� Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

� Repeat the starting procedure (� page 57). Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.

� Get a jump start (� page 538).

If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a mal-function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system.

� Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance.

Parking brake

1 Parking brake pedal2 Release handle

i If the engine is at operating temperature, the time the engine needs to preglow is reduced.

60

Getting started

Driving

� Release the parking brake by pulling on release handle 2.

The warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out.

Driving off

� Depress the brake pedal.

The gear selector lever can now be used.

� Shift automatic transmission to D or R (� page 194).

� Release the brake pedal.

� Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

After a cold start, the automatic transmis-sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. This allows the catalytic converter (gaso-line engine) or the oxidation catalyst (die-sel engine) to reach its operating temperature earlier.

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an acci-dent and/or serious personal injury.

i Wait for the gear selection process to com-plete before setting the vehicle in motion.

i Shifting from gear position P to position R, N, or D is only possible with the brake pedal depressed. Without the brake pedal depressed, the gear selector lever can be moved, but the parking pawl remains engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.

! If you hear a warning signal and the message Release parking brake appears in the multifunction display when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake.

Release the parking brake (� page 60).

i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down.

The automatic door lock feature can be deactivated (� page 183).

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

61

Getting started

Driving

For more information, see “Driving instruc-tions” (� page 349).

For information on off-road driving, see “Off-road driving” (� page 357).

Switching on headlamps

Low beam headlamps

The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

Exterior lamp switch

1 Off2 Low beam headlamps on

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position B.

The low beam headlamps come on.

Warning! G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-vent this type of loss of control.

Warning! G

It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans-mission out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

! Shift the automatic transmission to position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission.

! Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine.

! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.

62

Getting started

Driving

High beam

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Combination switch

1 High beam2 High beam flasher

� Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on (� page 26).

For more information on headlamps, see “Lighting” (� page 145).

Turn signals


Combination switch

1 Turn signals, right2 Turn signals, left

� Press the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 or 2.

The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp L or K in the instrument cluster flashes (� page 26).

The combination switch resets automati-cally after major steering wheel move-ment.

Windshield wipers


Combination switch

1 Single wipeWiping with windshield washer fluid

2 Switching on windshield wipers

i To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes, press combination switch only to point of resistance and release. The corre-sponding turn signal will flash three times.

63

Getting started

Driving


Switching on windshield wipers

� Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.

M Windshield wipers off

U Slow intermittent wipingRain sensor operation with low sensitivity.

V Fast intermittent wipingRain sensor operation with high sensitivity.

u Slow continuous wiping

t Fast continuous wiping

Intermittent wiping

Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet weather conditions or in the presence of precipitation.

When you select intermittent wiping, the rain sensor is activated. The rain sensor automatically sets a suitable wiping interval depending on the wetness of the sensor surface.

� Turn the combination switch to positionU orV.

! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the windshield wipers with wind-shield washer fluid (� page 65).

! If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate-ly.

� For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe location and

� remove SmartKey from starter switch

or

� turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is in position 0, same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch)

before attempting to remove any blockage.

� Remove blockage.

� Turn the windshield wipers on again.

If windshield wipers fail to function at all in the combination switch positionU orV,

� set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed

� have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center

! Do not leave windshield wipers on an inter-mittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield clean-ing. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result.

! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows. You should therefore switch off the windshield wipers when weather conditions are dry.

64

Getting started

Driving

After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor.

Single wipe

� Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 1 to the resistance point.

The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid.

Wiping with windshield washer fluid

� Press the combination switch in direc-tion of arrow 1 past the resistance point.

The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid.

For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (� page 384).

Rear window wiper/washer


Combination switch

1 Rear window wiper switch2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid3 Intermittent wiping4 Rear window wiper off5 Wiping rear window with washer fluid

i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened. This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicle from being sprayed.

Intermittent wiping will be continued when all doors are closed and

� the automatic transmission is set to position D or R

or

� the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch

i To prevent smears on the windshield or noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining.

��

65

Getting started

Driving

�

6 Rear window wiper indicator


Activating intermittent wipe

� Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to position 3 (� page 65).

In the lower multifunction display you will see indicator 6, indicating that the rear window wiper is activated.

Deactivating intermittent wipe

� Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to position 4 (� page 65).

Indicator 6 (� page 66) for the rear window wiper is cleared from the lower multifunction display, indicating that the rear window wiper is deactivated.

Wiping with windshield washer fluid

� Turn and hold rear window wiper switch 1 in position 2 or 5 (� page 65) until the rear window is clean.

The rear window wiper operates with washer fluid.


Problems while driving

The engine runs erratically and misfires

� An ignition cable may be damaged (gasoline engine only).

� The engine electronics may not be operating properly.

� Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it (gasoline engine only).

� Give very little gas.

� Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

i The rear window wiper engages automatical-ly when the automatic transmission is shifted to position R with the windshield wipers switched on.

�

66

Getting started

Driving

The coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C)

The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine.

� Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and turn off the en-gine. Allow engine and coolant to cool off.

� Check the coolant level and add cool-ant if necessary (� page 382).

In case of accident

If the vehicle is leaking fuel:

� Do not start the engine under any circumstances.

� Notify local fire and/or police authori-ties.

If the extent of the damage cannot be de-termined:

� Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance.

If no damage can be determined on the

� major assemblies

� fuel system

� engine mount:

� Start the engine in the usual manner.

67

Getting started

Parking and locking

You have now completed your first drive. You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows.

Parking brake

1 Parking brake pedal2 Release handle

Warning! G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and the steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Warning! G

Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-bustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

To reduce the risk of personal injury, or damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

� Keep right foot on brake pedal.

� Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

� Shift the automatic transmission to position P.

� Slowly release brake pedal.

� When parked on an incline, turn front wheel towards the road curb.

� Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch position 0 and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.

� Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle when leaving.

Warning! G

Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the vehi-cle’s brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged.

68

Getting started

Parking and locking

� Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1.

When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster comes on.

Switching off headlamps

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to M (� page 62).

For more information, see “Lighting” (� page 145).

Turning off the engine

� Shift the automatic transmission to position P (� page 194).

� Apply the parking brake (� page 68).

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or shift the automatic transmission out of position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning! G

Getting out of your vehicle with the automatic transmission not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (� page 194).

When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel towards the road curb.

i If the engine cannot be turned off as described, see “Emergency engine shut-down” (� page 546).

Warning! G

Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. With the en-gine not running, there is no power assis-tance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-essary to brake and steer the vehicle.

i Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting the automatic transmission to position P (� page 194).

When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel towards the road curb. ��

69

Getting started

Parking and locking

�

Turning off with the SmartKey


� Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

The immobilizer is activated.

Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (� page 43) to turn off the engine.

With the driver’s door closed, the start-er switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s door opened, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch (� page 41).

If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and can-not turn it off as described above:

� Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the starter switch.

� Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO into the starter switch.

The engine turns off. The starter switch is in position 0 (� page 41).

! Observe instructions when taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash (� page 428).

! If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, the transmission will shift to position P automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone will not automatically shift the transmission to position P.

i In an emergency you can turn off the engine while driving by pressing and holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button for approximately 3 seconds.

! If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a front door, the transmission will shift to position P automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone will not automatically shift the transmis-sion to position P.

�

70

Getting started

Parking and locking

Releasing seat belts

� Press the seat belt release button (� page 56).

Allow the retractor to completely re-wind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate.

Locking

� Exit the vehicle and close all doors and the tailgate.

! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be espe-cially careful when small children are around.

Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing.

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-attended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

i If you hear a warning signal you have forgotten to switch off the headlamps before opening the driver’s door.

In addition the message Switch off lights appears in the multifunction display.

Switch off the headlamps.

! Failure to switch off the headlamps when leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged battery.

71

Getting started

Parking and locking

Locking with the SmartKey

� Press lock button ‹ on the SmartKey (� page 40).

With the tailgate and all doors closed, the turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.


Locking with KEYLESS-GO*

1 Lock button on the outside door handle

� Press lock button 1 on an outside door handle.

With the tailgate and all doors closed, the turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.


72

73

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Panic alarm

Driving safety systems

Anti-theft systems

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

In this section you will learn the most im-portant facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle.

The restraint systems are

� Seat belts (� page 88)

� Child restraints (� page 99)

� Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) (� page 97)

Additional protection potential provide

� Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with

� Air bags (� page 76)

� Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)

� Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for seat belts (� page 91)

� Seat belt force limiter (� page 91)

� Active head restraints (� page 92)

Air bag system components with

� Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp (� page 85)

� Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System* (OCS) (� page 81)

� Canada only:Front passenger seat with BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system (� page 87)

Although independent systems, their protective functions work in conjunction with each other.

The SRS system conducts a self-test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine is running. This facilitates early detection of malfunctions. The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster (� page 26) comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine was started.

The SRS components are in operational readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running.

A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp:

� fails to go out not later than approxi-mately 4 seconds after the engine was started

� does not come on at all

� comes on after the engine was started or while driving

i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (� page 93).

74

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warning! G

Modifications to or work improperly con-ducted on restraint systems (such as seat belts and anchors, emergency tensioning devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags) or their wiring, as well as tampering with in-terconnected electronic systems, can lead to the restraint systems no longer function-ing as intended.

Air bags or emergency tensioning devices, for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the de-celeration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the re-straint systems. Do not tamper with elec-tronic components or their software.

Warning! G

In the event that the 1 indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi-ately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not deploy when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fa-tal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

In addition, improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a local authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details.

75

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Air bags

Warning! G

Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side impact air bags and window curtain air bags) or rollovers (window curtain air bags). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem-porary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

Warning! G

To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their respective seat belt.

For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is properly positioned on your body (� page 54).

Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye:

� Sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest.

� Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi-ble rearward, still permitting proper op-eration of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breast-bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combina-tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

� Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.

� Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-side the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver’s front air bag inflates.

� Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.

76

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

� Always sit as upright as possible, prop-erly use the seat belts and use an appro-priately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

� Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system, Canada only:Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deacti-vate the front passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, seri-ous or fatal injury will result.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual.

Warning! G

Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat.

It should be noted that with respect to both, front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags*, there is a possibility for a side impact air bag related injury if occu-pants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.

To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possible, properly use the seat belts, and for all children 12 years old and under, use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-mended for the size and weight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

i Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), and in side impacts (side impact and window curtain air bags) which exceed preset thresholds, and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags). Only during these events will they provide their sup-plemental protection.

The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for air bags to provide their supplemental protec-tion.

In case of other types of impacts and impacts be-low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible pro-tection in a rollover.

We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.

It is important to your safety and that of your pas-sengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.

77

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and air bag

Warning! G

� Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use belts in-stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

� Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that is deployed must be replaced.

� Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.

� Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts.

� Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide ade-quate protection.

� No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS, the installation of additional trim material, badges, etc. over the steering wheel hub, front passenger front air bag cover, outboard sides of the seat back-rests, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purs-es, umbrellas, etc.).

� Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may turn into projec-tiles and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag is deployed.

� Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch.

� Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

� In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

� For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be fol-lowed. These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

� Given the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the textile structure of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment.

78

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual.

Front air bags

1 Driver air bag2 Passenger air bag

Driver and front passenger front air bags are deployed:

� in the event of certain frontal impacts

� if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

� independently of the side impact air bags

Warning! G

Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags*. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

i The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera-tion as assessed by the air bag control unit.

Vehicles with OCS* only:On the front passenger-side, the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger’s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (� page 81).

Vehicles with OCS* only:The lighter the front passenger side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag.

79

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deploy-ment thresholds. You will then be protec-ted by the fastened seat belts.

The front passenger front air bag will only be deployed if:

� the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied

� the 59 indicator lamp in the center console is not lit (� page 85)

� the impact exceeds a preset deploy-ment threshold

Side impact air bags, window curtain air bags

1 Front side impact air bag2 Window curtain air bag3 Rear side impact air bag*

The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed:

� on the impacted side of the vehicle

� in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-ment threshold

� independently of the front air bags

In addition, the window curtain air bags 2 are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers.

! Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system, Canada only:Do not place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This could cause the front or side impact air bag on the front passen-ger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold.

Warning! G

The pressure sensors for side impact air bag control are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trim panels including, for example, the addi-tion of door speakers.

Improper repair work on the doors or the modification or addition of components to the doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

80

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

The side impact air bags and window cur-tain air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deploy-ment threshold.

Vehicles with OCS* only:The front passenger side impact air bag will not deploy if the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is empty and the front passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch plate is not inserted into the buckle). With an empty front passenger seat and the seat belt fastened (latch plate properly in-serted into buckle) the front passenger side impact air bag will deploy indepen-dently of the empty seat.

Occupant Classification System*

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) automatically turns the front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classi-fied occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the front passenger seat.

Occupants must sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean-ing on armrests), the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant’s weight category.

Warning! G

Only use seat covers which have been test-ed and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags*. Contact your autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

i The system does not deactivate the front passenger side impact air bag, the window curtain air bag, and the emergency tensioning device.

81

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-pear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat, other passen-gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged underneath the seat or stuffed between seat and middle console or between seat and door or due to objects applying pres-sure on the back of the seat. Always make sure that the seat has clearance in all directions at all times.

Both, driver and the front passenger should always use the 59 indicator lamp as an indi-cation of whether or not the front passen-ger is properly positioned.

i If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.

Warning! G

If the 59 indicator lamp illumi-nates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger re-position himself or herself in the seat until the 59 indicator lamp goes out, or check whether objects are caught under or around the seat.

More information about air bag display mes-sages (� page 463).

In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child re-straint or if the front passenger seat is sensed as being empty.

When the OCS senses that the front passen-ger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the 59 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is start-ed and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deacti-vated.

When the OCS senses that the front passen-ger seat is classified as being empty, the 59 indicator lamp will illumi-nate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

82

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

When the OCS senses that the front passen-ger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the 59 indicator lamp will illu-minate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the 59 indicator lamp illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deacti-vated. With the 59 indicator lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is activated.

When the OCS senses that the front passen-ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the 59 indicator lamp will illumi-nate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is activated.

If the 59 indicator lamp is illu-minated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.

If the 59 indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed:

� in the event of certain frontal impacts

� if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

� independently of the side impact air bags.

If the front passenger front air bag is de-ployed, the rate of inflation will be influ-enced by:

� the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit

� the front passenger’s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS)

Warning! G

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat-ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.

The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. ��

83

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

�
Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front pas-senger seat:
� Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropri-ate child restraint on the front passen-ger seat.

� A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious-ly injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac-ing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat.

� If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure that the 59 indicator lamp is illumi-nated, indicating that the front passen-ger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 59 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 59 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 59 indicator lamp is illumi-nated. If the 59 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious-ly injured or even killed if the front pas-senger front air bag inflates.

� If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated (� page 83).

�

84

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

The 59 indicator lamp is located in the center console.

1 59 indicator lamp

The 59 indicator lamp 1 will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the starter switch in position 0 (� page 41).

i Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the front passenger front air bag also should have deployed.

The Occupant Classification System (� page 81) may have determined:

� that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint – both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the im-pact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag.

� that the seat was occupied by a small individ-ual (such as a young teenager or a small adult) or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint – instances where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of suffi-cient severity to deploy the driver front air bag.

Warning! G

If the 1 indicator lamp and the 59 indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System. The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS:

� Do not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into the parcel net on the back of the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category.

� Do not place objects under and/or around the front passenger seat. ��

85

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

�
Self-test Occupant Classification System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice, the 59 indicator lamp (� page 85) located in the center console illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult, the 59 indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approxi-mately 6 seconds.

If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the front passenger seat as being empty, the 59 indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out.

For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (� page 448).

� Do not hang anything from or attach any items to the seats.

� Do not stuff objects such as books be-tween the middle console and the front passenger seat.

� Do not move the front passenger seat backwards against stiff objects.

� Sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest.

� Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-self from the seat by using the handle over the door as this may cause the OCS to be unable to correctly approximate the occupant weight category.

� Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

� Read and observe all warnings in this chapter.

Warning! G

If the 59 indicator lamp should not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat.

Warning! G

Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi-cation System. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protec-tion for the child.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of child seats.

�

86

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system (Canada only)

1 59 indicator lamp

Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz system, are required for use with the BabySmartTM air bag deactiva-tion system. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for in-formation on availability. With the special child seat properly installed, the front pas-senger front air bag will not deploy.

The 59 indicator lamp locat-ed in the center console will be illuminat-ed, except with the SmartKey removed or the starter switch in position 0.

Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed

After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice, the 59 indicator lamp located in the center console comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then goes out.

If the 59 indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before seating any child on the passenger seat.

More information can be found in the “Practical hints” section (� page 450).

i The system does not deactivate the side im-pact air bag, the window curtain air bag and the emergency tensioning device.

Warning! G

The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation sys-tem will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible.

Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-tem. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of protecting the child.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats.

87

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Seat belts

The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint system is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.

Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.

For more information, see “Fastening the seat belts” (� page 54).

Warning! G

When using a BabySmartTM compatible child seat on the front passenger seat, the front passenger front air bag will not deploy only if the 59 indicator lamp re-mains illuminated.

Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat. Should the indicator lamp go out while the restraint is installed, please check installa-tion. If the indicator lamp remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to trans-port children on the front passenger seat un-til the system has been repaired.

Warning! G

Do not place powered-on laptops, cell phones, electronic tags such as those used in ski passes and like electronic devices on the front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM system. Such signal interference may cause the 59 indicator lamp not to come on during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating that the system is not function-ing.

i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (� page 93).

88

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warning! G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.

Warning! G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-domen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning! G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-rectly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one per-son at a time.

Warning! G

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked.

Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

89

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warning! G

USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY

� Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this sec-tion, as that could result in serious inju-ries in case of an accident.

� Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, includ-ing rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver air bag, pas-senger front air bag, side impact air bags, window curtain air bags for side windows), ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to en-hance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags and ETD) and side (side impact, window curtain air bags and ETD) im-pacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (win-dow curtain air bags and ETD).

� Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoul-der. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would in-crease the chance of head and neck in-juries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal or-gans such as your liver or spleen.

� Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys, etc., as these might cause injuries.

� Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo-men. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.

� Never use a seat belt for more than one person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects.

� Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries.

� Pregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres-sure on the abdomen.

� Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

� When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

90

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Enhanced seat belt reminder system

When the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < will always illuminate for 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning chime will also sound for a maxi-mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is fastened.

If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with front doors closed,

� the seat belt telltale < remains illu-minated for as long as either the driv-er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

� and if the vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale < starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver’s and the front passenger’s seat belt are fastened

If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the warning chime stops sounding, the seat belt telltale < stops flashing but continues to be illu-minated.

The seat belt telltale < will only go out if both the driver’s and the front passen-ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened.

For more information, see “Practical hints” (� page 443).

Emergency tensioning device (ETD), seat belt force limiter

The seat belts for the front and second-row outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and seat belt force lim-iters. The seat belts for the third-row seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices.

The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases:

� in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold

� in certain vehicle rollovers

� if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see 1 indicator lamp (� page 445)

i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-vate if the respective front seat belt is fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle).

The ETDs for the rear outer seats (second-row seats) or rear seats (third-row seats) will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened.

91

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Belt force limiters, when activated, are employed to help reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.

Active head restraint

The active head restraints are intended to offer the driver and front passenger increased protection from whiplash type injuries. In the event of a rear-end collision, the active head restraints on the driver’s and front passenger’s seats are designed to move forward in the direction of travel, providing the head with increased support earlier on in the collision sequence. The active head restraints move forward whether the seat is occupied or not.

Warning! G

A pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced.

When disposing of the pyrotechnic emer-gency tensioning device, our safety instruc-tions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraint. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the head restraints posts. Otherwise, the active head restraints may not be able to function properly or offer the intended degree of protection in the event of an accident.

Warning! G

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

92

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

You cannot remove the active head restraint on the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

For information on head restraint adjust-ment, see “Seats” (� page 45).

For information on resetting the activated active head restraints, see “Resetting acti-vated head restraints” (� page 504).

Rear head restraints Children in the vehicle

If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle:

� Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child.

� Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Warning! G

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly.


Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Warning! G

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child re-straint system. The children could

� injure themselves on parts of the vehicle

� be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold ��

93

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

�
Infant and child restraint systems
We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system, Canada only:Only use a BabySmartTM compatible child restraint for the front passenger seat in this vehicle.

All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints.

To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is acti-vated. The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack.

To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. To deacti-vate the special seat belt retractor for the front passenger seat, the front passenger

seat must be in the most backward posi-tion. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner.

The use of infant or child restraints is re-quired by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.

Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts.

If children open a door, they could

� injure other persons

� get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic

Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger or cargo compartment unless they are firmly secured in place. For more in-formation, see “Loading” (� page 297) and “Useful features” (� page 316).

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child’s risk of injury in the event of

� strong braking maneuvers

� sudden changes of direction

� an accident

Warning! G

Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated.

i For information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages, see “Installation of infant and child restraint system” (� page 99).

For information on LATCH-type child seat mounts, see “Child seat anchors – LATCH type” (� page 97).

�

94

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the child restraint, that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

A statement by the child restraint manu-facturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.

When using any infant or child restraint system, make sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Please read and observe warning labels affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to infant or child restraints.

Warning! G


Warning! G

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat-ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.

The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. ��

95

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

�
Always sit as upright as possible, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following im-portant information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat:

� Vehicles with OCS* only:Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.

� A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious-ly injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac-ing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat.

� If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat be-cause circumstances require you to do so, make sure that the 59 indicator lamp is illumi-nated, indicating that the front passen-ger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 59 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 59 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the lamp is illumi-nated. If the 59 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be serious-ly injured or even killed if the front pas-senger front air bag inflates.

�

96

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Child seat anchors – LATCH type

This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of the outer rear seats) for the installation of a LATCH child seat with matching mounting fittings.

� If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and se-cure child restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated (� page 82).

Warning! G

Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.


Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lb until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system.A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning! G

Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-der, not face or neck.

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 lb until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

Install child seat according to manufactu-rer’s instructions.

The child seat must be firmly attached to the right and left side anchors 2 (� page 98). ��

97

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

�
The LATCH anchors are blended with covers.
Example, second-row seats

1 Anchorage ring covers

� Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from the seat on which a child seat is to be installed.

Example, second-row seats

2 Anchors

� Install a LATCH type child seat accord-ing to the manufacturer’s instructions.

An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child.

Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be re-placed.

Do not leave children unattended in the ve-hicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system.

! Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can operate freely with a child seat installed.

i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

�

98

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Installation of infant and child restraint system

This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at the second-row seat backrest. For installing an infant and child restraint system at the third-row seats, use the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment (� page 305).

1 Anchorage ring cover

� Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from seat backrest of the seat on which a child seat is to be installed.

2 Anchorage ring3 Hook

� Move the respective head restraint to its uppermost position (� page 137).

2 Anchorage ring3 Hook4 Top tether strap

� Guide top tether strap 4 between head restraint and top of seat backrest.

i For safety, make sure hook 3 has attached to anchorage ring 2 beyond the safety catch, as illustrated.

99

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

� Securely fasten hook 3, which is part of the tether strap 4, to anchorage ring 2.

Make sure

� the top tether strap is not twisted

� the head restraint is installed and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back-rest

� top tether strap is positioned be-tween the seat backrest and the cargo compartment cover blind (if installed)

� the top tether strap is positioned between the seat backrest and the cargo net* (if installed)

� Lower the head restraint if necessary (� page 137).

Make sure the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat backrest.

� Install the child restraint system and tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions.

Blocking of rear door window operation

With the override switch you can disable the rear side window switches in the rear door panels.

Warning! G

After installing top tether straps, make sure that the seat backrests are in an upright po-sition and are properly locked. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If a seat backrest is not properly locked, the seat backrest could fold. The child seat would no longer be prop-erly supported or positioned to provide its intended benefit.

Warning! G

Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children could otherwise injure them-selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-dow opening.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

100

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

The override switch is located on the driver’s door control panel.

1 Override switch

For more information on power windows, see “Power windows” (� page 248).

Disabling

� Press override switch 1 until it engag-es.

The switch engages in the recessed position.

The rear door windows can no longer be operated using the switches located in the rear doors.

Enabling

� Press override switch 1 once more.

The switch disengages from its recessed position back to its original position.

The rear door windows can again be operated using the switches located in the rear doors.

i Operating the rear door windows using the switches located on the door control panel of the driver’s door is still possible.

101

Safety and Security

Panic alarm

1 Â button

Activating

� Press and hold button 1 for at least 1 second.

An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly.

Deactivating

� Press button 1 again.

or

� Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.

or

� Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (� page 43).

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in the vehicle.i USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.


102

Safety and Security


�
Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems:
� ABS (Antilock Brake System)

� BAS (Brake Assist System)

� ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

� EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)

� 4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)

ABS

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.

The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.

On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure.

The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster (� page 26) comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.

Warning! G

The following factors increase the risk of accidents:

� Excessive speed, especially in turns

� Wet and slippery road surfaces

� Following another vehicle too closely

The driving safety systems described in this section cannot reduce these risks or pre-vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle.

Always adapt your driving style to the pre-vailing road and weather conditions and keep a safe distance to other road users and objects in the street.

i In winter operation, the maximum effective-ness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, the EBP, and the 4-ETS is only achieved with winter tires (� page 420) or snow chains as required.

Warning! G

Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness.

103

Safety and Security


Braking

At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode.

� Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pul-sation.

Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Emergency brake maneuver

� Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal.

Off-road – ABS

With the off-road driving program switched on (� page 279), or with the transmission in LOW RANGE* mode (� page 203), the ABS designed for off-road use is automati-cally activated.

When applying the brakes at speeds below approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are locked cyclically to short-en the braking distance (dig-in effect). This affects steering the vehicle.


Warning! G

When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS, the ESP®, and the 4-ETS are also switched off. The basic driving and braking functions are still available.

When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability and extending the brak-ing distance.

Warning! G

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent acci-dents, including those resulting from

excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can pre-vent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

104

Safety and Security


BAS

The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby poten-tially reducing braking distance.

� Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over.

The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.

When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated.

ESP®

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is operational as soon as the engine is run-ning. It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling.

The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP® also helps stabilize the vehicle during braking and steering maneuvers.

The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-ment cluster (� page 26) flashes when the ESP® is engaged.

The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-ment cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.

Warning! G

If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-tem is still functioning, but without the addi-tional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

Warning! G

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ-ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger-ous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

105

Safety and Security


For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (� page 441) and (� page 459).

Warning! G

Never switch off the ESP® when you see the ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the in-strument cluster. In this case, proceed as follows:

� While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

� While driving, ease up on the accelera-tor.

� Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-ing from excessive speed.

Warning! G

The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-ties of an ESP® equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

! Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If such tests are necessary, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Because the ESP® operates automatically, the engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds.

Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i The ESP® will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size (� page 554).

106

Safety and Security


Switching off the ESP®

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off the ESP® in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as:

� when driving with snow chains

� in deep snow

� in sand or gravel

When you switch off the ESP®

� the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle

� the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip

� the 4-ETS will still apply the brake to a spinning wheel

� the ESP® continues to operate when you are braking

� you cannot activate the cruise control or the Distronic* system

� the cruise control or the Distronic* system switch off if currently activated

The ESP® switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

1 ESP® switch

� With the engine running, press ESP® switch 1.

The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on.

The ESP® is deactivated.

Warning! G

The ESP® should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum-stances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-dard driving maneuvers.

Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare wheel is mounted.

Warning! G

Switch on the ESP® immediately if the afore-mentioned circumstances do not apply any-more. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a wheel is spinning.

i When the ESP® is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle.

107

Safety and Security


Switching on the ESP®

� Press ESP® switch 1.

The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out.

You are now again in normal driving mode.


Off-road – ESP®

With the off-road driving program switched on (� page 279), or with the transmission in LOW RANGE* mode (� page 203), the ESP® designed for off-road use is automat-ically activated. At speeds below 27 mph (45 km/h), the ESP® assists in over-/un-dersteering, thus improving vehicle trac-tion.

ESP® Trailer Stabilization

If the trailer you are towing should begin to sway, the rig can only be stabilized by immediately applying the brakes hard. Steering during this maneuver will not help to stabilize the rig.

ESP® will assist you in such situations. ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts swaying and will apply the brakes to re-duce the vehicle speed to a non-critical speed that allows the vehicle-trailer combi-nation to stabilize.

The ESP® Trailer Stabilization is functional at vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/h) when the ESP® is switched on.

Warning! G

When the ESP® warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP® is switched off or is not operational due to a malfunction.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-ing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-tended period of time with the ESP® switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning G

The system will not be able to assist when the trailer jackknifes

� on wet or icy roads

� on roads with slippery surface

� in sand or gravel

Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip over before the system recognizes swaying of the trailer.

i If the ESP® has switched off due to a mal-function, ESP® cannot stabilize the rig.

108

Safety and Security


EBP

The EBP enhances braking effectiveness by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking effort without a loss of vehicle stability.


4-ETS

The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS) improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery road conditions. The brakes are applied to the spinning wheel and power is transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.

The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-ment cluster, starts to flash at any vehicle speed, as soon as a tire loses traction and the wheel begins to spin.

Warning! G

If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake sys-tem is still functioning. However, the rear wheels may lock during hard braking, caus-ing you to lose control over the vehicle and possibly causing an accident. Adjust your driving style to the non-operating status of the EBP.

i If conditions require, switch on off-road driving program (� page 279) or LOW RANGE* mode (� page 203).

Warning! G

When you see ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster, then pro-ceed as follows:

� While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

� While driving, ease up on the accelera-tor.

� Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resul-ting from excessive speed.

109

Safety and Security



Off-road - 4-ETS

With the off-road driving program switched on (� page 279), or with the transmission in LOW RANGE* mode (� page 203), the 4-ETS designed for off-road use is auto-matically activated.




i If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v comes on while driving, the 4-ETS is being switched off temporarily to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes. In addition, the message ESP inoperative See Operator’s Manual appears in the multifunction display.

110

Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems

�
Anti-theft systems Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle.

Activating

With the SmartKey


With KEYLESS-GO*

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (� page 43) on the starter switch once.

The engine is turned off.


Deactivating

With the SmartKey


With KEYLESS-GO*


Anti-theft alarm system

Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens

� a door

� the tailgate

� the hood

The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-ing element (a door, for example) is imme-diately closed.

The alarm system will also be triggered when

� the vehicle is opened with the mechan-ical key, see “Unlocking the vehicle” (� page 500)

� a door is opened from the inside, see “Opening the doors from the inside” (� page 122)

i Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer.

In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). i If the alarm stays on for more than

30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system (� page 332) provided that the Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS cover-age are available.

111

Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems

Arming the alarm system

The alarm system indicator lamp is located to the lower left of the hazard warning flasher.


� Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO* (� page 71).

The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked.

The alarm system is armed within ap-proximately 10 seconds. Alarm system indicator lamp 1 flashes.

Disarming the alarm system

� Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO* (� page 40).

The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed. Indicator lamp 1 goes out.

Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:

With the SmartKey

� Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

or

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

With KEYLESS-GO*


The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.

or

� Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (� page 43).

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle.

i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:

� a door

� the tailgate

Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.

i The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door nor the tailgate is opened.

112

113

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Seats

Memory function*

Lighting

Instrument cluster

Control system


Transfer case

Differential locks*

Good visibility

Climate control


Power windows

Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

Driving systems

Loading

Useful features

Controls in detail

In the “Controls in detail” section you will find detailed information on how to oper-ate the equipment installed in your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the “Getting started” section of this manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.


114

For more information on locking and un-locking, see the “Getting started” section (� page 40) and (� page 71).

SmartKey

Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key.

The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ-ent color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit.

The SmartKey provides an extended oper-ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it.

The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:

� the doors

� the tailgate

� the fuel filler flap

SmartKey with remote control

1 ‹ Lock button2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate3 Locking tab for mechanical key4 Œ Unlock button5 Battery check lamp6 Â Panic button (� page 102)

Controls in detail


Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electro-magnetic radiation.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and







i You can also open and close

� the door windows

� the hinged quarter windows*

� the tilt/sliding sunroof*

using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea-ture” (� page 251) and see “Convenience clos-ing feature” (� page 252).

! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is drained.

� Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if necessary (� page 506).

� Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (� page 500).

� Lock the vehicle as described in the “Practical hints” section (� page 501).

� Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle battery connections checked (� page 530).

If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

115

Controls in detail


Factory setting

Global unlocking

� Press button Œ.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of un-locking if

� neither door nor tailgate is opened

� the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch

� the central locking switch is not activated

Global locking

� Press button ‹.

With the tailgate and all doors closed, the turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

Selective setting

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.

� Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 (� page 114) flashes twice.

The SmartKey will then function as follows:

Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap

� Press button Œ once.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver’s door moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

Global unlocking

� Press button Œ twice.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

116

Controls in detail


Global locking

� Press button ‹.


Restoring to factory setting



Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key.

The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO unit.

The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is checked when you grasp an outside door handle.

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks

� the doors

� the tailgate

� the fuel filler flap


1 ‹ Lock button2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate3 Locking tab for mechanical key4 Œ Unlock button5 Battery check lamp6 Â Panic button (� page 102)

117

Controls in detail


Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.









i You can also open and close




using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, see “Summer opening feature” (� page 251) and see “Convenience closing feature” (� page 252).

! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunction-ing or the vehicle battery is drained.

� Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO (� page 122) and replace them if necessary (� page 506).

� Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (� page 500).

� Lock the vehicle as described in the “Practical hints” section (� page 501).

� Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle battery connections checked (� page 530).

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunc-tioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

118

Controls in detail


Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO*

� You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey (� page 114).

The starter switch is located under the KEYLESS-GO button. Pull the KEYLESS-GO button out in order to ac-cess the starter switch (� page 43).

� You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-tions with normal SmartKey functions (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking with the ‹ button).

� Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.

� Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO together with:

� electronic items such as a cellular phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

� metallic objects such as coins or metal foil

Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS-GO system.

� To lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located outside the vehicle within ap-proximately 3 ft (1 m) of the respective door or the tailgate.

� If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.

� In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:

� The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.

� The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be inserted in the starter switch (� page 43).

� The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.

� If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is positioned farther away from the vehi-cle, the system may no longer recog-nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system.

� If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (� page 59), you can turn it off again by

� pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (� page 70)

� inserting the SmartKey into the starter switch when the vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic transmission is in position P (� page 70)

119

Controls in detail


� If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle (e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO)

� when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button or trying to lock the vehicle with the look button on an outside door handle the mes-sage Key not detected appears in the multifunction display

� with the engine running, the mes-sage Key not detected appears in the multifunction display while driving off.

Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or change its present location immediate-ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket).

� Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the vehicle.Possibility 1 (One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside the vehicle):If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle, no message appears in the multifunction display.Possibility 2 (One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside the vehicle):When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, the message Key detected in vehicle will appear in the multifunction display. The vehicle will not be locked.

Factory setting

Global unlocking


All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis-armed.

The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if

� neither a door nor the tailgate is opened

� the central locking switch is not activated

i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle and

� an outside door handle is splashed with water

or

� you attempt to clean an outside door handle

120

Controls in detail


Global locking

� Press the lock button on an outside door handle (� page 72).


Selective setting

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s door handle only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap unlocks.


The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows:

Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap

� Grasp the driver’s outside door handle.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver’s door moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis-armed.

Global unlocking

� Grasp any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis-armed.

Global locking

� Press the lock button on an outside door handle (� page 72).

All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

Restoring to factory setting


121

Controls in detail


Checking the batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

� Press button ‹ or Œ.

The battery check lamp (� page 114) or (� page 117) comes on briefly to in-dicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in order.

Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you should do the following:

� Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

� Report the loss of the SmartKey, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company.

� Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement.

Opening the doors from the inside

You can open a locked door from the in-side. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

1 Locking knob2 Inside door handle

i If the battery check lamp does not come on briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.

Replace the batteries (� page 506).

You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.

122

Controls in detail


Front doors

� Pull on inside door handle 2 on the respective front door to open door.

If the door was locked, locking knob 1 will move up.

Rear doors

� Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec-tive rear door to unlock door.

� Pull on inside door handle 2 on the re-spective rear door to open door.

Tailgate/Power tailgate*

A minimum height clearance of 7.4 ft (2.25 m) is required to open the tailgate.

i If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

With the SmartKey

� Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

With KEYLESS-GO*


� Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (� page 43).

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be inside the vehicle.

Warning! G

Make sure the tailgate is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

! The tailgate swings open upwards automat-ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-head clearance.

123

Controls in detail


Tailgate

Opening the tailgate from the outside

The handle is located above the rear license plate recess.

� Pull on the handle.

The tailgate opens slightly.

� Pull tailgate upwards to open.

Opening the tailgate from the inside

You can unlock the tailgate from the third-row seats and then open it manually.

The handle is located on the right of the tailgate’s window trim.

1 Handle2 Push3 Lift

� Push handle 1 in direction of arrow 2 and hold it there.

� Lift handle 1 in direction of arrow 3.

The tailgate is released and can be opened manually.

i Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*:The vehicle must be unlocked (� page 40).

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:When opening the tailgate, the vehicle is globally unlocked.

i If you do not open the tailgate within a few seconds, the tailgate lock will automatically engage again. Additionally, the tailgate will relock automatically, if the vehicle was locked when the tailgate was released from the inside.

If the tailgate lock does not engage automatically and, if applicable, the tailgate does not relock after a few seconds, you have to close the tail-gate manually (� page 125).

124

Controls in detail


Closing the tailgate from the outside

1 Handle

� Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on handle 1.

� Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it.

Once the tailgate touches the latch, the tailgate will pull itself shut automatical-ly.

Power tailgate*

In vehicles with power tailgate, you can

� open and close the tailgate from the inside and the outside electrically

� limit the opening height of the tailgate

� interrupt the opening/closing proce-dure at any time by

� pressing or pulling the door-mounted remote tailgate switch (� page 126)

� pressing the Š button on the SmartKey (� page 114) or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (� page 117)

� pressing the tailgate closing switch (� page 128)

� pressing the tailgate closing/locking switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) (� page 128)

Warning! G

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

i To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do not place the SmartKey in the cargo compartment.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle.

i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking. ! The tailgate swings open upwards automat-

ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-head clearance.

125

Controls in detail


Opening the tailgate from the outside

You can unlock and open the tailgate simultaneously from the outside when the vehicle is at a standstill.

� Press and hold button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* until the tailgate unlocks and opens.

While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic signal sounds.

or

� Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:Pull on the handle (� page 124).

The entire vehicle is unlocked and the tailgate opens. While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic signal sounds.

Opening the tailgate from the inside

You can unlock and open the tailgate si-multaneously from the driver’s seat when the vehicle is at a standstill.

The switch is located on the door control panel.

1 Remote tailgate switch with indicator lamp

� Pull remote tailgate switch 1 until tailgate begins to open.

The tailgate opens. The indicator lamp in the remote tailgate switch comes on and remains lit until the tailgate is closed. While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic signal sounds.

Warning! G

Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the tailgate with the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or with the Š button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Monitor the opening procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured.

To interrupt the opening procedure, press or pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or press the Š button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

126

Controls in detail


Limiting opening height of tailgate*

In vehicles with power tailgate*, the tail-gate opening height can be limited when transporting goods on a roof rack* (e.g. presence of an MB roof cargo container*). When activated, the tailgate opens to approximately 6.6 ft (2.00 m).

� Activate the limiting opening height of tailgate using the control system (� page 184).

Closing the tailgate from the inside

You can close the tailgate from the inside using the remote tailgate switch.

If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens.

� Press remote tailgate switch 1 (� page 126) until tailgate begins to close.

The tailgate closes. While the tailgate is closing an acoustic signal sounds. The indicator lamp in the remote tailgate switch goes out.

To interrupt the closing procedure:

� Press or pull remote tailgate switch 1 (� page 126).

Warning! G

Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the tailgate with the door-mounted switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured.

To interrupt the closing procedure, press or pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or press the Š button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the remote tailgate switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

127

Controls in detail


Closing the tailgate from the outside

You can close the tailgate from the outside using the tailgate closing switch or the Š button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, you can also simultaneous-ly lock the vehicle.

If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*

1 Tailgate closing switch

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*

1 Tailgate closing switch

� Press tailgate closing switch 1 or the Š button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* briefly.

The tailgate closes and an acoustic warning sounds.

Warning! G

Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being in-jured. To prevent possible personal injury,

always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when clos-ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the clos-ing procedure, do one of the following:

� Press tailgate closing switch 1 (� page 128).

� Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch* 1 (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) (� page 129).

� Press the Š button on the SmartKey (� page 114) or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (� page 117).

� Press or pull the remote tailgate switch on the driver’s door (� page 126).

Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the tailgate closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

128

Controls in detail


Closing the tailgate and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)

In vehicles with power tailgate and KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle simultaneously from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch.

If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high), the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens.

� Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you.

1 KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch

� Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch 1 briefly.

The tailgate closes automatically. Once the tailgate is closed, the vehicle locks if doors are closed. The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

i Do not place the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the open cargo compartment. You may lock yourself out.

i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking.

Warning! G

Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being in-jured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when clos-ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the clos-ing procedure, do one of the following:

� Press tailgate closing switch 1 (� page 128).

� Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch* 1 (� page 129).

� Press the Š button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (� page 117).

� Press or pull the remote tailgate switch on the driver’s door (� page 126). ��

129

Controls in detail


�
Automatic central locking
The doors and the tailgate lock automati-cally when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.

For information on towing the vehicle, see “Towing the vehicle” (� page 540).

You can deactivate the automatic locking mode using the control system (� page 183).

Locking and unlocking from the inside

You can lock or unlock the doors and the tailgate from inside using the central lock-ing or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive.

The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-locked with the central locking or unlock-ing switch.

Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the tailgate closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized inside the vehicle.

i You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.

The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle

� is pushed or towed

� is on a test stand

Warning! G


�

130

Controls in detail


The switches are located in the front-door control panels.

1 Central unlocking switch2 Central locking switch

Locking

� Press central locking switch 2.

If all doors and the tailgate are closed, the vehicle locks.

Unlocking

� Press central unlocking switch 1.

The vehicle unlocks.

i You can open a locked door from inside at any time. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch.

If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch:

� and the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a front door is opened from the inside

� and the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings, only the front door opened from the inside is unlocked

i With the passenger-side door opened, you cannot lock the vehicle with the central locking switch.

131

Controls in detail

Seats

For information on seat adjustment, see the “Getting started” section (� page 45).

For more information on seats, see “Load-ing” (� page 297).

Easy-entry/exit feature for third-row seats

This feature allows for easier access to and exit from the vehicle’s third-row seats.

Easy-entry feature for third-row seats

The lever for the easy-entry feature is lo-cated on the rear of the seat base of the passenger side second-row seat.

1 Easy-entry lever

� Pull and hold easy-entry lever 1 in di-rection of arrow at resistance point.

The seat backrest folds forward.

1 Easy-entry lever

� Pull and hold easy-entry lever 1 once again in direction of arrow at resistance point.

� Lift up the right second-row seat until it folds forward.

You should now have sufficient space to access the vehicle’s third-row seat.

Warning! G

To help avoid personal injury, the second-row seat backrests must be properly locked either in the upright position or, when using the expanded cargo compart-ment, in the fully folded position while the vehicle is in motion.

! Make sure that the head restraint is pushed all the way down (� page 137).

i Vehicles with memory function*:The front passenger seat moved slightly forward.

132

Controls in detail

Seats

Easy-entry/exit position

While the easy-entry feature is activated, you will see, for example, the following message in the multifunction display:

2nd row of seatsRight not locked

� Return seat into its original position (� page 134).

The message in the multifunction dis-play disappears.

For setting the front passenger seat back into the stored position, see “Recalling po-sitions from memory” (� page 144).

For information on how to fold down the second-row seats completely, see “Folding second-row seats” (� page 308).

Easy-exit feature for third-row seats

The easy-exit strap is located on the right rear of the second-row seat base.

1 Easy-exit strap

� To exit the vehicle when seated on a third-row seat, pull up and hold easy-exit strap 1.

The right second-row seat backrest folds forward.

� Pull and hold once easy-entry strap 1.

� Lift up the right second-row seat until it folds forward.

You should now have sufficient space to exit the vehicle’s third-row seat.

While the easy-entry feature is activated, you will see, for example, the following message in the multifunction display:

2nd row of seatsRight not locked

i Vehicles with memory function*:The front passenger seat moved slightly forward.

��

133

Controls in detail

Seats

�
� Return seat into its original position (� page 134).
The message in the multifunction dis-play disappears.

For setting the front passenger seat back into the stored position, see “Recalling po-sitions from memory” (� page 144).

For information on how to fold down the second-row seats completely, see “Folding second-row seats” (� page 308).

Returning second-row seats to their original position

� Fold seat (� page 133) back until it au-dibly engages.

� Fold seat backrest (� page 132) back into original position until it engages.

To make sure the seat backrest has en-gaged, lean firmly against the backrest.

Emergency exit for third-row seats

1 Emergency release2 Seat backrest

Warning! G

When occupants have entered or exited the vehicle using the easy-entry/exit feature, before driving off make sure

� the seats are properly locked

� the seat backrests are in an upright po-sition and are properly locked

If a seat and seat backrest are not properly locked, the seat could move forward and the seat backrest could fold. You could slide un-der the seat belt during braking, vehicle ma-neuvers, or in an accident. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fa-tal injuries.

i If, due to an accident or other situation, it is not possible for you to exit the vehicle on the side of the easy-entry seat (� page 132), you can fold the left side of the seat backrest in the second row of seats down in order to open the left rear door.

! Make sure that the head restraint is pushed all the way down (� page 137).

�

134

Controls in detail

Seats

� Pull emergency release 1 in the direction of arrow.

� Push seat backrest 2 forwards.

� Open the left door.

� Exit the vehicle.

Front seat active head restraints

You cannot remove the active head restraints on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat.For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

For information on head restraint adjust-ment, see “Seats” (� page 45).For information on active head restraints, see “Active head restraint” (� page 92).

Rear seats

Warning! G

To help avoid personal injury when folding the seat backrest forward, make sure that you move both feet and legs all the way back and out of the way to avoid them contacting the seat as it pivots forward.

In order to prevent an accident or any other potentially dangerous situations when open-ing the rear door and exiting the vehicle, make sure that you are aware of the traffic situation at all times.

Warning! G


Adjust the head restraint so that it is close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Warning! G

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat-ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle” (� page 93).


135

Controls in detail

Seats

Rear seat adjustment

Seat backrest tilt (second-row seats)

The seat backrest tilt can be set to five different positions.

The handles for adjusting the seats are located on the rear of each seat base.

1 Adjustment handle

� While seated, pull handle 1 in direc-tion of arrow to resistance point and hold it there.

� To move seat backrest back, lean light-ly against backrest.

Warning! G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-domen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body.

Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (� page 54).

Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

After adjusting rear seats, make sure

� the seats are properly locked

� the seat backrests are in an upright po-sition and are properly locked

Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If a seat and seat backrest are not properly locked, the seat could move forward and the seat back-rest could fold. The child seat would no long-er be properly supported or positioned to provide its intended benefit.

Warning! G

The seat belt only offers its intended protec-tion when the seat backrest is in a nearly vertical position and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid sitting in positions that pre-vent the seat belt from being properly posi-tioned against the body (� page 54). You should therefore adjust the backrest to a po-sition as upright as possible.

136

Controls in detail

Seats

� To move seat backrest forward, lean forward with handle 1 pulled and held at resistance point.

The seat backrest will move forward against your back.

� Release handle 1 when the seat back-rest has reached the desired position.

To make sure the seat backrest has en-gaged, lean firmly against the backrest.

Head restraint height

Second-row seat head restraint


Raising:

� Manually adjust the height of head restraint 1 by pulling it upward to the desired position.

Lowering:

� To lower head restraint 1, push release button 2 and press down on head restraint 1.

Warning! G

With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the oc-cupant adjust the head restraint properly.


Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will re-duce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

i The third-row seat head restraints are ad-justed in the same manner.

137

Controls in detail

Seats

Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

The angle of the head restraint for the out-er second-row seats or the third-row seats can be adjusted manually.

� While seated, reach behind you with both hands and find lower edge of the head restraint.

� Adjust the head restraint to the desired position by pushing or pulling on the lower edge of the head restraint cush-ion.

Head restraints

Second-row seat head restraint


Removing

� Second-row seat:Fold the seat backrest forward (� page 136).

� Third-row seat:Fold the seat backrest forward (� page 307).

� Pull head restraint 1 to its uppermost position.

Warning! G

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the oc-cupant adjust the head restraint properly.


Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will re-duce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

138

Controls in detail

Seats

� Push release button 2 and pull out head restraint.

� Second-row seat:Fold the seat backrest rearward until it engages.

� Third-row seat:Fold the seat backrest rearward (� page 307).

Installing

� Second-row seat:Fold the seat backrest forward (� page 136).

� Third-row seat:Fold the seat backrest forward (� page 307).

� Insert head restraint 1 into openings on the seat backrest.

� Push head restraint 1 down until it au-dibly engages.

� Push release button 2 and adjust head restraint 1 to the desired posi-tion (� page 137).

� Second-row seat:Fold the seat backrest rearward until it engages.

� Third-row seat:Fold the seat backrest rearward (� page 307).

For more information on seats, see the “Getting started” section (� page 45).

Lumbar support

The curvature of the driver’s seat can be adjusted to help enhance lower back sup-port and seating comfort.

The lever for lumbar support adjustment is located on the right hand side of the driver’s seat backrest.

1 Adjustment lever

� Move adjustment lever 1 in direction of arrows until you have reached a comfortable seating position.

139

Controls in detail

Seats

Multicontour seat*

The multicontour seat has an extendable seat cushion and inflatable air chambers built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.

The seat cushion depth, seat backrest cushion-height and curvature can be con-tinuously varied with switches on the in-side of each front seat base after the ignition is switched on (� page 41).

1 Seat cushion depth2 Backrest side bolsters3 Backrest center4 Backrest bottom


Seat cushion depth

� Adjust the seat cushion depth to the length of your upper leg with switch 1.

Backrest contour

� Adjust the contour of the seat backrest to the desired position with switch æ or ç.

� Move the backrest support to the bot-tom with button 4 or to the center with button 3.

Backrest side bolsters

� Adjust the side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch 2.

Seat heating*

The switches for front-seat heating are lo-cated in the center console.

1 Seat heating switch, front seats2 Indicator lamps

140

Controls in detail

Seats

The switches for second-row seat heating* are located in the rear center console.

1 Seat heating switch*, second-row seats

2 Indicator lamps

The red indicator lamps in the switch come on to show which heating level you have selected.


Switching on

� Press switch 1.

Three red indicator lamps 2 in the switch come on.

� Continue pressing switch 1 until desired seat heating level is reached.

Switching off

� Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 go out.

Level

3 Three indicator lamps on (highest level)

The seat heating automatically switches to level 2 after approx-imately 5 minutes.

2 Two indicator lamps on

The seat heating automatically switches to level 1 after approx-imately 10 minutes.

1 One indicator lamp on (lowest level)

The seat heating automatically switches off after approximately 20 minutes.

off No indicator lamp on

i If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 on seat heating switch 1 (� page 140) are flash-ing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are switched on. The seat heating switches off automatically.

The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

141

Controls in detail

Seats

Seat ventilation*

The switches for the seat ventilation are located in the center console.

1 Seat ventilation switch, front seats2 Indicator lamps

The blue indicator lamps in the switch come on to show which ventilation level you have selected.


Switching on

� Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.

Switching off

� Press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 go out.

Level

3 Three indicator lamps on (highest level)

2 Two indicator lamps on

1 One indicator lamp on (lowest level)

off No indicator lamp on

i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature (� page 251).

142

Controls in detail

Memory function*

�
Memory function* Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat back-rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on air bags (� page 76) for proper seat posi-tioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.

Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil-dren should be seated in a properly se-cured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

With the memory function you can store up to three different configurations.

Each stored position on the driver’s side includes the following settings:

� Seat position

� Multicontour seat*: previously saved setting

� Steering wheel position

� Exterior rear view mirrors’ position

Each stored position on the passenger side includes the following settings:

� Seat position

� Multicontour seat*: previously saved setting

Warning! G

Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

143

Controls in detail

Memory function*

The memory button and stored position buttons are located on the entry side of each front seat base.

M Memory button

1, 2, 3 Stored position buttons


or

� Open the respective door.

Storing positions into memory

� Adjust the seats (� page 45).

� On the driver’s side, additionally adjust the steering wheel (� page 51) and ex-terior rear view mirrors (� page 52) to the desired positions.

� Press memory button M.

� Release memory button M and press stored position 1, 2 or 3 within 3 seconds.

All settings are stored to the selected position.

Recalling positions from memory

� Press and hold stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have fully moved to the stored posi-tions.

! Do not operate the power seats using memory button M if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats.

Move seat backrest to an upright position first.

i Releasing the stored position button stops movement to the stored positions immediately.

144

Controls in detail

Lighting

�
Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see “Switching on headlamps” (� page 62) and “Turn signals” (� page 63).
Exterior lamp switch

i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon* headlamps:The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps monitor the vehicles steering angle and vehicle speed, then automatically shift their beams to either side to better follow the curvature of the road ahead, increasing usable illumination over conventional headlamps.

1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)

2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)

3 M Off

Daytime running lamp mode (� page 147)

4 U Automatic headlamp mode

Daytime running lamp mode (� page 147)

5 C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)

6 B Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps when the com-bination switch is pushed for-ward. The tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lamps also come on.

7 ‡ Front fog lamps

8 † Rear fog lamp

i If you hear a warning signal you have forgotten to switch off the headlamps before opening the driver’s door.

In addition the message Switch off lights appears in the multifunction display.

Switch off the headlamps.

! Failure to switch off the headlamps when leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged battery.

145

Controls in detail

Lighting

Manual headlamp mode

The low beam headlamps and the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch.

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position B.

Automatic headlamp mode

The following lamps switch on and off au-tomatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light:

� Low beam headlamps

� Tail and parking lamps

� License plate lamps

� Side marker lamps

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U.

With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button pressed once, only the parking lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automati-cally.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps, and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically.

Warning! G

If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,

� the headlamps may switch off unexpect-edly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic

� the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions

To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.

In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.

i USA only:With the automatic headlamp mode activated you can switch on the high beam headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.

146

Controls in detail

Lighting

Daytime running lamp mode

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M or U.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are switched on.

In low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally:

� Tail and parking lamps



Canada only

The daytime running lamp mode is manda-tory and therefore in a constant mode.

When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position N or P, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a 3 minute delay.

When the engine is running, and you

� turn the exterior lamp switch to position C, the parking lamps and the side marker lamps switch on additionally

� turn the exterior lamp switch to position B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode

The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (� page 62).

USA only

By default, the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see “Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)” (� page 178).

When the engine is running, and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.

The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (� page 62).

i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, you cannot switch off the low beam headlamps manually.

i With the exterior lamp switch in position M or U, you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps.

The high beam flasher is available at all times.

For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch to position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

i With the exterior lamp switch in position M, you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps.

The high beam flasher is available at all times.

For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch to position B or U to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

147

Controls in detail

Lighting

Locator lighting and night security illumination

The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in the “Control system” section, see “Setting locator light-ing” (� page 179) and “Setting night secu-rity illumination” (� page 179).

Fog lamps Front fog lamps

� Switch on the low beam headlamps (� page 62).

� Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop.

The front fog lamps switch on.

The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch comes on.

� Push in the exterior lamp switch.

The front fog lamps switch off.

The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch goes out.

Warning! G

In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

i Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.

i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position U.For switching on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to position B first.

148

Controls in detail

Lighting

Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)

� Switch on the low beam headlamps (� page 62).

� Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop.

The rear fog lamp switches on.

The yellow indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch comes on.

� Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop.

The rear fog lamp switches off.

The yellow indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch goes out.

The front fog lamps remain lit.

Combination switch

1 High beam2 High beam flasher

High beam

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position B (� page 145).

� Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on (� page 26).

� Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out.

High beam flasher

� Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2.

149

Controls in detail

Lighting

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps im-prove illumination of the area in the direc-tion into which you are turning.

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with

� the exterior lamp switch in position B (� page 145)

or

� the exterior lamp switch in position U (� page 145)

or

� the daytime running lamp mode activated (� page 147)

Driving forward

Switching on corner-illuminating front fog lamps

� Switch on the left or right turn signal (� page 63), depending on whether you are turning left or right.

The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the area in the direc-tion into which you are turning.

or

� Turn steering wheel in desired direc-tion.

The front fog lamp on the side of your steering direction comes on.

Switching off corner-illuminating front fog lamps

The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. This will switch off the corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal.

If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and the corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position.

i With the automatic headlamp mode activat-ed: The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.

If you are driving faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched on, the corner-illuminating function is not available.

i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps temporarily come on on both sides of the vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one direction and then again in the other direction shortly thereafter.

i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steer-ing angle and vehicle speed, even if you did not switch on either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle and vehicle speed.

i There may be a brief delay before the corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.

150

Controls in detail

Lighting

Driving in reverse

Switching on corner-illuminating front fog lamps

� Shift the automatic transmission to reverse gear R (� page 194).

The front fog lamp opposite to your steering direction comes on.

Switching off corner-illuminating front fog lamps

� Shift the automatic transmission to a gear other than reverse gear R (� page 194).

The respective corner-illuminating front fog lamp goes out.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle.

The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys.

The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the center console.

1 Hazard warning flasher switch

Switching on hazard warning flasher

� Press hazard warning flasher switch 1.

All turn signals are flashing.

Switching off hazard warning flasher

� Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 again.

Interior lighting

The controls for interior lighting are locat-ed in the overhead control panel.

i With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on.

i If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically, press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.

151

Controls in detail

Lighting

1 Front left reading lamp switch2 Rear interior lighting switch3 Automatic control switch4 Front interior lighting switch5 Front right reading lamp switch6 Front right interior lamp7 Front right reading lamp8 Front left reading lamp9 Front left interior lamp

Automatic control

Deactivating

� Press switch 3.The switch engages in the recessed position.

The interior lighting and the locator lighting (� page 179) remain switched off even when you

� unlock the vehicle

� open a door

� open the tailgate


Activating

� Press switch 3.The switch disengages from its recessed position back to its original position.

The interior lighting and the locator lighting (� page 179) come on when you

� unlock the vehicle

� open a door

� open the tailgate


The interior lamps go out following an adjustable time delay (� page 180).

! An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically.

Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery.

i The interior lighting is factory-set to automatic mode.

i If a door remains open, the interior lamps switch off automatically after approximately 5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed or in starter switch position 0.

152

Controls in detail

Lighting

Manual control

Switching front/rear interior lighting on and off

� Press front/rear interior lighting switch 4 or 2 to switch on the respective interior light.

� Press front/rear interior lighting switch 4 or 2 again to switch off the respective interior light.

Switching front reading lamps on and off

� Press front reading lamp switch 1 or 5 to switch on the respective front reading lamp.

� Press front reading lamp switch 1 or 5 again to switch off the respective front reading lamp.

Switching second-row reading lamps on and off

The second-row reading lamps are located above the side windows.

Passenger side reading lamp

1 Second-row reading lamp

� Press on reading lamp 1 in direction of arrow.

The reading lamp comes on.

� Press on reading lamp 1 in direction of arrow again.

The reading lamp goes out.

Switching third-row reading lamps* on and off

The switches for the third-row reading lamps are located in the rear overhead control panel.

1 Rear right reading lamp switch2 Rear left reading lamp switch3 Rear left reading lamp4 Rear interior lamp5 Rear right reading lamp

i An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically.

153

Controls in detail

Lighting

� Press rear reading lamp switch 1 or 2 to switch on the respective rear reading lamp.

� Press rear reading lamp switch 1 or 2 again to switch off the respective rear reading lamp.

Door entry lamps

For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps comes on when you open a door and the automatic control is activated.

The door entry lamps will switch off when the corresponding door is closed.

Cargo compartment lamp

The cargo compartment lamp comes on when the tailgate is opened.

If you leave the tailgate open for an extend-ed period of time, the cargo compartment lamp will switch off automatically after ap-proximately 5 minutes.i The rear interior lighting is switched on and

off using the button on the front overhead con-trol panel (� page 151). i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter

switch to position 0 or remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.

154

Controls in detail

Instrument cluster

�
Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster, see “Instrument cluster” (� page 26).
1 To dim instrument cluster illumination2 Reset button3 To brighten instrument cluster

illumination

The instrument cluster is activated when you

� open a door

� switch on the ignition (� page 42)

� press reset button 2

� switch on the exterior lamps (� page 145)

For information on changing the instru-ment cluster settings, e.g. the language, see “Instrument cluster submenu” (� page 174).

Adjusting instrument cluster illumina-tion

Use button 1 or 3 to adjust the illumina-tion brightness for the instrument cluster.

To brighten illumination

� Press and hold button 3 until the desired level of illumination is reached.

To dim illumination

� Press and hold button 1 until the desired level of illumination is reached.

i Opening a front door or pressing the reset button without switching on the ignition or the exterior lighting activates the multifunction display illumination only for 30 seconds.

Warning! G

No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.

As a result, you will not be able to see infor-mation about your driving conditions, such as speed or outside temperature, warn-ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired.

If you must continue to drive, do so with added caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am-bient light conditions.

The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.

i With the exterior lighting switched on, the brightness of the switches in the center console will also be adjusted when using button 1 or 3.

155

Controls in detail

Instrument cluster

Resetting trip odometer

Make sure you are viewing the trip odome-ter display (� page 157).

� If it is not displayed, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel (� page 158) repeatedly until the trip odometer appears in the multi-function display.

� Press and hold reset button 2 in the instrument cluster (� page 155) until the trip odometer is reset.

Tachometer

The red marking on the tachometer (� page 26) denotes excessive engine speed.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking.

Outside temperature indicator

The outside temperature is displayed in the multifunction display (� page 157).

The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by com-parison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).

When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed.

A delay also occurs when ambient temper-atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving.

! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning! G

The outside temperature indicator is not de-signed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

156

Controls in detail

Control system

�
Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 (� page 42) or as soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-ton* is in position 1 (� page 44). The con-trol system enables you to
� call up information about your vehicle

� change vehicle settings

For example, you can use the control sys-tem to find out when your vehicle is next due for maintenance service, to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.

The control system relays information to the multifunction display.

Multifunction display

1 Trip odometer2 Main odometer3 Transmission position indicator4 Status indicator (outside temperature

or digital speedometer)

For more information on menus displayed in the multifunction display, see “Menus” (� page 160).

Warning! G

A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving.

For your safety and the safety of others, se-lecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions per-mit it to be done safely.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-ly 14 m) every second.

157

Controls in detail

Control system


The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunc-tion steering wheel.

Depending on the selected menu (� page 160), pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display.

The information available in the multifunc-tion display is arranged in menus, each containing a number of functions or sub-menus.

The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio, for example). These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle.

1 Multifunction display

Operating the control system

2 Telephone*:Press button

s to take a callto dialto redial

t to end a callto reject an incoming call

3 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume:Press button

æ up/to increase

ç down/to decrease

4 Voice Control System*1, see sepa-rate operating instructions

1 Vehicles without Voice Control System*: Button without function.

5 Moving within a menu:Press button

j for next display

k for previous display

6 Voice Control System*1, see sepa-rate operating instructions

7 Menu systems:Press button

è for next menu

ÿ for previous menu

158

Controls in detail

Control system

It is helpful to think of the menus, and the functions within each menu, as being ar-ranged in a circular pattern.

� If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you will pass through each menu one after the other.

� If you press button k or j repeatedly, you will pass through each function display, one after the other, in the current menu.

In the Settings menu, instead of functions, you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see “Settings menu” (� page 170).

The number of menus available in the sys-tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle.

The menus are described on the following pages.

159

Controls in detail

Control system

Menus This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus 1 to 5.

The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus.

160

Controls in detail

Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5

Standard display Audio NAV* Off-road DISTRONIC*

(� page 164) (� page 166) (� page 168) (� page 168) (� page 169)

Com

man

ds/s

ubm

enus

Trip- and main odometer Selecting radio station Route guidance instructions, current direction traveled

Compass Calling up settings

Checking tire inflation pressure Selecting satellite radio station* (USA only)

Vehicle level

Checking coolant temperature Operating CD player Differential locks*

Calling up digital speedometer or outside temperature

Calling up maintenance service indicator

i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the sys-tem and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays.

The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in.

161

Controls in detail

Control system

This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus 6 to a.

The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus.

162

Controls in detail

Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8 Menu 9 Menu a

Vehicle status message memory1

1 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.

Settings Vehicle configuration Trip computer Telephone*


Com

man

ds/s

ubm

enus

Calling up vehicle malfunction, warning and system status messages stored in memory

Resetting to factory settings

Distance warning function*on/off

Fuel consumption statistics since start

Loading phone book

Instrument cluster submenu

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) pro-grammed default speed

Fuel consumption statis-tics since the last reset

Searching for name in phone book

Time/Date submenu Resetting fuel consump-tion statistics

Lighting submenu Distance to empty

Vehicle submenu

Comfort submenu*

i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the sys-tem and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays.

The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in.

163

Controls in detail

Control system

Standard display menu

In the standard display, the main odometer and the trip odometer appear in the multi-function display.

1 Trip odometer2 Main odometer

� If you see another display, press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the standard display appears.

� Press button k or j to select the functions in the standard display menu.

The following functions are available: Checking coolant temperature

Function Page

Checking tire inflation pressure 396

Checking coolant temperature 164


165

Calling up maintenance service indicator

424

Warning! G

� Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

� Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

164

Controls in detail

Control system

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the coolant temperature appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button k or j repeatedly until the digital speedometer or the outside temperature appears in the multifunction display.

Digital speedometer

Outside temperature

! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display (� page 473).

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).

i You can select whether the digital speedom-eter or the outside temperature is shown in the multifunction display.You can change the setting in the submenu Instr. cluster via the function Status line display, see “Selecting display (digital speed-ometer or outside temperature) for status indicator” (� page 175).

165

Controls in detail

Control system

Audio menu

The functions in the Audio menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on.

If no audio equipment is currently turned on, the message Audio off appears in the multifunction display.

The following functions are available:

Selecting radio station

� Turn on the COMAND system and select radio. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instruc-tions.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the currently tuned station appears in the multifunction display.

1 Waveband setting2 Station frequency

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired station is found.

The station search depends on the se-lected setting in the Vehicle submenu of the control system (� page 183). Pressing button k or j will either start a frequency scan or select the next stored radio station.

Selecting satellite radio station* (USA only)

The satellite radio is treated as a radio application.

� Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key on the COMAND system.

1 SAT mode2 Channel name or number

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired channel is found.

Function Page

Selecting radio station 166

Selecting satellite radio station* (USA only)

166

Operating CD player 167

i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instruc-tions.

You can also operate the radio in the usual manner.

166

Controls in detail

Control system

Operating the CD player

Selecting CD track

� Turn on the COMAND system and select CD. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the multifunc-tion display.

1 Current CD (for CD changer)2 Current track

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected.

Selecting MP3-CD track

� Turn on the COMAND system and se-lect MP3. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the MP3-CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display.

1 MP3 mode2 Current track

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected.

i Additional optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service pro-vider are required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for details and availability for your vehicle.

For more information, refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.

i To select a CD from the magazine, press a number on the COMAND system key pad located in the center console.

167

Controls in detail

Control system

NAV* menu

The Nav menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the message Nav appears in the multifunction display.

The message shown in the multifunction display depends on the status of the navi-gation system:

� With the COMAND system switched off, the message Nav off appears in the multifunction display.

� With the COMAND system switched on but route guidance not activated, the direction of travel and, if applicable, the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display.

� With the COMAND system switched on and route guidance activated, the di-rection of travel and maneuver instruc-tions appear in the multifunction display.

Please refer to the COMAND system manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system.

Off-road menu

The Off-road menu displays the messages for air suspension, differential locks* and the direction into which you are currently driving.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until one of the following messages ap-pears in the multifunction display.

Vehicles with air suspension:

Vehicles with air suspension and differential locks*:

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired setting is found.

For information on air suspension, see “Air suspension package” (� page 280).

For information on differential locks*, see “Differential locks*” (� page 206).

For information on the compass, see “Vehicle submenu” (� page 181) and “Compass” (� page 345).

168

Controls in detail

Control system

DISTRONIC* menu

Use the DISTRONIC menu (� page 266) to display the current settings for your Distronic system. The information shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is activated or deactivated.

Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec-tion of this manual (� page 262) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly to select the Distronic menu in the multifunction display.

Vehicle status message memory menu

Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded.

The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if there are any messages stored.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear, no messages have been stored.

Warning! G

Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten-tionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind-er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to address the malfunc-tion and warning messages (� page 451).

169

Controls in detail

Control system

If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears in the multifunction display:

� Press button k or j .

The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occurred. For malfunctions and warning messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display” (� page 451).

Should the vehicle’s system record any conditions while driving, the number of messages will reappear in the multifunc-tion display

� when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch.

or

� when you turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (� page 70) in the starter switch once and open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch)

Settings menu

In the Settings menu there are two functions:

� The function Reset to factory settings?, with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings.

� A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display.

i After you have scrolled through all recorded status messages, the first recorded message appears again.

i The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start-er switch to position 1 or 2, or when you press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice without depressing the brake pedal. You will then only see high priority messages in the multifunction display (� page 451).

170

Controls in detail

Control system

The following settings and submenus are available in the Settings menu:

Resetting all settings

You can reset the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.

� Press the reset button in the instru-ment cluster (� page 155) for approximately 3 seconds.

The request to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display.

� Press the reset button once more.

The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings.

Function Page

Resetting all settings 171

Submenus in the settings menu 172

Instrument cluster submenu 174

Time/date submenu 176

Lighting submenu 178

Vehicle submenu 181

Comfort submenu* 184

i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time.

After approximately 5 seconds, the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display (� page 170).

i For safety reasons, the function Lamp circuit headlamp in the Lighting submenu cannot be reset while driving.

The following message appears in the multifunc-tion display:SettingsCannot becompletely resetto factory settingswhile driving

171

Controls in detail

Control system

Submenus in the Settings menu

� Press button j .

The collection of the submenus appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button ç.

The selection marker moves to the next submenu.

The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with button ç, scroll up with the button æ.

With the selection marker on the desired submenu, use the j button to access the individual functions within that sub-menu. Once within that submenu, you can use the j button to move to the next function or the k button to move to the previous function within that submenu.

The settings themselves are made with button æ or ç.

172

Controls in detail

Control system

The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE COMFORT*


Selecting speedometer display mode

Setting the time (hours) Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)

Compass adjustment Activating easy-entry/exit fea-ture*

Selecting language Setting the time (minutes) Setting locator lighting Compass calibration Setting fold-in func-tion* for exterior rear view mirrors

Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status in-dicator

Setting the date (month) Setting night security illumination

Audio search function

Setting the date (day) Setting interior lighting de-layed shut-off

Setting automatic locking

Setting the date (year) Limiting opening height of tailgate*

173

Controls in detail

Control system

Instrument cluster submenu

Access the Instr. cluster submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Instr. cluster submenu to change the instru-ment cluster display settings.



� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Instr. cluster submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Display unit Digital speedometer appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set speedometer unit to km or miles.

Selecting language


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Language appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages.

Function Page


174

Selecting language 174

Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status indica-tor

175

i If you select a language that is not available in the COMAND system, the messages for the audio systems, such as radio or CD player, will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. For more information see separate COMAND operating instructions.

174

Controls in detail

Control system

Available languages:

� German

� English

� French

� Italian

� Spanish

� Dutch

� Swedish

� Danish

� Turkish

� Portuguese

� Russian (Canada only)

Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status indicator


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Status line display appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to select the desired setting.

The selected display is then shown continuously in the status indicator (lower display).

The other display now appears in the menu of the standard display (� page 164):

� Digital speedometer

or

� Outside temperature

175

Controls in detail

Control system

Time/Date submenu

Access the Time/Date submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Time/Date submenu to change the time and date settings.


Setting the time (hours)

This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module*.

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Clock Set hour appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the hour setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set the hour.

Setting the time (minutes)



� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Clock Set minute(s) appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the minute setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set the minutes.

Function Page

Setting the time (hours) 176

Setting the time (minutes) 176

Setting the date (month) 177

Setting the date (day) 177

Setting the date (year) 177

i If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module*, see separate COMAND system operating instruc-tions for information on how to set the date and time.

176

Controls in detail

Control system

Setting the date (month)



� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Date Set month appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the month setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set the month.

Setting the date (day)



� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Date Set day appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the day setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set the day.

Setting the date (year)



� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Date Set year appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the year setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set the year.

177

Controls in detail

Control system

Lighting submenu

Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle.


Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Lamp circuit headlamp appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to select manual operation (Manual) or daytime running lamp mode (Constant).

With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch at position M or U, the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running.

In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:

� Parking lamps

� Tail lamps



For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see “Lighting” (� page 145).

Function Page

Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)

178

Setting locator lighting 179

Setting night security illumination 179

Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off

180

i This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.

i For safety reasons, changing the setting for the daytime running lamp mode is not possible while the vehicle is in motion. The following message appears in the multifunction display:

Settingsonly possibleat standstill

For safety reasons, resetting to factory settings (� page 171) while driving will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode.

178

Controls in detail

Control system

Setting locator lighting

With the locator lighting feature activated, the exterior lamp switch in position U (� page 145) and the interior lighting in au-tomatic mode (� page 152), the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using button Œ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:

� Parking lamps

� Tail lamps



� Front fog lamps*

The locator lighting switches off when the driver’s door is opened.

If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Function Surround lighting appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to switch the locator lighting function On or Off.

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U when exiting the vehicle.

The locator lighting feature is activated.

Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off)

Use this function to set whether you would like the exterior lamps to remain on for 15 seconds during darkness after exiting the vehicle and closing all doors.

With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off:

� Parking lamps

� Tail lamps



� Front fog lamps*

If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds.

179

Controls in detail

Control system


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Headlamp delayed shut-off appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to switch the headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or Off.

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the engine.

The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is activated.

You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed shut-off feature:

� Before exiting the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.

� Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0.

The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

� Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the starter switch (� page 43).

Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off

Use this function to set whether you would like the interior lighting to remain on for 10 seconds during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch.


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Int. light. delayed shut-off appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to switch the interior lighting delayed shut-off feature On or Off.

180

Controls in detail

Control system

Vehicle submenu

Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings.


Compass adjustment


Determine your location on the basis of the following zone maps.

Zone map North America

Zone map South America

� Press button æ or ç to move the selection marker to the Vehicle submenu.

Function Page

Compass adjustment 181

Compass calibration 182

Audio search function 183

Setting automatic locking 183


184

��

181

Controls in detail

Control system

�
� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Compass setting Zone appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button æ or ç to set the respective compass zone.

For information on how to call up the compass, see “Compass” (� page 345).

Compass calibration


In order to calibrate the compass properly, mind the following:

� Calibrate the compass in open terrain. Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines and large antenna masts, for example, could impair compass calibration.

� Switch off electrical consumers (e.g. climate control, windshield wipers, or rear window defroster).

� Close all doors and the tailgate.

� Start the engine (� page 57).

� Press button æ or ç to move the selection marker to the Vehicle submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Compass Calibration appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on setting switched off.

� Press button æ to set the selection marker to Start.

The following message appears in the multifunction display:Compass Calibration activePlease drive in a full circle

i Make sure you are in area where you can drive a full circle with your vehicle without dis-turbing traffic in order to calibrate the compass.

�

182

Controls in detail

Control system

� Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of between 3 mph and 6 mph (5 km/h and 10 km/h).

When calibration was successful, the following message appears in the mul-tifunction display:Compass calibrationCompleted successfully

Audio search function

Use of the Audio search function to select a radio station will enable you to start a frequency scan (Freq.) (� page 166) or select a radio station stored in memory (Memory).

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Audio Search function appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to select Freq. or Memory.

Setting automatic locking

Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Automatic door lock appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to switch the automatic central locking On or Off.

i If the message Compass calibration Completed successfully does not appear in the multifunction display, drive another full circle.

If calibration does not succeed within 3 minutes, the message Compass Calibration appears in the multifunction display again. Calibrating the compass has failed due to outside influences.

Repeat compass calibration in a different location.

183

Controls in detail

Control system


Use this function to activate or deactivate the limiting opening height of the tailgate.


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Opening limiter Tailgate appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to switch the limiting opening height of the tailgate On or Off.

Comfort submenu*

Access the Comfort submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Comfort submenu to change the settings for a number of con-venience features.


Activating easy-entry/exit feature*

Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature (� page 49).

Function Page

Activating easy-entry/exit feature*

184

Setting fold-in function* for exterior rear view mirrors

185

Warning! G

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To stop steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

� Move steering wheel adjustment stalk* (� page 51).

� Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M* (� page 144).

Do not leave children unattended in the ve-hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

184

Controls in detail

Control system

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Comfort submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Easy-entry feature appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to switch the easy-entry/exit feature On or Off.

Setting fold-in function* for exterior rear view mirrors

Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automati-cally folded in when you lock your vehicle.

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Comfort submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Fold in mirrors when locking appears in the multi-function display.


� Press button æ or ç to switch function On or Off.

Vehicle configuration


i With this function set to On and the exterior rear view mirrors folded in using the button on the door control panel (� page 211), the exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out when you switch on the ignition. You will then have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors using the button on the door control panel (� page 211).

Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are folded out completely before driving off. Function Page

Distance warning function* on/off

186

DSR set speed 186

185

Controls in detail

Control system

Distance warning function*

In vehicles equipped with Distronic*, you can determine whether the distance warn-ing function is to be enabled or disabled. With this function set to On, the system will alert you when recognizing a stationary ob-stacle or a slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists, even when the Distronic* is switched off.


� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the Vehicle configuration menu appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Distance warning appears in the multifunction display.


� Press button æ or ç to switch the distance warning function On or Off.

1 Symbol for activated distance warning function

If the distance warning function is activated you will see the : symbol in the Standard display. When the distance warning function is deactivated the : symbol will not appear.

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) programmed default speed

In the Downhill Speed Regulation menu, you can program the default speed the DSR is set to when it is activated.

You can program the default speed be-tween 4-10 mph (Canada: 6-18 km/h). The set value is increased in 1 mph (Canada: 2 km/h) increments.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the Vehicle configuration menu appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message DSR Speed appears in the multifunction display.


186

Controls in detail

Control system

� Press button æ or ç repeatedly until the desired speed is shown in the multifunction display.

When DSR is switched on, DSR will use the programmed default speed to regu-late the vehicle’s speed.

Trip computer menu

Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle.

The following information is available:


� Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the message From start appears in the multifunction display.

1 Distance driven since start2 Time elapsed since start3 Average speed since start4 Average fuel consumption since start

i Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the set speed using the cruise control lever (� page 278).

Function Page


187

Fuel consumption statistics since the last reset

188

Resetting fuel consumption sta-tistics

188

Distance to empty 188

i When you enter the trip computer menu, you will always see the fuel consumption statistics since start first.

i All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately 4 hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch.

Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.

187

Controls in detail

Control system

Fuel consumption statistics since the last reset


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message After reset appears in the multifunction display.

1 Distance driven since last reset2 Time elapsed since last reset3 Average speed since last reset4 Average fuel consumption since last

reset

Resetting fuel consumption statistics


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message After reset appears in the multifunction display.

� Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster (� page 155) until the value is reset to 0.

Distance to empty


� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Range: appears in the multifunction display.

The calculated remaining driving range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display.

i The fuel consumption statistics reset auto-matically to 0 when either of the following values is exceeded:

� distance covered: 100000 miles

� time elapsed: 10000 hours

188

Controls in detail

Control system

TEL* menu

You can use the functions in the Tel menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system and switched on.

� Switch on the telephone and COMAND system.

� Press button ÿ or è on the multifunction steering wheel repeated-ly until the message Tel appears in the multifunction display.

Which messages will appear in the multi-function display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off:

� If the telephone is off, the message Phone off appears in the multifunction display.

� If the telephone is on:

The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the multi-function display is empty.

As soon as the telephone has found a network, the message Ready appears in the multifunction display.

This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.

Warning! G

A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we rec-ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele-phone call. If you choose to use the tele-phone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the tele-phone when weather, road and traffic condi-tions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-hicle.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-out being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-sibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

189

Controls in detail

Control system

Answering a call

When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the multifunction display you will see the message, or if available, the caller ID (name and number):

� Press button s.

You have answered the call. The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display.

Ending a call or rejecting an incoming call

� Press button t.

Dialing a number from the phone book

If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time.

� Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the message Tel appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button j or k.

The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone. This may take several minutes. The message Please wait appears in the multifunction display.

When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been loaded.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display.

The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

1 Name from the phone book

i If you press and hold j or k for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again.

Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button t.

190

Controls in detail

Control system

� Press button s.

The system dials the selected phone number.

� If the connection is successful and this feature is supported by your network provider, the name of the party (if stored in your phone book) you are calling and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunc-tion display.

� If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.

Redialing

The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book.

� Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the message Tel appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button s.

The first number in the redial memory appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button s.

The control system dials the selected phone number.

191

Controls in detail


For more information on driving with an automatic transmission, see “Automatic transmission” (� page 58).

Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjust-ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions.

If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program.

Gear selector lever

The gear selector lever is located on the right of the steering column.

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

P Park positionR Reverse gearN NeutralD Drive position

i During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up more quickly to operating temperature.

Warning! G

Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal’s range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance.

During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.

192

Controls in detail


Shifting from P to N

Moving the gear selector lever up or down shifts the automatic transmission out of park position P:

� With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.

� Move gear selector lever up or down to resistance point to select neutral position N.

Shifting from N to R or from N to D


� Move gear selector lever up past the re-sistance point to select reverse gear R.

or

� Move gear selector lever down past the resistance point to select drive position D.

� Release the parking brake (� page 60).


� Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so.

i The current transmission position P, R, N, or D appears in the multifunction display (� page 195).

Warning! G

It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans-mission out of park position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

i The gear selector lever returns to its original position. i The gear selector lever returns to its original

position.

193

Controls in detail


Shifting from P to R


� Move gear selector lever up past the re-sistance point to select reverse gear R.




Shifting from P to D


� Move gear selector lever down past the resistance point to select drive position D.




Shifting from D, R, or N to P

If you want to select park position P with the transmission being in drive position D, reverse position R or neutral position N:


� Step firmly on parking brake pedal (� page 68).

� Press button on gear selector lever in direction of arrow (� page 192) to select park position P.


i The gear selector lever returns to its original position. i The gear selector lever returns to its original

position.

! Shift the automatic transmission directly from drive position D to reverse gear R, from reverse gear R to drive position D or directly to park position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the automatic transmission could be damaged.When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow, see “Rocking the vehicle” (� page 199).

194

Controls in detail


Shifting from D or R to N

If you want to select neutral position N with the transmission being in drive position D or reverse gear R:


� Step firmly on parking brake pedal (� page 68).

� Move gear selector lever up to resis-tance point when in drive position D or down to resistance point when in reverse gear R to select neutral position N.


Shifting procedure

The automatic transmission selects indi-vidual gears automatically, depending on:

� drive position D (� page 195) with gear ranges (� page 200)

� the position of the accelerator pedal (� page 198)

� the vehicle speed

With drive position D selected, you can use the steering wheel gearshift control buttons (� page 201) to influence trans-mission shifting by:

� limiting the gear range

� changing gears manually

Transmission positions

The current transmission position appears in the multifunction display.

1 Current transmission position

i When the vehicle needs to be moved with the engine switched off and the transmission set to neutral position N (� page 195), do not depress the parking brake pedal.

! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! If the current transmission position does not appear in the multifunction display due to a malfunction, for example, make sure that the automatic transmission is in the desired position by carefully driving off with the transmission in drive position D.

Do not limit the gear range.

195

Controls in detail


Effect

ì Park position

Shift into park position P only when vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehi-cle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to shifting into park position P to secure the vehicle.

If the vehicle’s electrical system is malfunctioning, the automatic transmission could remain locked in park position P.

� Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

! SmartKey:

If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, the transmission will shift to park position P automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone will not automat-ically shift the transmission to park position P.

! KEYLESS-GO*:

If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and open a front door, the transmission will shift to park position P automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button alone will not automatically shift the transmission to park position P.

i Even though this is possible, make it a prac-tice to always shift into park position P before turning off the engine and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or when using KEYLESS-GO*, before turning off the engine with the start/stop button and opening a front door.

Effect

í Reverse gear

Shift into reverse gear R only when the vehicle is stopped.

ë Neutral

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed).

To avoid damage to the transmis-sion, never shift into neutral position N while driving.

If the ESP® is deactivated or malfunctioning:Shift into neutral position N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

ê Drive

The transmission shifts automatically. All forward gears are available.

196

Controls in detail


If you want the gear position to remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash, observe the following instructions.

Vehicles with SmartKey:

� With the vehicle at a standstill and the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.

� If engaged, release the parking brake (� page 60).

� Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the starter switch.



� With the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to park position P.


� Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button from the starter switch (� page 43).

� Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch.

� Switch on the ignition.


� Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.



� Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

Warning! G

When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason in neutral position N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

197

Controls in detail


Driving tips

Accelerator position

Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:

Less throttle Earlier upshifting

More throttle Later upshifting

Kickdown

Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration.

� Press the accelerator past the point of resistance.

Depending on the engine speed the transmission shifts into a lower gear.

� Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed.

The transmission shifts up again.

Stopping

When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:

� Leave the transmission in gear.

� Hold the vehicle with the brake.

When you stop for a longer period of time with the engine idling and/or on a hill:

� Set the parking brake.

� Shift into park position P.

Warning! G

Getting out of your vehicle without shifting into park position P is dangerous. Also, park position P alone is not intended to or capa-ble of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (� page 68).

When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.


Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could shift the automatic transmission out of park position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

198

Controls in detail


Maneuvering

When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space:

� Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes.

� Accelerate gently.

� Never abruptly step on the accelerator.

Rocking the vehicle

Rocking the vehicle by shifting between drive position D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow. The engine control system of this vehicle electronically limits shifting between drive position D and reverse gear R to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift between drive position D and reverse gear R, move the gear selector lever past the resistance point up or down.

Working on the vehicle

Hill start assist system

On uphill grades with a gradient angle of more than 5°, the hill start assist system maintains the pressure in the brake sys-tem for approximately 1 second after you have released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can start off smoothly without the vehicle moving immediately after releasing the brake pedal.

The hill start assist system is inactive

� when starting off on a level road or downhill grades

� with the transmission in neutral position N

� with the parking brake set

� if the ESP® has switched off due to a malfunction

Warning! G

When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and shift to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Warning! G

The hill start assist system is not designed to function as a parking brake and does not prevent the vehicle from moving when parked on an incline.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to park position P.

199

Controls in detail


Towing a trailer

If you tow a trailer, note the following points:

� Manually shift to a lower gear range (� page 200) if the transmission hunts between gears on inclines.

A lower gear range and reduction of speed reduces the chance to overload or overheat the engine.

For more information on trailer towing, see the “Operation” section (� page 366).

Gear ranges

With the automatic transmission in drive position D, you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within.

You can limit the gear range by pressing the left gearshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control, and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the right gear-shift button on the steering wheel gearshift control (� page 201).

The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display.

1 Current gear range

Effect

ï The transmission shifts through sixth gear only.

î The transmission shifts through fifth gear only.

é The transmission shifts through fourth gear only.

è The transmission shifts through third gear only.

With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine.

Effect

ç The transmission shifts through second gear only.

Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving:

� on steep downgrades

� in mountainous regions

� under extreme operating conditions

æ The transmission operates in first gear only.

For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades.

200

Controls in detail


Steering wheel gearshift control

With drive position D selected, you can limit or extend the gear range.

1 Left button: limiting gear range or downshift

2 Right button: extending gear range or upshift

Downshifting

� Briefly press left shift button 1.

The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the automatic transmission (� page 200).

! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the transmission is in position P, N or R.

Warning! G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be ex-ceeded.

201

Controls in detail


Upshifting

� Briefly press right shift button 2.

The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the automat-ic transmission (� page 200).

Canceling gear range limit

� Press and hold right shift button 2 until the cipher for the current gear range disappears from the multifunc-tion display (� page 200).

The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D.

Shifting into optimal gear range

� Press and hold left shift button 1.

The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears.

Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode)

If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-sponsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated.

� Stop the vehicle in a safe location.

� Shift to park position P.

� Turn off the engine.

� Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.

� Restart the engine.

� Shift to drive position D (for second gear) or reverse gear R.

� Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

i If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmis-sion will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.

202

Controls in detail

Transfer case

�
Transfer case LOW RANGE mode*
The LOW RANGE mode is available on vehi-cles with enhanced off-road package*.

In the following situations you should switch to LOW RANGE mode:

� during off-road driving (� page 357)

� when crossing water (� page 362)

� when towing up or down on steep gradients

With the LOW RANGE selected, the engine’s power delivery and the shifting behavior of the automatic transmission are adjusted. Furthermore, the ABS, ESP® and 4-ETS functions especially adapted to off-road travel are activated.

For information on driving safety systems during LOW RANGE mode, see “Driving safety systems” (� page 103).

For more information on Off-road driving, see “Off-road driving” (� page 357).

Gear Ranges

There are two possible settings.

! Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two-axle dynanometer. If such tests are necessary, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.



i The vehicle is equipped with full-time four-wheel drive. Both the front and rear axles are powered at all times when the vehicle is being operated.

HIGH RANGE

Road position for all normal driving situations.

(LOW RANGE mode off)

LOW RANGE

Off-road position for traveling on rough terrain.

(LOW RANGE mode on)

Also use the off-road position when driving on-road on steep gradients, especially when towing a trailer.

LOW RANGE acts by raising the engine’s gear ratio. The ve-hicle travels at roughly third the speed compared to when in the HIGH RANGE position, leading to an increase in the engine’s drive power.

203

Controls in detail

Transfer case

Switching LOW RANGE mode

The switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

1 LOW RANGE switch2 Indicator lamp

3 LOW RANGE display

Switching LOW RANGE mode on (switching from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE)

� Press LOW RANGE switch 1.

Indicator lamp 2 flashes.

If the system senses that all conditions are met, it will switch to LOW RANGE mode. A chime sounds and the LOW RANGE display 3 appears in the multi-function display.

The indicator lamp 2 on the LOW RANGE switch comes on continu-ously, indicating that the LOW RANGE mode has been activated.

Warning! G

Always wait until the procedure of shifting from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE – and from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE – has been entirely completed. During this proce-dure do not:

� switch off the engine

� shift the automatic transmission into another gear

If you do not wait until the shifting proce-dure has been entirely completed then it might not be correctly performed. The trans-fer case might be in neutral, thus interrupt-ing the transfer of power between the engine and the drive axle.

The vehicle is then freely movable, even if a gear has been selected, and could uninten-tionally be set into motion – particularly on up – or downhill grades. This could lead to an accident and cause injury to yourself and others.

Please observe related messages appearing in the multifunction display (� page 493).

! The shift procedure can only be performed when the following conditions are met:

� The engine is running (� page 41).

� The automatic transmission is in position N (� page 193).

� The vehicle speed does not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

i There is no reset to HIGH after the ignition has been switched off.

204

Controls in detail

Transfer case

Switching LOW RANGE mode off (switching from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE)

� Press LOW RANGE switch 1 (� page 204).

Indicator lamp 2 flashes.

If the system senses that all conditions are met, it will switch to back to HIGH RANGE mode. A chime sounds and the LOW RANGE display 3 ap-pears in the multifunction display.

The indicator lamp 2 on the LOW RANGE switch goes out, indicat-ing that the LOW RANGE mode has been deactivated.

For messages in the multifunction display, see “Practical hints” section (� page 493).

i You can cancel the procedure by pressing the LOW RANGE switch again while the indicator lamp is flashing.

! The shift procedure can only be performed when the following conditions are met:

� The engine is running (� page 41).

� The automatic transmission is in position N (� page 193).

� The vehicle speed does not exceed 43 mph (70 km/h).

i There is no reset to LOW after the ignition has been switched off.

i You can cancel the procedure by pressing the LOW RANGE switch again while the indicator lamp is flashing.

205

Controls in detail

Differential locks*

For more information on Off-road driving, see “Off-road driving” (� page 357).

Vehicles with enhanced off-road package* are equipped with automatic locks for the center and rear axle differential to improve vehicle traction.

� The center differential compensates for differences in wheel rotation be-tween the front and rear axle.

� The rear axle differential compensates differences between the rear wheels.

A few words about differentials and differential locks*

When a vehicle negotiates a turn, wheels on the outside of the curve must travel far-ther and rotate faster than the inside wheels. The differential, the operation of a set of gears that allows the powered wheels in a vehicle to turn at different speeds, makes this essential function pos-sible.

The drawback is that the differential also sends most of the engine’s power to the wheel with the least load or strain on it. For example, if one of a vehicle’s powered wheels sits on a patch of snow and spins because there is no traction, all of the en-gine’s power will go to that wheel because the power will take the path of least resis-tance. Meanwhile, the opposite wheel, sit-ting on dry pavement where it could get enough grip to start the vehicle moving, sits idle because it receives no power.

The Electronic Traction System (ETS) ad-dresses this problem and provides for good control and steering ability by auto-matically slowing the slipping wheel and thus increasing the power to the other non-slipping drive wheels to get the vehicle moving. The ESP® and ETS in this vehicle feature such intelligent limited-slip differ-ential technology, ideally suited for on-road and light off-road driving. Transfer case position LOW (� page 203) also en-hances off-road driving capabilities (� page 357).

More extreme off-road conditions may call for another solution, engaging a differen-tial lock or preventing the differential from operating altogether. This vehicle comes with two differential locks: transfer case (center) and rear. Each can be engaged simply by operating a rotary switch located on the center console (� page 207). When the transfer case (center) differential is locked, the combined (or average) speed of the front wheels is identical to the com-bined rear wheel speed. When the rear differential is locked, both rear wheels turn

i At the front axles, the 4-ETS system (� page 109) compensates for any traction problems.

206

Controls in detail

Differential locks*

at the same speed, independent of the in-dividual torque. Please be aware that en-gaging the differential locks will significantly reduce the steering ability of the vehicle.

For your safety and the safety of others and to prevent damage to the vehicle, the differential locks must not be engaged when driving on paved roads. It is impor-tant to understand that during on-road/paved driving, differentials are absolutely necessary for providing the es-sential control and steering ability of the vehicle. The differential locks, therefore, must not be engaged when driving on paved roads and should only be used to the extent necessary to negotiate off-road conditions which cannot be handled by the systems (automatic 4-ETS, the ESP®, man-ual switch position “LOW” of transfer case) this vehicle comes equipped with.

Switching differential locks* The rotary switch for the differential locks is located on the upper part of the center console.

You can select between three locking modes.

1 Rotatable outer adjustment ring with indicator lamp

2 AUTO mode: center differential is auto-matically locked

3 Center differential is completely locked4 Center and rear axle differential are

completely locked

! If the differential locks are engaged, accel-erate gently when setting the vehicle in motion.

To avoid damage to the transmission, the vehicle may only be operated on a dynamometer (single axle dynamometer) if

� the axle not being driven is jacked up

or

� the associated propeller shaft is disconnect-ed.

207

Controls in detail

Differential locks*

AUTO mode

The AUTO mode is adequate for most driv-ing situations since the center differential is locked and released as required.


The center differential locks is in AUTO mode. The indicator lamp on the adjustment ring 1 above symbol U 2 is on.

Center and rear axle differential locks The differential locks should only be engaged manually if traction is insufficient in AUTO mode.

The differential locks can be engaged in the sequence 3, 4 (� page 207) up to a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h).

Engaging differential locks:

� for off-road driving

� for driving through water

� when driving on deep snow and icy or fouled surfaces

i At speeds up to 19 mph (30 km/h), it is possible to manually lock the differential locks for driving on rough terrain.

Warning! G

Never drive on a paved surface with the center and rear axle differential locks manually engaged. Ability to steer the vehicle is greatly reduced when the differen-tial locks are manually engaged, increasing the risk of an accident.

For safety reasons, the locks are automati-cally released at a vehicle speed above 31 mph (50 km/h). Nevertheless, you should only manually lock the differential if absolutely necessary because engaged locks will restrict the vehicle drive train while cornering and cause the vehicle to chatter. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.

! The differential locks must not be engaged manually when towing the vehicle or spinning the wheels.

208

Controls in detail

Differential locks*


� To select the required locking mode, rotate adjustment ring 2 to the desired position 3 or 4 (� page 207).

The indicator lamp on the adjustment ring 1 at the respective symbol comes on.

Example

5 Center differential is completely locked

! If the differential locks have been manually engaged, the tires will scuff on the road surface when cornering because the differences be-tween the individual wheel rotation speeds will not be compensated for.

i The differential locks are reset to AUTO mode after the ignition has been switched off for longer than 10 seconds.

209

Controls in detail

Good visibility

For information on windshield wipers, see “Windshield wipers” (� page 63).

Headlamp cleaning system*

The headlamp cleaning button is located on the left side of the dashboard.

1 Headlamp cleaning button


� Press button 1.

The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet.


Rear view mirrors

For more information on setting the rear view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (� page 52).

Interior rear view mirror, antiglare position

1 Lever

� Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by moving lever 1 towards the wind-shield.

The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.

i The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have

� switched on the headlamps

and

� operated the windshield wipers with wind-shield washer fluid fifteen times

When you switch off the ignition, the counter resets.

210

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*

The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when

� the ignition is switched on

and

� incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror

The rear view mirror will not react if

� the automatic transmission is set to position R

� the interior lighting is turned on

Power folding exterior rear view mirrors*

Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out automatically

When the corresponding function in the control system is activated (� page 185):

� The exterior rear view mirrors automat-ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside.

� The exterior rear view mirrors automat-ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver’s or front pas-senger door are subsequently opened.

Warning! G

The auto-dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sen-sors in the interior rear view mirror.

The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not react, for example, when transporting cargo which covers the rear window.

Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles (incident light) could blind you. As a result, you may not be able to observe traffic con-ditions and could cause an accident.

Warning! G

Exercise care when using the passen-ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

! Before you drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior rear view mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged.

211

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Synchronizing exterior rear view mirrors

The power folding rear view mirrors may have to be synchronized after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or dis-charged. If the exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly upon locking or un-locking the vehicle although the corre-sponding function in the control system is activated (� page 185), do the following:

� Fold each exterior rear view mirror in completely (� page 212).

� Fold each exterior rear view mirror out completely (� page 212).

When the exterior rear view mirrors fold properly upon locking the vehicle, the exte-rior mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.

Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out manually

The button is located on the door control panel.

1 Button for folding exterior rear view mirrors in and out


Folding in

� Briefly press button 1.

Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.

Folding out

� Briefly press button 1 again.

Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.

i The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not folded out completely.

i If you are driving at more than approximately 30 mph (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in.

! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front) press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press button 1 again to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjust-ment mechanism.

The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.

Please make sure both rear view mirrors are folded out before driving off.

212

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Sun visors

The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving.

1 Sun visor2 Additional sun visor*3 Mirror lamp4 Vanity mirror cover5 Vanity mirror6 Holder for gas cards7 Mounting

Glare through the windshield

� Swing sun visor 1 down.

� Make sure sun visor 1 is properly en-gaged in mounting 7.

� When you do not experience glare any-more, swing sun visor 1 up.

Vanity mirror


� Flip up cover 4 to access vanity mirror 5.

Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on.

� After using vanity mirror 5, flip down cover 4.

� Swing sun visor 1 up.

Warning! G

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

213

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Glare through a side window

1 Sun visor2 Additional sun visor*


� Disengage sun visor 1 from mounting 7 (� page 213).

� Pivot sun visor 1 to the side.

� Adjust sun visor 1 by pushing or pull-ing in the direction of arrows.

� Swing down additional sun visor* 2 when you experience additional glare through the windshield.

Rear panorama roof sunshade

The rear panorama roof sunshade over the third-row seats prevents the sun from shin-ing directly into the vehicle.

You can open and close the sunshade by hand.

1 Mounting2 Clip3 Handle4 Button

Closing

� Grasp on handle 3 and insert clips 2 into mounting 1.

The third-row sunshade engages.

Opening

� Press on button 4 to disengage the third-row sunshade from mounting 1.

! To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover 4 (� page 213), make sure it is closed before pivoting sun visor 1 to the side.

! Always guide the sunshade. Do not let it snap back abruptly, as it could be damaged.

214

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The de-froster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside tem-perature.


Activating

� Press button 1 on the climate con-trol panel (� page 218) or the automat-ic climate control* panel (� page 232).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Deactivating

� Press button 1 once more.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.Warning! G

Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driv-ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.

! If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, too many electrical consumers are operating simul-taneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by switching the rear window defroster off.

As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster switches back on auto-matically.

215

Controls in detail

Climate control

216

Controls in detail

Climate control

1 Driver’s door air vent, fixed

2 Left side air vent, adjustable

3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side and door air vent

4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent

5 Left center air vent, adjustable

6 Right center air vent, adjustable

7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent

8 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side and door air vent

9 Right side air vent, adjustable

a Front passenger door air vent, fixed

b Climate control panel

i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for center air vents and side air vents to the middle position.

217

Controls in detail

Climate control

1 Temperature control, left

2 Air distribution and air volume (automatic, manual)

3 Front defroster0or, depending on vehicle production date,|

4 Increasing air volume

5 Air distribution (directs air through the windshield and side air vents)

6 Rear climate control* on/offAir supply for rear passenger compartment on/off

: USA only

< Canada only

7 Temperature control, right

8 AC cooling on/offResidual heat/ventilation

9 Air distribution (directs air through center and side air vents)

a Air distribution (directs air through the footwells and side air vents)

b Air volume display

c Decreasing air volume

d Rear window defroster

e Air recirculation

f Interior temperature sensor

g Climate control on/off

218

Controls in detail

Climate control

The climate control is operational whenev-er the engine is running. You can operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en-ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated (� page 226).

Warning! G

When operating the climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro-tected skin in the immediate area of the air vents.

Always keep sufficient distance between un-protected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls (� page 218) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.

Warning! G

Follow the recommended settings for heat-ing and cooling given on the following pag-es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-ture” (� page 251). The climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-shield free of snow and debris.

219

Controls in detail

Climate control

Deactivating the climate control system

Deactivating

� Press button ´ (� page 218).


Reactivating

� Press button U (� page 218).

Operating the climate control system in automatic mode

Activating

� Press button U (� page 218) while the engine is running.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distri-bution are adjusted automatically.

� Use temperature controls 1 and 7 (� page 218) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment.

The interior air temperature is adjusted automatically.

Deactivating

� Press button � or Q (� page 218).

The indicator lamp on button U goes out. The automatic operation of air volume switches off. The selected blower speed is shown in the air volume display b (� page 218).

Warning! G

When the climate control system is switched off, the outside air supply and cir-culation are also switched off. Only choose this settings for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

i You can also press button ´ (� page 218) on the climate control panel.

If you press button 0 or, depending on vehi-cle production date, button |(� page 218) to reactivate the climate control system, the defrosting mode is activated.

i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri-bution.

In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off if necessary (� page 227).

i The settings for the passenger side are also used for the rear passenger compartment.

220

Controls in detail

Climate control

or

� Press air distribution button 5, 9, or a (� page 218).

The indicator lamp on button U goes out. The automatic operation of air distribution switches off.

Setting the temperature

Use temperature controls 1 and 7 (� page 218) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre-ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). The climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible.

Increasing

� Turn temperature control 1 and/or 7 (� page 218) slightly clock-wise.

The climate control system will corre-spondingly adjust the interior air tem-perature.

Decreasing

� Turn temperature control 1 and/or 7 (� page 218) slightly coun-terclockwise.

The climate control system will corre-spondingly adjust the interior air tem-perature.

Adjusting air distribution

Press air distribution button 5, 9, or a (� page 218) to adjust the air distribution.

The following symbols are found on the controls:

� Press the desired air distribution button 5, 9, or a (� page 218).

The indicator lamp on button U goes out.

Symbol Function

a Directs air through the center and side air vents

Z Directs air to the windshield and side air vents

Y Directs air to the footwells and side air vents

221

Controls in detail

Climate control

Adjusting air volume

Five blower speeds are available.

� Press button � to decrease or button Q to increase air volume (� page 218) to the desired level.

The indicator lamp on button U (� page 218) goes out. The automatic operation of air volume switches off. The selected blower speed is shown in the air volume display b (� page 218).

Adjusting air volume for the center and side air vents

Opening the center air vents

� Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7 (� page 216) to the right.

The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are open.

Closing the center air vents

� Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7 (� page 216) to the left.

The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are closed.

Opening the side air vents


The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are open.

Closing the side air vents


The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are closed.

Air vents in the roof liner over the second-row seats*

1 Thumbwheel for air volume control2 Air vent, adjustable


� Turn thumbwheel 1 down to decrease the air volume.

or

� Turn thumbwheel 1 up to increase the air volume.

222

Controls in detail

Climate control


� Move air vent slider 2 to the left, right, up, or down to direct the air in the de-sired direction.

Front defroster

You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, for example if it is iced up. You can also use it to defog the windshield and door windows.

Activating

� Press button 0 or, depending on vehicle production date, button | (� page 218).


The climate control switches to the follow-ing functions automatically:

� most efficient blower speed and heating power, depending on outside temperature

� air flows onto the windshield and the door windows (side air vents must be open)

� the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41°F (5°C) for air-drying

Adjustments

You can adjust the air volume and the tem-perature when the front defroster is switched on. The air flow will remain on the windshield and door windows.


The air volume decreases/increases to the next lower/higher blower speed and heating switches to the tempera-ture that was set before the front de-froster was switched on.

The indicator lamp on button 0 or, depending on vehicle production date, button | goes out. The indicator lamp on button 9 comes on.

or

� Turn temperature control 1 and/or 7 (� page 218) slightly in any direction.

Heating switches to the temperature that was set before the front defroster was switched on.


i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the door windows are clear again.

��

223

Controls in detail

Climate control

�

Deactivating

� Press button 0 or, depending on vehicle production date, button | (� page 218) once more.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off.

The previous settings are in effect again. The air conditioning compressor remains switched on.

Windshield fogged on the outside

� Switch the windshield wipers on (� page 64).



The climate control switches automatically to the following functions:




If the automatic air distribution is switched off:

� Press air distribution button 9 or a (� page 218).

Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driving through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.

i The air conditioning compressor remains on even if the indicator lamp in button 0 or, de-pending on vehicle production date, button | goes out. This helps to prevent the windshield from fogging.

i To switch off, you can also press button ´ or U (� page 218).

i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again.

Warning! G

Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior win-dow fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning (� page 218) is activated, or press button 0 or, depending on vehicle production date, button |.

�

224

Controls in detail

Climate control

Activating

� Press button : (� page 218).


Deactivating

� Press button :.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

Air recirculation mode with conve-nience closing and opening feature

i The air recirculation mode is activated auto-matically at high outside temperatures.

The indicator lamp on button : is not lit when the air recirculation mode is switched on auto-matically.

A quantity outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.

If you have turned off the air conditioning (� page 226) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically.

i To cool the interior as fast as possible, the climate control automatically switches to air recirculation. The indicator lamp on button : is not lit when the air recirculation mode has been switched on automatically.

i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically

� after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C)

� after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and air-drying is turned off

� after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)

Warning! G

Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing pro-cedure.

When using the air recirculation mode with convenience closing feature, should the up-ward movement of a window be blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal feature will not operate.

In case the procedure causes potential danger:

Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sun-roof*: The closing of the windows can be im-mediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt/slid-ing sunroof* in any direction. ��

225

Controls in detail

Climate control

�

Convenience closing

� Press button : for approximately 2 seconds.

The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-roof* will close. You can release button : once the closing proce-dure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* continue closing until they are fully closed. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air recirculation mode is activated.

Convenience opening


The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-roof* will return to their previous posi-tions. You can release button : once the opening procedure has be-gun. The windows and tilt/sliding sun-roof* continue opening until they have reached their previous positions. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The air recirculation mode is deactivat-ed.

Air conditioning

The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator. In addition, the air conditioning dehumidi-fies the interior air at outside temperatures above 41°F (5° C) and helps prevent window fogging.

The closing of the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by again pressing and holding the : button.

i A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof* will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the re-spective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof* switch after it was closed with button :.

i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.

Warning! G

If you turn off the cooling function, the interior air is not dried. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others.

�

226

Controls in detail

Climate control

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air condi-tioning (cooling) function of the climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

� Press button 9 (� page 218).


Activating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air condition-ing.

� Press button 9 (� page 218) again.


The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

Residual heat and ventilation

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.

Activating

� Switch off the ignition (� page 42).



Deactivating



! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned off.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i How long the system will provide heating depends on

� the coolant temperature

� the battery voltage

Regardless of the temperature and air volume set on the climate control panel, the interior tem-perature is set to 72°F (22°C) and the blower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery.

i The residual heat is automatically turned off:

� when the ignition is switched on

� after about 30 minutes

� if the coolant temperature is too low

� if the battery voltage drops

227

Controls in detail

Climate control

Rear climate control*

The control panel is located on the rear of the front center console.

Activating rear climate control

� Press button U.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distri-bution are adjusted automatically.

Deactivating rear climate control

� Press button ´.


The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

i The rear climate control panel is only available if your vehicle is equipped with seat heating* for the rear seats or Rear Audio fea-ture* (see separate COMAND System operating instructions).

1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable

2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable

3 Rear climate control on (automatic mode)

4 Air distribution (directs air through the center air vents)

5 Air distribution (directs air through the footwells and side air vents)

6 Rear air conditioning off

i The climate control must be switched on (� page 229).

i The temperature is adjusted according to the settings for the front passenger side made on the front climate control panel (� page 221).

i Switch off the rear climate control for im-proved cooling or heating output in the front pas-senger compartment.

You can also switch off the rear climate control from the front passenger compartment (� page 229).

228

Controls in detail

Climate control

Operating from the front

Deactivating

� Press button : on the front climate control panel (� page 218).


Reactivating

� Press button : on the front climate control panel (� page 218).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The rear climate control is adjust-ed automatically.


Use the air distribution controls 4 or 5 to adjust the air distribution for the rear passenger compartment.

The following symbols are found on the controls:

Adjusting manually

� Press the desired air distribution control 4 or 5.

The indicator lamp in the U button goes out.

Adjusting automatically


The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air distribution is adjust-ed automatically.


The air volume for the rear zone corre-sponds to the air volume settings for the front passenger side. You can switch off the air supply for the rear zone.

You can switch off the supplied amount of air volume.



Symbol Function

Z Directs air to the center air vents

Y Directs air to the footwells and the side air vents

229

Controls in detail


230

Controls in detail


1 Driver’s door air vent, fixed

2 Left side air vent, adjustable

3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side and door air vent

4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent

5 Left center air vent, adjustable

6 Right center air vent, adjustable

7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent

8 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side and door air vent

9 Right side air vent, adjustable

a Front passenger door air vent, fixed

b Automatic climate control panel

i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for center air vents and side air vents to the middle position.

231

Controls in detail


1 Temperature control, left


3 Air distribution, driver’s side

4 Front defroster0or, depending on vehicle production date,|

5 Increasing air volume

6 Rear window defroster

7 Air distribution, passenger side

8 Rear automatic climate control on/off

> USA only

™ Canada only

9 Temperature control, right

a Automatic climate control on/off

b Air distribution, passenger side

c Air distribution, passenger side

d AC cooling on/offResidual heat/ventilation

e Display

f Decreasing air volume

g Air recirculation

h Air distribution, driver’s side

j Air distribution, driver’s side

k Interior temperature sensor

l Adopting driver’s side settings for all zones

232

Controls in detail


The automatic climate control is a 3-zone intelligent automatic climate control sys-tem. Your vehicle interior is divided into 3 zones.

With the help of a sun sensor, the automat-ic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone.

The automatic climate control is operation-al whenever the engine is running. It cools the vehicle’s interior according to the an-gle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the out-side temperature and the selected temperature. You can operate the auto-matic climate control in either the auto-matic or manual mode.

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en-ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated (� page 232).

Warning! G

When operating the automatic climate con-trol, the air that enters the passenger com-partment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set tem-perature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents.

Always keep sufficient distance between un-protected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls (� page 232) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.

233

Controls in detail


Deactivating the automatic climate control system

Deactivating

� Press button ´ (� page 232) until the display e (� page 232) is cleared.


Reactivating

� Press button U(� page 232).Warning! G

Follow the recommended settings for heat-ing and cooling given on the following pag-es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-ture” (� page 251). The automatic climate con-trol will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-shield free of snow and debris.

Warning! G

When the automatic climate control system is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this settings for a short time. Other-wise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

i You can also press button ´ (� page 232) on the automatic climate control panel.

If you press button 0 or, depending on vehicle production date, button | (� page 232) to reactivate the automatic climate control system, the defrosting mode is activated.

234

Controls in detail


Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode

You can switch the automatic climate con-trol system on and off separately for each zone as needed.

Activating

� Press button U (� page 232) while the engine is running.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Air volume and air distribu-tion are controlled separately for each zone.

� Use temperature controls 1 and 9 (� page 232) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment.

The temperature of the interior is ad-justed automatically.

Deactivating

� Press one button of the air distribution (� page 232) or press button � or Q (� page 232).


Depending on which button you press – the air distribution button or the air vol-ume button � or Q – automatic control of either the air distribution or air volume is switched off.


Use temperature control 1 and 9 (� page 232) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre-ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible.

Increasing

� Turn temperature control 1 and/or 9 slightly clockwise.

The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Decreasing

� Turn the temperature control 1 and/or 9 slightly counterclockwise.

The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

i When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.

In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off if necessary.

235

Controls in detail



Use the air distribution controls 3, h, or j for the driver’s side, or 7, b, or c (� page 232) for the passenger side to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment.

The following symbols are found on the buttons:

� Press the desired air distribution but-ton (� page 232).

The indicator lamp on the desired but-ton goes out.

Adjusting the air distribution for the center and side air vents

Opening the center air vents


The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are open.

Closing the center air vents


The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are closed.

Opening the side air vents


The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are open.

Closing the side air vents


The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are closed.

Symbol Function

Driver’s side

Passen-ger side

6 Z Directs air to the windshield and side air vents

7 a Directs air through the center, side and rear passenger compartment air vents

8 Y Directs air to the footwells and side air vents

236

Controls in detail






The automatic mode is switched off. The selected blower speed appears in the display e (� page 232).

Front defroster

You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, such as when it is iced up. You can also use it to defog the windshield and door windows.

Activating



The automatic climate control switches to the following functions automatically:




Adjustments

You can adjust the air volume and the tem-perature when the front defroster is switched on. The air flow will remain on the windshield and door windows.

i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again.

237

Controls in detail



The air volume decreases/increases to the next lower/higher blower speed and heating switches to the tempera-ture that was set before the front de-froster was switched on.


or

� Turn temperature control 1 and/or 7 (� page 232) slightly in any direction.

Heating switches to the temperature that was set before the front defroster was switched on.


Deactivating


The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off.

The previous settings are once again in effect.

Windshield fogged on the outside

� Switch the windshield wipers on (� page 64).


The indicator lamp on button U goes out. Air volume and air distribution are controlled separately for each zone.

If the automatic air distribution and air volume are switched off:

� Press buttons 8 and Y (� page 232).

i The air conditioning compressor remains on even if the indicator lamp in button 0 or, de-pending on vehicle production date, button | goes out. This helps to prevent the windshield from fogging.

i To switch off, you can also press button ´ or U (� page 232).

i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again.

238

Controls in detail


Maximum cooling MAXCOOL

If the air distribution control as well as the airflow volume control are set to U and there is a high need for cooling, the MAXCOOL function is activated.

“MAXCOOL” appears in the front and rear display.

This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* are closed).

Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driving through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.

Activating



Warning! G

Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior win-dow fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning (� page 241) is activated, or press button 0 or, depending on vehicle production date, button |.

i The air recirculation mode is activated auto-matically at high outside temperatures.

The indicator lamp on button : is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on.

A quantity of outside air is added after approxi-mately 30 minutes.

If you have turned off the air conditioning (� page 241) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically.

i To cool the interior as fast as possible, the automatic climate control automatically switch-es to air recirculation. The indicator lamp on button : is not lit when the system switches to air recirculation automatically.

239

Controls in detail


Deactivating



At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.

Air recirculation mode with conve-nience closing and opening feature

Convenience closing


The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-roof* will close. You can release button : once the closing proce-dure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* continue closing until they are fully closed. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air recirculation mode is activated.

i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically

� after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C)

� after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and air-drying is turned off

� after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)

Warning! G

Never operate the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure.

When using the air recirculation mode with convenience closing feature, should the up-ward movement of a window be blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal feature will not operate.

In case the procedure causes potential danger:

Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sun-roof*: The closing of the windows can be im-mediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt/slid-ing sunroof* in any direction.

The closing of the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by again pressing and holding the : button.

240

Controls in detail


Convenience opening


The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-roof* will return to their previous posi-tions. You can release button : once the opening procedure has be-gun. The windows and tilt/sliding sun-roof* continue opening until they have reached their previous positions. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The air recirculation mode is deactivat-ed.

Air conditioning

The cooling function, only operational when the engine is running, cools the vehi-cle down to the selected interior tempera-ture. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thereby preventing the windows from fog-ging up.

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air condi-tioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehi-cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu-midified.


The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

Activating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air condition-ing.

� Press button 9 again.


The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R-134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

i A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof* will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the re-spective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof* switch after it was closed with button :.

i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.

Warning! G

If you turn off the cooling function, the interior air is not dried. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others.

241

Controls in detail


Using driver-side settings for all tem-perature zones

You can use the settings of the driver’s side, such as temperature, air volume and air distribution, for all temperature zones. These settings only need to be made once and the automatic climate control system will automatically regulate the settings for all temperature zones quickly and comfort-ably.

Activating

� Adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution (� page 232).

� Press button ; (� page 232).


The driver-side settings are used for all temperature zones.

Deactivating

� Press button ; (� page 232) again.


Residual heat and ventilation

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.

! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned off.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i If you manually set the temperature, air vol-ume or air distribution for the passenger side or the rear passenger compartment when the MONO setting is active, the MONO setting will be switched off.

i How long the system will provide heating depends on

� the coolant temperature

� the battery voltage

Regardless of the temperature and air volume set on the automatic climate control panel, an interior temperature is aimed at by 72°F (22°C) and the blower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery.

242

Controls in detail


Activating




Deactivating

� Press button 9.


Rear automatic climate control

The control panel is located at the rear of the front center console.

i The residual heat is automatically turned off:


� after about 30 minutes

� if the coolant temperature is too low

� if the battery voltage drops

1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable

2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable

3 Temperature control


5 Air distribution (directs air through the center air vents)

6 Air distribution (directs air through the footwells and side air vents)

7 Rear automatic climate control on/off

8 Decreasing air volume

9 Indicator lamps for air volume settings

a Increasing air volume

243

Controls in detail


Activating rear automatic climate control

� Press button U.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The temperature, air vol-ume, and air distribution are adjusted automatically.

Deactivating rear automatic climate control

� Press button ´.


The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

Operating from the front

Deactivating

� Press button > (� page 232).


In display e (� page 232), you will see the > symbol followed by MODE for approximately 3 seconds.


In display e (� page 232), you will see the > symbol followed by OFF.

The rear automatic climate control is switched off.

Reactivating



In display e (� page 232), you will see the > symbol followed by ON and MODE. The MODE display is cleared and the indicator lamp on button > goes out after approximately 3 seconds.

The rear automatic climate control switches on.

i The automatic climate control must be switched on (� page 234).

i Switch off the rear automatic climate con-trol for improved cooling or heating output in the front passenger compartment.

You can also switch off the rear automatic climate control from the front passenger com-partment (� page 232).

244

Controls in detail





In display e (� page 232), you will see the > symbol followed by MODE.

� Set the desired temperature for the rear passenger compartment using temperature control 3 (� page 243).

After approximately 3 seconds after the last adjustment, the display switch-es back to its standard display and the indicator lamp on button > goes out.


Use the air distribution controls 5 or 6 to adjust the air distribution for the rear passenger compartment.

The symbols on the controls represent the following functions:

Adjusting manually

� Press the desired air distribution con-trol.



� Press button U while the engine is running.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air distribution is adjust-ed automatically.


Use temperature control 3 (� page 243) to separately adjust the air temperature of the rear passenger compartment.

You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic cli-mate control will adjust to the set temper-ature as fast as possible.i You can also press the > button once

more to switch back to the standard display.

Symbol Function

Z Directs air to the center air vents

Y Directs air to the footwells and the side air vents

i The rear automatic climate control will not cool the air when the air conditioning is switched off (� page 241).

245

Controls in detail


Increasing the temperature

� Turn temperature control 3 (� page 243) slightly clockwise.

The rear automatic climate control will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature for the rear passenger compartment.

Decreasing the temperature

� Turn temperature control 3 (� page 243) slightly counterclock-wise.

The rear automatic climate control will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature for the rear passenger compartment.


Adjusting manually


� Press button � to decrease or button Q to increase air volume to the desired level.

The indicator lamp on the button U goes out. The selected blower speed is shown by the indicator lamps for air volume settings 9 (� page 243).


� Press button U.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume is adjusted automatically.

Air vents in the roof liner over the second-row seats*




or


246

Controls in detail




Air vents in the roof liner over the third-row seats*




or




247

Controls in detail

Power windows

Opening and closing

The door windows and the hinged quarter windows* are opened and closed electri-cally. The switches for all door windows and the hinged quarter windows* are located on the driver’s door control panel. The switches for the respective door win-dows are located on the front passenger door and the rear doors. The hinged quar-ter windows* can be operated from the driver’s seat only.

1 Left front door window2 Right front door window3 Right rear door window4 Hinged quarter windows*5 Override switch (� page 100)6 Left rear door window

Warning! G

When closing the windows, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

Activate the override switch (� page 101) when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children could otherwise in-jure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.

The closing of a door window can be imme-diately halted by releasing the switch or, if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released, by either pressing or pulling the respective switch.

If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the door win-dow, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly.

248

Controls in detail

Power windows


Opening the door windows

� Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 6 (� page 248) to the resistance point.

The corresponding door window moves downwards until you release the switch.

Closing the door windows

� Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 6 (� page 248) to the resistance point.

The corresponding door window moves upwards until you release the switch.

If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing a door window by pulling and holding the switch, or by pressing and hold-ing button ‹ on the SmartKey, by press-ing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on a door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate.


i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea-ture” (� page 251) and see “Convenience clos-ing feature” (� page 252).

Depending on the current position, the power windows may also open or close when the air recirculation button : on the control panel of the climate control (� page 218) or automatic climate control* (� page 232) is pressed and held.

i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the windows can be operated

� until you open the driver’s or front passenger door

� for at least 5 minutes Warning! G

If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-ing the door window, and upward movement of the door window is blocked by some ob-struction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.

249

Controls in detail

Power windows

Fully opening the door windows (Express-open)

� Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 6 (� page 248) past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding door window opens completely.

Fully closing the door windows (Express-close)

� Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 6 (� page 248) past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding door window closes completely.

� Remove the obstruction.

� Pull the respective door window switch past the resistance point again and release.

Stopping door windows during Express-operation

� Press or pull the respective door window switch again.

Hinged quarter windows*

The switches for opening and closing the hinged quarter windows are located on the door control panel of the driver’s door (� page 35).

1 Hinged quarter windows: opening2 Hinged quarter windows: closing

Opening

� Press and release switch 1.

To stop the hinged quarter window:

� Press and release switch 1 once more.

Warning! G

Driver’s door only:If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled past the resistance point and released, the automatic reversal will not function.

i If the upward movement of a door window is blocked during the closing procedure, the door window will stop and open slightly.

i If the door window still does not close when there is no obstruction, pull and hold the respec-tive power window switch. The door window will then close without the obstruction sensor function.

250

Controls in detail

Power windows

Closing

� Press and release switch 2.

To stop the hinged quarter window:

� Press and release switch 2 once more.

Synchronizing the door windows

The door windows must be resynchronized

� after the battery was disconnected

� if the door windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close)

� Close all doors.


� Pull and hold switch 1, 2, 3, or 6 (� page 248).

Once a door window is closed com-pletely, hold the respective switch for approximately 3 seconds.

The door window is synchronized.

Summer opening feature

If the weather is warm, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simulta-neously:

� opening the door windows

� opening the hinged quarter windows*

� opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*

� switching on the seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat

� Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the driver’s outside door handle.

The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim-ity to the driver’s outside door handle.

� Press and hold button Œ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* have reached the desired position.

� Release button Œ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to interrupt the opening procedure.

i When the obstruction sensor detects the hinged quarter window is blocked during the closing process, it will stop and open slightly.

i Each door window must be resynchronized separately.

251

Controls in detail

Power windows

Convenience closing feature

When locking the vehicle, you can simulta-neously close




� Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the driver’s outside door handle (� page 251).

The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim-ity to the driver’s outside door handle.

� Press and hold button ‹ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* are completely closed.

� Release button ‹ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to interrupt the closing procedure.


� Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle (� page 72) until the windows and the tilt/sliding sun-roof* are completely closed.

� Release the lock button on the outside door handle to interrupt the closing procedure.

Warning! G

When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-lows:

� Release button ‹ to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold button Œ. To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold button ‹.


� Release the lock button (� page 72) on the driver’s outside door handle to stop the closing procedure.

� Immediately pull on the same outside door handle and hold firmly. The win-dows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened.

252

Controls in detail


�
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Opening and closing
Warning! G

When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an ob-struction that blocks its path in a circum-stance where you are closing the tilt/sliding sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof switch past the resistance point, or by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate.

The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and re-leased, by moving the switch in any direc-tion.

The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof.

In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts prop-erly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compart-ment.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-attended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans-port any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.

Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions.

The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur (� page 503).

! Please keep in mind that weather conditions can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, reso-nance noises may result in addition to the usual wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-sure changes in the passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po-sition of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly.

253

Controls in detail


The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically. The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is located on the overhead control panel.

Sunroof switch

1 Push back to slide sunroof open2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear

With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the sunroof open, the screen will also retract.


Opening and closing

� To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch to the resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4 (� page 254).

� Release the sunroof switch when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the de-sired position.

i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* function, see “Summer opening feature” (� page 251) and see “Convenience closing feature” (� page 252).

i Depending on the current position, the tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or close when the air recirculation button : on the control panel of the climate control (� page 218) or automatic climate control* (� page 232) is pressed and held.

254

Controls in detail


Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close)

� To fully open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 2 (� page 254) and release.

The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.

Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-open

� Move the sunroof switch in any direc-tion.

The movement of the tilt/sliding sun-roof stops.

Synchronizing

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized

� after the battery has been disconnected or discharged

� after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been closed manually (� page 503)

� after a malfunction

� if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly

� Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof from the fuse box (� page 544).

i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.

Warning! G

If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an ob-struction that blocks its path in a circum-stance where you are closing the tilt/sliding sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof switch past the resistance point, or by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate.

The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and re-leased, by moving the switch in any direc-tion.

i For information on which fuse box contains the fuse for the power tilt/sliding sunroof, see the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit (� page 495). ��

255

Controls in detail


�
� Reinsert the fuse in the main box.

� Press and hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow 3 (� page 254) until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.

� Hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow 3 for approximately 1 second.

� Open the tilt/sliding sunroof using the Express-open feature (� page 255).

If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, it is synchronized.

If the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open completely:

� Repeat the above steps.

�

256

Controls in detail

Driving systems

�
Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
� Cruise control (� page 257) and Distronic* (� page 262), with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed.

� Distance warning function* (� page 274) is only available with Distronic*, which warns of stationary obstacle or slower moving vehicles that you are closing in on too quickly.

� Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) (� page 275), which supports you when you are driving downhill.

� Off-road driving program (� page 279) (vehicles without enhanced off-road package*), which supports you when you are driving off-road.

� Air suspension packageThere are two components available.

� Vehicle level control (� page 281), which controls the vehicle level.

� Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* (� page 280), which adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics.

� Parktronic* (� page 290) and rear view camera* (� page 295), which serve as a parking aid.

For information on the ABS, BAS, EBP, ESP®, and 4-ETS, see “Driving safety sys-tems” (� page 103).

Cruise control

The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle.

The use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extend-ed periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column (� page 24).

i The cruise control should not be activated during off-road driving.

257

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1 Setting current or higher speedAdjustment in 1 mph increments (to the resistance point) or 5 mph increments (past the resistance point) (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)

2 Setting current or lower speedAdjustment in 1 mph increments (to the resistance point) or 5 mph increments (past the resistance point) (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)

3 Canceling cruise control4 Resume to last set speed

Warning! G

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.

Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed.

� The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

� The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.

� Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog.

The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

Warning! G

The cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. The brake pedal depresses when the cruise con-trol engages the brakes.

Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the cruise control system.

Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught.

Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con-venience system designed to assist the driv-er during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.

258

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Activating cruise control

You can activate the cruise control when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (30 km/h).

In the following cases you cannot activate the cruise control:

� when you brake

� when you have set the parking brake

� when the automatic transmission is set to position P, R, or N

� if the ESP® is switched off


Setting current speed

� Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed.

� Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2.

The current speed is set.

� Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control is activated.

The current set speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds.

Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel the cruise control:

� Step on the brake pedal.

The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use.

or

� Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 (� page 258).

The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use.

i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom-eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for the cruise control system.

i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.

On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains the set speed by braking with the vehicle’s braking system. In addition, on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission will down-shift automatically.

i The last stored set speed is deleted when the engine is turned off.

259

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Setting a higher speed

You can increase the speed in two ways.

Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments

� Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 (� page 258).

� Release the cruise control lever.

The vehicle speed increases in incre-ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1km/h).


i The cruise control switches off automatically when

� you step on the brake pedal

� you depress the parking brake pedal

The cruise control switches off automatically and an acoustic warning will sound when

� the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30 km/h)

� the ESP® is in operation

� the ESP® is switched off with the ESP® switch (� page 107)

� the ESP® has switched off due to a malfunction (� page 441)

� you set the automatic transmission to N while driving

Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear.

! Setting the automatic transmission to N while driving cancels the cruise control. However, the automatic transmission should not be set to N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control. After a brief accel-eration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume the last set speed.

Warning! G

If you increase the set vehicle speed, keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Increase the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious in-jury to you and others.

i The set value is increased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point.

i The set value is increased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift the cruise control lever past the resistance point.

260

Controls in detail

Driving systems

� Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 (� page 258).


The vehicle speed increases in incre-ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).

Setting a lower speed

You can reduce the speed in two ways.


� Briefly press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point in direc-tion of arrow 2 (� page 258).


The vehicle speed decreases in incre-ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).


� Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direc-tion of arrow 2 (� page 258).



i The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Warning! G

If you decrease the set vehicle speed, keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious in-jury to you and others.

i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

i The set value is decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you press the cruise control lever down to the resis-tance point.

i The set value is decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point.

i The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

261

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function)

� Briefly pull the cruise control lever in di-rection of arrow 4 (� page 258).

The cruise control resumes to the last set speed, or if no speed is stored, it will set and store the current speed.


The last set speed appears in the multi-function display for approximately 5 seconds.

Distronic*

When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise control system increases the driving convenience afforded by the cruise control while traveling on expressways and other major roadways.

� If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at your preset following distance.

� If there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, Distronic will function in the same way as standard cruise control (� page 257).

Warning! G

The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or decelera-tion differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

Warning! G

Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not however, intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The responsibili-ty for the vehicle’s speed, distance to the preceding vehicle and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe stopping distance, always remains with the driver.

Distronic cannot take road and traffic condi-tions into account.

Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.

262

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Warning! G

Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does not react to pedestrians or on station-ary objects, nor does it recognize or predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles.

Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle’s braking power.

It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to be attentive to the road, weather and traffic conditions. Additionally, the driver must provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to remain in control of the vehicle.

High-frequency sources such as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc. can cause the Distronic system to malfunction.

Warning! G

Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-tional characteristics. We strongly recom-mend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system.

Warning! G

Distronic cannot take road and traffic condi-tions into account. Only use Distronic if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed.

Warning! G

Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.

Distronic does not act upon adverse sight and distance conditions. Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy rain, snow or sleet.

Warning! G

Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic or do not switch it on if:

� roads are slippery or covered with snow or ice. The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating, and the vehicle could skid.

� the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog, for example. The distance control system functionality could be impaired.

Always pay attention to surrounding traffic conditions even while Distronic is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recog-nize dangerous situations until it is too late. This could cause an accident in which you and others could be injured.

263

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Warning! G

The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

Warning! G

Close attention to road and traffic condi-tions is imperative at all times, regardless of whether or not Distronic is activated.

Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a continuous speed.

Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.

Switch off Distronic:

� when changing from the left to the right lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in the left lane

� when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp

� in complex driving situations, such as in highway construction zones

In these situations, Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated.

Distronic is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-tance from moving objects in front of it.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The ra-dar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or alter-ing of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.


i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.


264

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Distronic displays in the speedometer dial

1 Set speed

If Distronic is activated, one or two cruise control speed segments come on around the set speed.

1 Set speed2 Cruise control speed segments3 Speed of the vehicle ahead

If Distronic detects a vehicle directly ahead, the cruise control speed segments 2, which represents the differ-ence from the speed of the preceding vehicle 3 to the driver’s selected set speed 1, appear in the speedometer.

If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-ger of collision:

� The distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on (� page 27).

� An intermittent warning sounds.

� Immediately apply the brake to avoid a collision.

Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking. See the follow-ing warning note.

The intermittent warning sound ceases and the distance warning lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is again estab-lished.

i The vehicle speed displayed on the speed-ometer can briefly vary from the speed setting on the Distronic system.

265

Controls in detail

Driving systems

DISTRONIC menu in the control system

Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system. The information shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is activated or deactivated.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until one of the following two displays appears in the multifunction display.

Warning! G

An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp l in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca-pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision.

Immediately brake the vehicle to increase your distance to the preceding vehicle. The warning sound is intended as a final caution in which you should intercede with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially danger-ous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking. This will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoid-ed.

Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

Warning! G

Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi-mum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum deceleration of your vehicle.

Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to maintain the set speed.

Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system.

Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught.

i For activating or deactivating the Distronic system, see “Activating Distronic” (� page 268) or, see “Deactivating Distronic” (� page 270).

For activating or deactivating the Distance warn-ing function, see “Distance warning function*” (� page 186).

266

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Distronic activated

When you turn Distronic on, you will see the set speed in the multifunction display for about 5 seconds. When Distronic is activated, the following display appears in the multifunction display.

1 Distronic activated2 Set vehicle speed

Distronic deactivated

When Distronic is deactivated, you will see the standard Distronic display in the multi-function display.

1 Preceding vehicle, if detected2 Actual distance to the preceding vehi-

cle3 Preset distance threshold to the pre-

ceding vehicle4 Your vehicle

Cruise control lever

The Distronic system is operated by means of the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.

1 Setting current or higher speedAdjustment in 1 mph increments (to the resistance point) or 5 mph increments (past the resistance point) (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)

2 Setting current or lower speedAdjustment in 1 mph increments (to the resistance point) or 5 mph increments (past the resistance point) (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)

3 Deactivating Distronic4 Activating Distronic or resuming to last

set speed

267

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Activating Distronic

You can activate Distronic when the vehi-cle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).

When Distronic is activated the multifunc-tion display will show a message such as DISTRONIC 55 mph.

If Distronic has not been activated after pressing the cruise control lever, you will see the message DISTRONIC Off in the multifunction display.

In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic:

� up to 2 minutes after starting the engine

� when you brake

� when you have set the parking brake

� when the automatic transmission is set to position P, R, or N

� if the ESP® is switched off


Setting the current speed

� Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed.

� Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2 (� page 267).

Distronic is activated and the current speed is set.


Setting a higher speed

You can increase the set speed in two ways.

i If you do not take your foot off of the accel-erator pedal and continue to accelerate past the set speed, the following message will appear in the multifunction display:

DISTRONIC Override

The distance to a slower moving vehicle in front of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position.

Warning! G

If you increase the set vehicle speed, keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Increase the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious in-jury to you and others.

268

Controls in detail

Driving systems









Setting a lower speed

You can reduce the set speed in two ways.





i The set value is increased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point.

i The set value is increased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point.

i The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Warning! G

If you decrease the set vehicle speed, keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious in-jury to you and others.

i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

i The set value is decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you press the cruise control lever down to the resis-tance point.

269

Controls in detail

Driving systems




The vehicle set speed decreases in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).

Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function)

� Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 (� page 267).

The Distronic resumes to the last set speed.


The last set speed or, if no speed is stored, the current set speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds.

Deactivating Distronic

There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system:

� Step on the brake pedal.

or

� Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 (� page 267).

Distronic will be deactivated. The last set speed will be stored in memory.

i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point.

i The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Warning! G

The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or decelera-tion differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

i The following message appears in the multi-function display for approximately 5 seconds: DISTRONIC Off.

The last stored set speed is deleted when the engine is turned off.

270

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Setting the following distance in Distronic

You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Us-ing this time setting and the current speed of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the preceding vehicle. The set distance will be shown in the multifunction display (� page 267).

The distance setting switch for the time setting is located on the cruise control le-ver on the left-hand side of the steering column.

i The Distronic switches off automatically when

� you step on the brake pedal

� you depress the parking brake pedal

In this case, the Distronic speed segments in the speedometer (� page 265) will go out.

� the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (30 km/h)

� the ESP® is in operation

� the ESP® is switched off with the ESP® switch (� page 107)

� the ESP® has switched off due to a malfunction (� page 441)

� you set the automatic transmission to N while driving

The Distronic speed segments in the speedometer (� page 265) will go out and an acoustic warning will sound.

Warning! G

Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop.

! Setting the automatic transmission to N while driving cancels the Distronic. However, the automatic transmission should not be set to N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the Distronic. After a brief accelera-tion (e.g. for passing), the Distronic will resume the last set speed.

Warning! G

It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recom-mendations for safe following distance.

271

Controls in detail

Driving systems

1 Distance setting switch2 To decrease distance3 To increase distance

Increasing distance

Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the preceding vehicle.

� Turn distance setting switch 1 in direction of arrow 3.

Decreasing distance

Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a smaller following distance to the preceding vehicle.

� Turn distance setting switch 1 in direction of arrow 2.

Driving with Distronic

This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is re-quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-pared to brake in such situations. Braking will deactivate the Distronic system.

Warning! G

Distronic works to maintain the speed se-lected by the driver unless a moving obsta-cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-lowing another vehicle ahead of you at your set distance).

This means that:

� Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you have changed lanes.

� While in a sharp turn or if the preceding vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic could lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerate to the previously selected speed.

Distronic regulates only the distance be-tween your vehicle and those directly ahead of it, but does not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.:

� a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam

� a disabled vehicle

� an oncoming vehicle

The driver must always be alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by means of steering or braking the vehicle.

Warning! G

Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions.

272

Controls in detail

Driving systems

The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor (located behind the hood grille), especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message DISTRONIC currently unavailable – See Operator’s Manual appears in the multi-function display.

For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor cover” (� page 430).

Turns and bends

In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect one too soon. This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.

Offset driving

A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from your direct line of travel may not be detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi-cient distance to the vehicle ahead.

i If the message DISTRONIC available again appears during driving the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic works again, if you reactivate it (� page 268).

273

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Lane changing

Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes. There will be insufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle.

Narrow vehicles

Because of their narrow profile, the vehi-cles traveling near the outer edges of the lane have not yet been detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead.

Distance warning function*

When Distronic* is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists:

� The distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on.

� An intermittent warning will sound if necessary.

If these warnings are issued, you must brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.

When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-ing sound ceases. The warning sound will also cease when the distance to the preceding vehicle is sufficient again with-out applying the brakes. In this case, the distance warning lamp will also go out.

274

Controls in detail

Driving systems

� Switch on the distance warning function in the control system (� page 186).

Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) For more information, see “Off-road driv-ing” (� page 357).

The DSR is an aid for driving downhill. DSR regulates your vehicle’s speed when driv-ing downhill to the value set in the control system (� page 186). The steeper the downhill gradient is, the greater the brake application. On flat road surfaces, DSR brakes only slightly or not at all.

DSR regulates the vehicle’s speed in auto-matic transmission positions D, or R.

You can drive slower or faster than the set speed at any time by braking the vehicle or depressing the accelerator pedal.

Warning! G

If the distance warning lamp l in the in-strument cluster comes on while driving and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is required. As required by the traffic situation, apply the brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application. This will not always enable you to avoid a collision, especially when traveling on varying road surface conditions and with varying driver reaction.

Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by the distance warning function. This could result in wrong or miss-ing distance warnings.

Warning! G

Downhill Speed Regulation is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The system must be set to be appropriate for the topographical and weather conditions encountered which can change quickly. The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehi-cle speed and for safe brake operation.

Depending on the programmed speed (� page 186), actual vehicle speed and gra-dient, switching on the DSR while driving can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the vehicle’s brake sys-tem through the DSR. Sudden and unex-pected deceleration can result in loss of vehicle control, causing an accident and/or serious personal injury to you and others. Do not switch on the DSR in a circumstance where rapid deceleration could result in a loss of vehicle control.

i In addition, make use of the engine’s braking effect by shifting the automatic transmission into a lower gear.

275

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Switching the Downhill Speed Regulation on/off


Vehicles without enhanced off-road package*

1 DSR on/off2 Indicator lamp

Vehicles with enhanced off-road package*

1 DSR on/off2 Indicator lamp

i Whenever DSR is switched on, DSR will use the programmed default speed to regulate the vehicle’s speed. The default speed programmed at the factory is 4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The default speed can be reprogrammed using the control system (� page 186). The next time DSR is switched on, DSR will use the newly pro-grammed default speed to regulate the vehicle’s speed.

Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the set speed using the cruise control lever (� page 267). Keep in mind that adjusting the set speed using the cruise control lever with DSR switched on will not change the programmed default speed. If DSR is switched off and then switched on again, DSR will use the programmed default speed.

Depending on the road surface and level of downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to maintain the set speed. To maintain the set speed, apply the brakes if necessary.

276

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Switching Downhill Speed Regulation on

� Press DSR switch 1 (� page 276).

The indicator lamp 2 comes on.

The message DSR and the set speed ap-pear in the multifunction display.

For information on how to program the set speed while driving, see “Adjusting Down-hill Speed Regulation speed with DSR switched on” (� page 278).

Switching Downhill Speed Regulation off

� Press DSR switch 1 (� page 276).

The indicator lamp 2 goes out.

The message DSR Off appears in the multifunction display.

Warning! G

If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the Downhill Speed Regulation is activated, the vehicle can drive faster than the pro-grammed set speed. You should therefore drive downhill with particular caution as it could otherwise lead to an accident and/or serious injury to you or others. Keep in mind that as soon as you remove the foot from the accelerator pedal with the DSR switched on, the DSR will start regulating the vehicle’s speed including use of brakes if required. Depending on the programmed set speed, actual vehicle speed and gradient, the DSR can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly. Sudden and unexpected deceleration can result in loss of vehicle control, causing an accident and/or serious personal injury to you and others.

i The DSR can only be switched on if the vehi-cle speed is below 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).

i If the DSR is switched on at a speed above 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h), the message DSR Max. speed 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h) ap-pears in the multifunction display.

i At a speed above approximately 21 mph (Canada approximately: 35 km/h), the DSR is automatically switched off. The message DSR Off appears in the multifunction display and an acoustic signal sounds. For information on how to switch DSR on again, see “Switching Downhill Speed Regulation on” (� page 277).

277

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Adjusting Downhill Speed Regulation speed with DSR switched on

With the DSR switched on (� page 276), the speed setting can be changed using the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.

Cruise control lever

1 Increase set speed2 Reduce set speed

You can change the set speed between 3-10 mph (Canada: 4-18 km/h).

You can increase or reduce the set speed in two ways.


Increase set speed:




Reduce set speed:




Each time the set speed is changed, DSR will appear in the multifunction dis-play and the changed set speed is shown.

i The set value is increased or decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift or depress the cruise control lever to the resistance point.

i The set speed is canceled when DSR is switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR will use the programmed default speed (� page 186).

278

Controls in detail

Driving systems


Increase set speed:




Reduce set speed:




Each time the set speed is changed, DSR will appear in the multifunction dis-play and the newly set speed is shown.

Off-road driving program (Vehicles without enhanced off-road package*)

The off-road driving program is designed to assist the driver when driving off-road in terrain and crossing water. The off-road driving program adjusts the engine power and shifting of the automatic transmission to be more suitable for the off-road use of the vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP®, and 4-ETS designed for off-road use are automatically activated.

In the following situations you should switch to the off-road driving program:

� during off-road driving

� when crossing water (� page 362)

� when towing up or down on steep gradients

i The set value is increased or decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift or depress the cruise control lever past the resistance point.

i The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the new set speed.

i The set speed is canceled when DSR is switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR will use the programmed default speed (� page 186).

279

Controls in detail

Driving systems


1 Switch for off-road driving program2 Indicator lamp

Switching Off-road driving program on

� Press switch 1 (� page 280).

Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The symbol y appears in the lower multifunction display.

Switching Off-road driving program off

� Press switch 1 again.

Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The symbol y disappears.

Air suspension package

Your vehicle is factory equipped with vehicle level control which regulates the ride height of the vehicle. The Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* optimizes your vehicle’s suspension tuning.

� Suspension tuning: Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* (� page 280)

� Vehicle level control (� page 281)

Adaptive Damping System (ADS)*

The fine tuning of the damping and suspen-sion is dependent on:

� your driving style

� road surface conditions

� your personal ADS settings

� your personal vehicle level settings

The ADS switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

280

Controls in detail

Driving systems



1 ADS switch2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting

The following settings are available:

� AUTO (for normal driving situations)Indicator lamps 2 and 3 are off.

� SPORT (for sporty driving)Indicator lamp 2 comes on.With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehi-cle is lowered approximately 0.6 in (15 mm).

� COMF (for comfort driving)Indicator lamp 3 comes on.


� Press ADS switch 1 repeatedly until the desired suspension tuning is reached.

Vehicle level control

The vehicle level control automatically regulates the ride height to

� reduce fuel consumption

� improve driving stability by lowering the center of gravity

The vehicle automatically regulates its ride height based on the set vehicle height and the current speed:

� As your driving speed increases, the ve-hicle is lowered by increments until it reaches high-speed level.

Vehicles with ADS*:

� If you are driving with the ADS set-ting COMF or AUTO, the vehicle is raised back to highway level as your driving speed decreases.

� You can select the high-speed level via the ADS setting SPORT. In ADS Sport, the vehicle is lowered direct-ly to high-speed level as your driv-ing speed increases.

i The setting is stored when you turn off the engine.

281

Controls in detail

Driving systems

The parked vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle level as soon the doors and tail-gate are

� unlocked

or

� opened or closed with the vehicle unlocked

In order to operate the vehicle level control switch (� page 283), however, the engine must be running.

For information on off-road driving, see “Off-road driving” (� page 357).

Warning! G

Make sure that no one is near the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you lower the vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs could become wedged into or under the ve-hicle.

For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate is opened and will continue after the door is closed again.

Warning! G

Please be aware that by raising the vehicle level, the center of gravity also rises. There-fore, always ensure that the vehicle level is as low as possible. With higher ride height the ESP® may activate earlier in certain situations.

Adapt your speed and driving to possible changed driving behavior of the vehicle after changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot pre-vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle.

! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven ter-rain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the ground and result in damage to the vehi-cle underbody. Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level.

! Before jacking up the vehicle with equip-ment that lifts one or more of the wheels com-pletely off of the ground, remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

! Please also note the information in the sec-tion on towing (� page 540).

282

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Vehicles without enhanced Off-road Package*


1 Vehicle level switch2 Indicator lamp

Basic settings

The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected using the vehicle level switch in the center console:

The following is the approximate change in ride height for each of the level settings:

Level Driving situation

Raised For off-road driving or driv-ing in rough terrain. The in-dicator lamp is on.

Highway For driving on paved roads in fair or better condition. The indicator lamp is off.

i The third available level is the high-speed level that is set automatically.

Level Ride height

Raised + 3.1 in (80 mm)

Highway +/- 0 in (0 mm)

High-speed - 0.6 in (-15 mm)

i Vehicles with ADS*:Depending on the ADS setting (� page 280), the vehicle will be lowered to the high-speed level when traveling at higher speeds. At speeds below 40 mph (64 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned to the highway level.

i The high-speed level is not available if tow-ing a trailer. For more information on towing a trailer, see “Trailer towing” (� page 366).

283

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Raised level

Only select the raised level if appropriate for the driving situation encountered.Otherwise:

� fuel consumption may increase

� handling characteristics of the vehicle may be unfavorable


If indicator lamp 2 (� page 283) is off.


Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle adjusts to the raised level.

The following message appears in the mul-tifunction display while the level is being set:

When the raised level is reached, indicator lamp 2 (� page 283) comes on continu-ously and the following message appears in the multifunction display for 5 seconds:

Highway level


If indicator lamp 2 (� page 283) is on.


Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle adjusts to the highway level.

The following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set:

i You can select the raised level at speeds up to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds, the message n Level selection not permitted appears in the multifunction dis-play.

i The message can be cleared by pressing the è ÿ k or button j on the multifunction steering wheel.

! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the road and result in damage to the vehicle un-derbody. Always make sure the vehicle has suffi-cient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level.

284

Controls in detail

Driving systems

When the highway level is reached, indica-tor lamp 2 (� page 283) goes out. The following message appears in the multi-function display for 5 seconds:

Vehicles with enhanced Off-road Package*


1 Rotatable outer adjustment ring2 Set higher vehicle level3 Indicator lamps4 Set lower vehicle level

Basic settings

The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected using the vehicle level switch in the center console:


i The vehicle is lowered automatically to the highway level if:

� the vehicle speed is above 55 mph (88 km/h)

� the speed stays between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 55 mph (88 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds

Level Driving situation

Off-road 3 For slow driving on rough terrain. Lower, middle and upper indi-cator lamps are on.

Off-road 2 Off-road driving. Lower and middle indicator lamps are on.

Off-road 1 For driving on easy ter-rain. Lower indicator lamp is on.

Highway For normal driving. In-dicator lamps are off.

i Another available level is the high-speed level that is set automatically.

285

Controls in detail

Driving systems

The following is the approximate change in ride height for each of the level settings:

You can only select the off-road levels be-low a certain speed. At higher speeds, the message Level selection not permitted appears in the multifunction display.

You can select

� Off-road level 1: selectable below 60 mph (96 km/h)



Off-road levels

Level Ride height

Off-road 3 + 4.3 in (110 mm)

Off-road 2 + 3.1 in (80 mm)

Off-road 1 + 1.2 in (30 mm)

Highway +/- 0 in (0 mm)

High-speed - 0.6 in (-15 mm)

i Vehicles with ADS*:Depending on the ADS setting (� page 280), the vehicle will be lowered to the high-speed level when traveling at higher speeds. At speeds be-low 40 mph (64 km/h) at the latest, it will be re-turned to the highway level.

i The high-speed level is not available if tow-ing a trailer. For more information on towing a trailer, see “Trailer towing” (� page 366).

Warning! G

Vehicle off-road level 3 is not intended for use on paved roads. This vehicle level is only intended for driving on rough terrain under special requirements.

� Only select off-road level 3 if you are driving on rough terrain under especially difficult conditions.

� Adapt your driving style to the modified conditions.

� Do not exceed a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h).

� Avoid extreme, quick steering move-ments.

� Keep in mind that the vehicle’s driving characteristics are modified.

You should therefore drive in off-road level 3 with particular caution as it could otherwise lead to an accident and/or serious injury to you or others.

286

Controls in detail

Driving systems

If you are driving too fast while using off-road level 3, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:

� Reduce speed tounder 20 mph (30 km/h)

Additional an acoustic signal sounds.

Only use the off-road levels when neces-sary.Otherwise:

� fuel consumption may increase

� handling characteristics of the vehicle may be unfavorable


� Turn outer adjustment ring 1 (� page 285) repeatedly until indicator lamp 3 (� page 285) of the desired level flashes.

� Off-road level 1, lower indicator lamp flashes

� Off-road level 2, lower and middle indicator lamps flashes

� Off-road level 3, lower, middle and upper indicator lamps flashes

The vehicle adjusts to the correspond-ing off-road level.

For example, the following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set:

The vehicle is raised from off-road level 1 to off-road level 2.

When the off-road level 2 is reached, the following message appears in the multi-function display for 5 seconds:

The lower and middle indicator lamps 3 (� page 285) comes on continuously.

While the vehicle is adjusting from off-road level 2 to off-road level 3, you will see, for example, the following message in the multifunction display:

i This message cannot be deactivated.

For more information, see “Display messages” (� page 492).


��

287

Controls in detail

Driving systems

�
Once off-road level 3 is reached, you will see, for example, the following message in the multifunction display:
If you drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) for a short period while using off-road level 3, the following message appears in the multifunction display:

Off-road level 3 is canceled.

� If you continue to increase your speed, the message remains in the multifunc-tion display.

The new level will not be shown until the vehicle has been able to adjust to a level appropriate for the speed at which you are currently driving.

� If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will see, for example, the following message in the multifunction display while the vehicle is lowering:

The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2.

Once off-road level 2 is reached, you will see, for example, the following message in the multifunction display:

While driving, the vehicle is automatically lowered as follows:

� At speeds above 55 mph (88 km/h) or if the speed lies between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 55 mph (88 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds, the off-road level 2 setting is canceled and the vehicle is lowered to the off-road level 1.

i The message Max. 20 mph reminds you of the maximum permissible driving speed with off-road level 3.

�

288

Controls in detail

Driving systems

You will see, for example, the following message in the multifunction display:

� At speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h) the off-road level 1 setting is canceled and the vehicle is lowered to the high-way level.

You will see, for example, the following message in the multifunction display:

� Depending on the ADS setting (� page 280), the vehicle will be low-ered to the high-speed level when trav-eling at higher speeds. At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned to the highway level.

Highway level


If one or more of the indicator lamps (� page 283) are on:

� Press switch 2 (� page 285) repeatedly until all lit indicator lamps 3 flash.

The vehicle adjusts to the highway level.

The following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set:

i The setting is stored when you turn off the engine.

! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the road and result in damage to the vehicle un-derbody. Always make sure the vehicle has suffi-cient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level.


289

Controls in detail

Driving systems

When the highway level is reached, the in-dicator lamps 3 (� page 283) goes out. The following message appears in the mul-tifunction display for 5 seconds:

Parktronic system*

The Parktronic system is an electronic parking aid and designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.

The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you

� switch on the ignition or start the engine

and

� release the parking brake

and

� set the automatic transmission to position D, R, or N

i The vehicle is lowered automatically to the highway level if the vehicle speed is above 60 mph (96 km/h).

Warning! G

Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always remains with the driver.

Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle.

The operational function of the Parktronic system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice. See “Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors” (� page 430).

Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.

Warning! G

Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them.

290

Controls in detail

Driving systems

The Parktronic system deactivates at vehicle speeds exceeding approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower vehicle speeds the Parktronic system turns on again.

The Parktronic system also deactivates when you set the automatic transmission to position P or depress the parking brake pedal.

The Parktronic system monitors the sur-roundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

1 Sensors in the front bumper

Range of the sensors

To function properly, the sensors must be free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors regularly, being careful not to scratch or damaging the sensors, see “Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors” (� page 430).

! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result.

Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or the air brakes of trucks) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system.

291

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Front sensors

Rear sensors

Minimum distance

If the system detects an obstacle in this range, all the distance warning segments illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system.

Warning indicators

Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-ative distance between the sensors and an obstacle. The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard. The warning indi-cator for the rear area is located in the rear passenger compartment under the roof.

Front area warning indicator

1 Left side of the vehicle2 Right side of the vehicle3 Readiness indicators

Each warning indicator is divided into five yellow and two red distance segments for either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system is operational when the readiness indicators 3 are illuminated.

The current transmission position deter-mines which warning indicator will be acti-vated.

Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)

Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)





Automatic trans-mission position

Warning indicator

D Front area activated

R or N Front and rear area activated

P Neither activated

292

Controls in detail

Driving systems

As your vehicle approaches an object, one or more distance segments will illuminate, depending on the distance. When the seventh red distance segment illuminates, you have reached the minimum distance.

� Front area: An intermittent acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red distance segment. The signal is canceled when the automatic transmission is set to position P, or the parking brake is set.

� Rear area: An intermittent acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red distance segment. The signal is canceled when the automatic transmission is set to position D, P, or the parking brake is set.

Switching the Parktronic system* on/off

You can switch off the Parktronic system manually.

The Parktronic switch is located on the upper part of the center console.


1 Parktronic switch2 Indicator lamp


1 Parktronic switch2 Indicator lamp

293

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Switching off

� Press Parktronic switch 1.

Indicator lamp 2 comes on.

Switching on

� Press Parktronic switch 1 once more.

Indicator lamp 2 goes out.

Parktronic system* malfunction

If only the red distance segments illumi-nate and an acoustic warning sounds, there is a malfunction in the Parktronic system. The Parktronic system will auto-matically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on.

� Have the Parktronic system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

If only the red distance segments illumi-nate and no acoustic warning sounds, the Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. slush, snow or ice) or there is an interfer-ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or the air brakes of trucks). The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on.


� Clean the Parktronic system sensors (� page 430).


or

� Check the Parktronic system operation at another location to rule out interfer-ence from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.i The Parktronic system switches on

automatically when you switch on the ignition (� page 42).

Vehicles with original equipment Mercedes-Benz Trailer Hitch Kit:The rear Parktronic sensor will automatically disengage when towing a trailer.

294

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Rear view camera*

Warning! G

The rear view camera is only an aid and may display obstacles from a distorted perspec-tive or inaccurately, or may not display ob-stacles at all. The rear view camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to be cau-tious, take care and pay careful attention. The rear view camera may not show objects which are:

� very close to the rear bumper

� under the rear bumper

� above the tailgate handle

You are responsible for safety at all times and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This includes the area behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. Otherwise you could endanger yourself or others.

Warning! G

Make sure that no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be injured.

Warning! G

The rear view camera either will not function or will not function to its full capability if:

� the tailgate is open

� it is raining very hard, snowing or foggy

� it is night or you are parking/maneuver-ing your vehicle in an area where it is very dark

� the camera is exposed to a very bright white light

� the immediate surroundings are illumi-nated with fluorescent light (the display may flicker)

� there is a sudden change in tempera-ture, e.g. if you drive into a heated ga-rage from the cold (lens condensation)

� the camera lens is dirty or covered

� the rear of your vehicle is damaged

In this case, have the position and set-ting of the camera checked by a quali-fied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for this purpose.

Do not use the rear view camera in these sit-uations. Otherwise you could injure yourself or others and/or damage property including your vehicle while parking/maneuvering.

295

Controls in detail

Driving systems

The rear view camera is an optical parking aid. It shows you the area behind the vehi-cle in the COMAND system display when reverse gear R is engaged, for example during parallel parking.

The rear view camera is located near the tailgate handle.

1 Rear view camera

Switching the rear view camera on and off


� Shift the automatic transmission in position R (� page 194).

The area behind the vehicle appears in the COMAND system display.

� Shift the automatic transmission into P, N or D to switch off the rear view camera.

i The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND system display as a mirror image, like in the rear view mirror.

i The image from the rear view camera will no longer be displayed if you select another function on the COMAND system while reverse gear R is engaged. To display the image again, disengage and reengage reverse gear R.

296

Controls in detail

Loading

�
Loading Carriers*
Roof rails

Basic cross bars*

The maximum roof load (� page 559) of any add-on roof equipment is reduced by the unladen weight of the basic cross bars (13.7 Ibs/6.2 kg).

Four keys and an Allen wrench required for installing and removing are included with the basic cross bars.

Warning! G

Only use carriers* when the basic cross bars have been completely mounted. The left and right roof rails are only stabilized by means of the basic cross bars mounted.

Follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Otherwise, an improperly at-tached roof rack system or its load could be-come detached from the vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum roof load of 198 lb (90 kg).

Take into consideration that when the roof is loaded, the handling characteristics are dif-ferent from those when operating the vehi-cles without a roof loaded.

! Load the carriers* in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.

Make sure

� the tailgate can be completely opened

� the tilt/sliding sunroof can be completely raised at the rear

i The following accessories are available for your Mercedes-Benz:

� Roof Cargo Container – Small, Medium, or Large

� Ski and Snowboard Carrier – Standard

� Ski and Snowboard Carrier – Deluxe (Only in connection with corresponding adapter.)

For more information on Mercedes-Benz acces-sories, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i The keys and the Allen wrench are stored with the vehicle tool kit under the cargo compart-ment floor (� page 495).

297

Controls in detail

Loading

Installing the basic cross bars

i Spare parts are available as Mercedes-Benz accessories. Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Please follow these installation instructions carefully. Caution should be exercised to avoid damage to the vehicle while installing the basic cross bars. Also, be careful not to injure yourself or others while installing and adjusting the basic cross bars or loading items on them.

Each individual step of the installation in-structions, the warning notices, the general safety precautions and the instructions for use must be followed exactly. If the basic cross bars are not mounted correctly, they and the objects attached to them could come loose from your vehicle and cause an

accident, thereby injuring you and other per-sons and/or causing damage to property, including damage to your vehicle.

Warning! G

Every time the basic cross bars are mount-ed, before you set off on a journey and peri-odically during longer journeys, check all the screws on the bars to make sure that they are secure, and tighten them if necessary. Repeat these checks at regular intervals as road-surface conditions dictate, and at least after every 1500 miles (2500 km) of contin-uous use.

Otherwise, the basic cross bars, mounted accessories and the objects attached to them could come loose from the vehicle causing an accident, thereby injuring you and other persons and/or causing damage to property, including damage to your vehi-cle.

Do not use lubricant on the screws of the basic cross bars. The screws could work loose and the basic cross bars could be-come detached from your vehicle, together with the objects attached to them causing an accident, thereby injuring you and other persons and/or causing damage to proper-ty, including damage to your vehicle.

Warning! G

Only install the basic cross bars at the exact locations designated on the roof rails. The designated locations for the front basic cross bars are between the markings en-graved on the inside of the roof rails (� page 300). The designated locations for the rear basic cross bars are between the gaps on the roof rails (� page 300).

298

Controls in detail

Loading

Otherwise, the basic cross bars (� page 300), mounted accessories and the objects attached to them could come loose from the vehicle causing an accident, there-by injuring you and other persons and/or causing damage to property, including dam-age to your vehicle.

Warning! G

A roof load creates a greater surface area exposed to the wind and causes the vehicle to have a higher center of gravity, thereby changing the vehicle’s driving characteris-tics. Accordingly, the additional weight on the roof of the vehicle can have a detrimen-tal effect on braking, cornering and acceler-ation.

Never exceed the maximum permissible roof load or the maximum permissible vehi-cle weight, even when accessories for the basic cross bars (e.g. ski racks, bicycle racks, etc.) are being used. Overloading the vehicle could result in an accident. When calculating the weight placed on the roof please make sure to add the weight of the basic cross, accessory racks and the load carried together.

Always adapt your driving style to the road, traffic and weather conditions, and drive with added caution when the roof is loaded.

Always drive with extreme care when the roof rack is loaded. Take into consideration that when the roof rack is loaded, the han-dling characteristics are different from those when operating the vehicles without a roof rack loaded.

Warning! G

Do not use accessories which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz for use in con-junction with these basic cross bars. If non-approved accessories are used, these accessories and/or the objects attached to them could come loose from the vehicle, thereby injuring you and other persons and/or causing damage to property, includ-ing damage to your vehicle.

! Have a second person assist you when installing the basic cross bars. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

! Objects attached to the basic cross bar system’s accessories must not be allowed to restrict the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof. The tilt/sliding sunroof could otherwise be dam-aged when it is raised.

299

Controls in detail

Loading

1 Key2 Cover cap3 Sticker FRONT (or REAR)4 Screw for clamping claw5 Clamping claw

The front and rear basic cross bars are of different lengths. Please pay close atten-tion to stickers 3 FRONT and REAR on the basic cross bars.

� Unlock cover cap 2 with key 1.

� Remove cover cap 2.

Sticker 3 indicating the location, FRONT or REAR, becomes visible.

� Turn screw 4 counterclockwise with the included Allen wrench until clamping claw 5 is wide open.

6 Front basic cross bar7 Rear basic cross bar8 Gaps9 Markingsa Roof rails

� Place front basic cross bar 6 between markings 9 on roof rails a.

4 Screw for clamping claw5 Clamping clawa Roof rail

� Make sure clamping claw 5 lies flush against the inside of roof rail a as shown in the illustration.

If necessary, adjust clamping width of basic cross bars (� page 301).

� Slightly tighten screw 4 on both sides by turning it clockwise.

i Markings 9 are located on the inside of each roof rail, indicated by the white lines in the illustration.

300

Controls in detail

Loading

� Place rear basic cross bar 7 on roof rails a in such a way that the clamping claws reach into gaps 8 (� page 300) on the roof rails.

� Make sure clamping claw 5 lies flush against the inside of roof rail a as shown in the illustration (� page 300).

If necessary, adjust clamping width of basic cross bars (� page 301).

� Slightly tighten screw 4 on both sides by turning it clockwise.

� On the front and rear basic cross bars tighten screws 4. Observe a tightening torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).

� Attach cover caps (� page 300) and lock them.

� Store key and Allen wrench back into the storage well (� page 495).

Adjusting the clamping widths of the basic cross bars

The clamping widths of the basic cross bars are factory set for your vehicle. These clamping widths are solely intended for the designated positions.

Only install the basic cross bars at the des-ignated locations and pay attention to the stickers 3 FRONT and REAR (� page 300).

4 Screw for clamping claw5 Clamping clawb Screws for adjusting clamping width

(2 in total for each side)c Cover strip

Warning! G

Have the tightening torque checked after mounting the basic cross bars. The screws could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).

Warning! G

Only install the basic cross bars at the exact locations designated on the roof rails. The designated locations for the front basic cross bars are between the markings en-graved on the inside of the roof rails (� page 300). The designated locations for the rear basic cross bars are between the gaps on the roof rails (� page 300).

Otherwise, the basic cross bars (� page 300), mounted accessories and the objects attached to them could come loose from the vehicle causing an accident, there-by injuring you and other persons and/or causing damage to property, including dam-age to your vehicle. ��

301

Controls in detail

Loading

�
� Pull cover strip c out of groove until you see screws b on each end of the basic cross bar.
� Turn screws b on both sides counter-clockwise approximately 2 rotations.

� Place the basic cross bar at designated locations (� page 300) on roof rails.

� On both sides, make sure the clamping claws 5 lie flush against the roof rails. If necessary pull out or push in the clamping claws 5.

� Tighten screws b. Observe a tightening torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).

The width of the clamping claws is correctly adjusted.

� Press cover strip c piece by piece into groove of basic cross bar.

� Install the basic cross bars as described (� page 300).

Removing the basic cross bars

1 Key2 Cover cap3 Sticker FRONT (or REAR)4 Screw for clamping claw5 Clamping claw

� Unlock cover cap 2 with key 1.

� Remove cover cap 2.

� Turn screws for clamping claws 5 counterclockwise until the basic cross bars can be lifted from the roof rails.

Shortening the cover strip

The cover strips reduce the wind noise caused by the basic cross bars. In order to install add-on roof equipment, it may be necessary to shorten the cover strips.

c Cover strip

� Pull cover strip c out of groove.

�

302

Controls in detail

Loading

� Attach add-on roof equipment to the basic cross bars.

� Place cover strip c flush against the add-on roof equipment, and mark the end of basic cross bar on cover strip.

� Cut off cover strip c at marked loca-tion.

� Press cover strip c piece by piece into groove of the basic cross bar.

Loading instructions

Load distribution

i Cover strips are available as Mercedes-Benz accessories. Contact your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Always fasten items being carried as secure-ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.

In an accident, during hard braking or sud-den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and can cause in-jury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

To help avoid personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden maneuver, always use tie down rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo net* when transporting cargo.

Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon-sciousness and death.

303

Controls in detail

Loading

The gross vehicle weight which is the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, pas-sengers and luggage/cargo must never exceed the load limit and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle as specified on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 550). In addi-tion, the load must be distributed in such a way so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indi-cated on the certification label which can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 550).

For more information, see “Tire and Load-ing Information” (� page 389).

The handling characteristics of a fully load-ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-tribution. It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustra-tions shown, with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle.

Please pay attention to and comply with the following instructions when loading the vehicle and transporting cargo:

� Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possi-ble.

� The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possi-ble against front or rear seat backrests.

For additional safety when transporting cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into the opposite side buckles.

Cargo tie-down rings

Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo tie-down rings.

Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.

i The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. The expanded cargo com-partment (� page 306) should only be used for items which do not fit in the cargo compartment alone.

i While the cargo net* (� page 313) will help protect you from smaller objects, it cannot pre-vent the movement of large, heavier objects into the passenger compartment in an accident, dur-ing hard braking or sudden maneuvers. Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.

304

Controls in detail

Loading

Cargo compartment

Four cargo tie-down rings are located in the cargo compartment.

1 Cargo tie-down ring

Second seat-row

Two cargo tie-down rings are located in the footwell behind the driver’s and passenger seat.


Third seat-row

Two cargo tie-down rings are located be-hind the third-row seat backrest.

For information on how to fold the third-row seats, see “Expanding cargo compartment” (� page 306).


The maximum permissible weight per cargo tie-down ring is 331 lb (150 kg).

305

Controls in detail

Loading

Hooks

Two hooks are located on the rear com-partment trim panels, one on each side.

1 Hook

Use the hooks to secure light weight items only. The maximum permissible weight per hook is 9 lb (4 kg).

Expanding cargo compartment

You can separately fold the left and right rear seat backrests to expand the cargo compartment.

Warning! G

When expanding the cargo compartment, always fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so equipped, always use the cargo net* (� page 313) when transporting cargo.

Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-rests must remain properly locked in the up-right position.

In an accident, during hard braking or sud-den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

Always use the cargo tie down rings (� page 304).

Warning! G

Never drive the vehicle with the tailgate open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in un-consciousness and death.

! When the second-row seats are folded for-ward, the front seats may not be moved to the rearmost position. Otherwise you could damage the front and second-row seats.

306

Controls in detail

Loading

Expanding cargo compartment in part

Folding third-row seats, electrically

There are several ways to fold the third-row seats.

Two buttons are located on the right side trim of the third-row seats.

Example, button for the left third-row seat

1 Button for returning third-row seats to upright position

2 Button for folding the third-row seats

Two buttons are located on the passenger-side in the cargo compartment

Example, button for the right third-row seat



� Push in the head restraints of the third-row seats all the way (� page 137).

� Remove cargo compartment cover blind (� page 312).

i Use the left button, indicated by L, to fold down the left third-row seat.

Use the right button, indicated by R, to fold down the right third-row seat.

i It is only possible to fold the third-row seats down when the rear right door is open.

i It is only possible to fold the third-row seats down when the tailgate is open.

��

307

Controls in detail

Loading

�
� Press and hold button 2 for each side until the third-row seats are fully fold-ed.
If a third-row seat is not engaged properly, for example, the message 3rd row of seats, Right not locked appears in the multifunction display (� page 157).

� Press and hold button 2 again, until the message disappears.

Expanding cargo compartment fully

Folding second-row seats

� Push in the head restraints of the second-row seats all the way (� page 137).

Warning! G

Folded second-row seats are intended to serve as a cargo compartment expansion in conjunction with folded third-row seats only. Do not fold the second-row seats and allow third-row seat occupants to use folded sec-ond-row seats as a footrest while driving. Third-row seat occupants must, like all vehi-cle occupants, keep both feet on the floor in front of their seat. Otherwise, occupants could slide under their seat belt in a colli-sion. If occupants slide under the belt, it would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal inju-ries. Do not fold the second-row seats and allow third-row seat occupants to use folded second-row seats as a table while driving.

Objects placed on folded second-row seats may come loose during braking, vehicle ma-neuvers, or an accident and be thrown around the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around the vehicle interior may cause an ac-cident and/or serious personal injury.

! When the second-row seats are folded for-ward, the front seats may not be moved to the re-armost position. Otherwise you could damage the front and second-row seats.

�

308

Controls in detail

Loading

1 Strap2 Seat cushion

� Pull strap 1 in direction of arrow.

� Fold seat cushion 2 forward.

3 Lever

� Pull and hold lever 3 in direction of arrow at resistance point.

The seat backrest folds down.

� Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrest.

309

Controls in detail

Loading

Folding third-row seats, electrically

There are several ways to fold the third-row seats.

Two buttons are located on the right side trim of the third-row seats.

Example, button for the left third-row seat



Two buttons are located on the passenger-side in the cargo compartment

Example, button for the right third-row seat



� Push in the head restraints of the third-row seats all the way (� page 137).

� Remove cargo compartment cover blind (� page 312).

� Press and hold button 2 for each side until the third-row seats are fully fold-ed.

The cargo compartment is fully extend-ed.

If a third-row seat is not engaged properly, for example, the message 3rd row of seats, right not locked appears in the multifunction display (� page 157).

� Press and hold button 2 again, until the message disappears.

i Use the left button, indicated by L, to fold down the left third-row seat.

Use the right button, indicated by R, to fold down the right third-row seat.

i It is only possible to fold the third-row seats down when the rear right door is open.

i It is only possible to fold the third-row seats down when the tailgate is open.

310

Controls in detail

Loading

Returning seats to their original position Step 1:

� Return third-row seats to its original position (� page 310).

Step 2:

1 Seat backrest2 Lever

� Pull and hold lever 2 in direction of arrow at resistance point.

� Fold seat backrest 1 rearward until it engages.

� Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on seat backrest 1.

3 Seat cushion

� Fold seat cushion 3 rearward until it locks into position.

Warning! G

Make sure all seats are properly locked in position before driving off. Do not drive with seats not properly locked.

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat not properly locked as this can be danger-ous. The seat could move forward and the seat backrest could fold. You could slide un-der the seat belt during braking, vehicle ma-neuvers, or in an accident. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fa-tal injuries.

The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly po-sitioned on the body.

311

Controls in detail

Loading

Cargo compartment cover blind

The cargo compartment cover blind can be installed behind the third-row seats or the second-row seats.

Blind installed behind third-row seats

1 Handle2 Mount

Rolling out blind

� Pull blind on handle 1 across the car-go compartment.

� Guide blind into mounts 2 and re-lease.

Rolling up blind

� Disengage blind and guide retraction by its handle 1.

Removing blind

Blind installed behind second-row seats

1 Release button2 Blind

� Roll the blind up (� page 312).

� Push release button 1.

! With the cargo compartment cover blind in-stalled, do not pile luggage higher than the lower edges of the rear side windows.

i Before removing cargo compartment cover blind behind the third-row seats, fold the left or right third-row seat forward (� page 307). After-wards, return the left or right third-row seat into its original position.

312

Controls in detail

Loading

� Pull blind 2 to the left against the spring pressure until the spring in the cover audibly engages.

� Remove the blind.

Installing blind

Cover from the mounts behind second-row seats

3 Cover

� Press on cover 3 at its upper edge as indicated by arrow.

� Remove cover 3 by pulling its lower edge out of the side trim.

� Place left side of blind 2 (� page 312) in left mount.

� Position right side of blind 2 over right mount.

� Press release button 1 (� page 312) and guide cover 2 into mount.

� Make sure the cargo compartment cover blind is securely fastened.

Cargo net*

i Before installing cargo compartment cover blind behind the second-row seats, fold the third-row seats forward (� page 307).

i Before installing cargo compartment cover blind behind the third-row seats, fold the left or right third-row seat forward (� page 307). After-wards, return the left or right third-row seat into its original position.

i To avoid loss of the mount covers, insert the mount covers into the mounts currently not in use.

Warning! G

Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged top and bottom position and the tightening belts are securely fastened.

Never use a damaged cargo net.

To help avoid personal injury from smaller objects being thrown around in the occu-pant compartment during a collision or sud-den maneuver, always use cargo net when transporting cargo.

The cargo net cannot prevent the movement of large, heavier objects into the passenger compartment in an accident. Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie-down rings (� page 304) in the cargo compartment floor.

Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo net is restricted because of the footwell being taken up by the net.

313

Controls in detail

Loading

Use of the cargo net is a particularly impor-tant safety factor when the vehicle is load-ed higher than the top of the seat backrests with smaller objects. For your safety, always use the cargo net when transporting cargo.

The cargo net can be installed in two locations:

1 Holder in B-pillar2 Holder in C-pillar

� With the cargo compartment expanded in part (� page 307), use holders above C-pillars 2 and the cargo tie-down rings behind the third-row seat backrest (� page 305).

� With the cargo compartment fully ex-panded (� page 308), use holders above B-pillars 1 and the cargo tie-down rings in the second-row foot-well (� page 305).

� Open the zipper on the cargo net pack-age.

� Roll out the cargo net.

� Unfold the cargo net.

The cargo net bars must audibly engage.

Installing the cargo net

Cargo net bar hung up behind the B-pillar

1 Holder2 Cargo net bar

� Hang cargo net bar 2 on holder 1 as indicated by the arrow.

� Push cargo net bar 2 forward into holder 1 in direction of arrow.

314

Controls in detail

Loading

Pulling the cargo net tight

Belt hook attached in the second-row foot-well

1 Belt hook2 Cargo tie-down ring3 Tightening belt

� Hook belt hook 1 into cargo tie-down ring 2 in direction of arrow.

� Pull tightening belt 3 by the loose end in direction of arrow until the cargo net is pulled tight.

� After driving a short distance, make sure the cargo net is still tight and, if necessary, pull it tight again.

Loosening the cargo net

Belt hook attached in the second-row foot-well

1 Buckle2 Belt hook3 Cargo tie-down ring

� Loosen the tightening belt by pulling buckle 1 upward in direction of arrow.

� Remove belt hook 2 from cargo tie-down ring 3.

Removing and storing the cargo net

� Take cargo net bar 2 out of holder 1, see “Installing the cargo net” (� page 314).

� Press the red button on the upper and lower cargo net bar.

� Fold the cargo net.

� Roll up the cargo net.

� Close the zipper on the cargo net pack-age.

315

Controls in detail

Useful features

Storage compartments Glove box/CD changer

1 Glove box lid release2 Glove box lid

Opening the glove box

� Pull lid release 1 in direction of arrow.

Glove box lid 2 opens downward.

Closing the glove box

� Push glove box lid 2 up to close.

Releasing CD changer

1 Release button2 AUX-socket (Vehicles without Rear

Seat Entertainment System*)3 CD changer

� Open the glove box (� page 316).

� Press release button 1.

CD changer 3 is released and swings down automatically.

For information on CD changer operation, see separate COMAND system operating instructions.

Warning! G

To help avoid personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.

If so equipped, always use the cargo net* when transporting cargo. The cargo net* cannot secure hard or heavy objects.

Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob-jects.

Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during

� braking

� vehicle maneuvers

� an accident

316

Controls in detail

Useful features

Closing CD changer

1 CD changer

� Gently push CD changer 1 up in direc-tion of arrow until it engages.

For information on CD changer operation, see separate COMAND system operating instructions.

Locking and unlocking the glove box separately

You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the shop for service.

� Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (� page 500).

1 Unlocking glove box2 Locking glove box

� Insert mechanical key into glove box lock.

� Turn mechanical key to position 2 to lock the glove box.

� Turn mechanical key to position 1 to unlock the glove box.

i The glove box can only be locked or unlocked with the mechanical key.

317

Controls in detail

Useful features

Storage compartment in front center console

Vehicles without ashtray*

� Briefly press the front of the cover.

The cover opens automatically.

Storage compartment* (depending on vehicle configuration)

� Briefly press the front of the cover.

The cover opens automatically.

Storage compartment/telephone* tray under front center armrest

The storage compartment and the telephone* tray can be opened separately.

1 Button to open telephone* tray2 Button to open storage compartment

i The mobile phone cradle* (� page 330), the Roadside Assistance button • (� page 336) and the information button ¡ (� page 337) are located in the telephone* tray.

318

Controls in detail

Useful features

3 Storage compartment4 Coin holder

Opening the telephone* tray

� Pull button 1 and lift up armrest.

Opening the storage compartment

� Pull button 2 and lift up armrest.

The coin holders 4 are located in front of storage compartment 3.

Rear storage compartments

Depending on the vehicle configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with three storage compartments in the front of the rear seats.

1 Storage compartment cover2 Release button

� Briefly press release button 2 on storage compartment cover 1.

The storage compartment opens automatically.i Depending on vehicle equipment, the upper

storage compartment may be replaced by a control panel, for example in vehicles with rear climate control* (� page 228) or rear automatic climate control* (� page 243).

i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking package*, the storage compartment contains an ashtray (� page 323).

319

Controls in detail

Useful features

Parcel nets Parcel net in front passenger footwell

A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell. It is intend-ed for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc.

1 Parcel net

Parcel nets on front seat backrests

A small convenience parcel net is located on each of the front seat backrests. It is in-tended for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc.

1 Parcel net

Warning! G

Do not place objects with a combined weight of more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into the parcel net on the back of the front passen-ger seat. Otherwise, the Occupant Classifi-cation System* OCS (� page 81) may not be able to properly approximate the occu-pant weight category.

Parcel nets are intended for storing light-weight items only.

Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel nets. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants.

Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident.

320

Controls in detail

Useful features

Cup holders

Cup holder in front of armrest

A cup holder and a card/ticket holder are located in the front center console.

1 Cup holder

Cup holder in rear armrest (second-row seats)

1 Cup holder

� Pull the armrest down by its top.

Warning! G

In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-ment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu-pants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

When not in use, keep rear cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-dent.

Keep in mind that objects placed in a cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-or may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

i The front cup holder can be removed for cleaning purposes (� page 322).

! Close the cup holder before folding the arm-rest upwards.

321

Controls in detail

Useful features

Cup holders in third-row side trim

Cup holders are located in the side trims of the third-row seats.

1 Cup holder

Removing and reinstalling cup holder

The front cup holder can be removed for cleaning purposes.

1 Cup holder2 Bridge with card, ticket holder

� Hold cup holder at its bridge 2 and pull out bridge in direction of arrow.

� Pull cup holder 1 out in direction of ar-row.

� First, insert the cup holder 1 and then insert bridge 2.

Ashtrays*

Your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray and a cigarette lighter (� page 324) locat-ed in the front center console and an ash-tray located in front of the second-row seats (� page 323).

Ashtray in the center console

1 Ashtray insert2 Cover plate

i If your vehicle is not equipped with a smok-ing package*, it has a storage compartment (� page 318) with a power outlet (� page 325) instead.

322

Controls in detail

Useful features

Opening the ashtray

� Briefly touch cover plate 2.

The ashtray opens automatically.

Removing ashtray insert

� Grip the ashtray insert 1 on the sides and pull it out upwards.

Reinstalling ashtray insert

� Install ashtray insert 1.

� Close ashtray cover plate 2.

Rear center console ashtray (second-row)

1 Ashtray2 Ashtray cover

Opening rear ashtray

� Briefly press ashtray cover 2.

The ashtray 1 opens automatically.

Removing rear ashtray insert

� Grip the insert on the sides and pull it out upwards.

Reinstalling rear ashtray insert

� Install ashtray insert.

� Close the ashtray.

Cigarette lighter


� Push in cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-matically when hot.

Warning! G

Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Set automatic transmis-sion to P. With the automatic transmission set to P, turn off the engine.

! Close the ashtray when not in use and be-fore folding the second-row seats

323

Controls in detail

Useful features

Cigarette lighter*


1 Cigarette lighter

� Open the ashtray (� page 323).

� Push in cigarette lighter 1.

The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-matically when hot.

Warning! G

Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only.

Make sure that any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter.

When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

! The lighter socket can accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of 180 W) designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, how-ever, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit prop-erly) can damage the lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) posi-tion, or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough.

To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec-trical accessories designed for use with the stan-dard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V power outlets (� page 325) in your vehicle whenever possible.

i If the engine is off, and the cigarette lighter is being used extensively, the vehicle battery may become discharged.

324

Controls in detail

Useful features

Power outlets Power outlets are located

� in the front center console (� page 325)

� in the front passenger footwell (� page 325)

� in the second-row footwell (� page 326)

� on the left-hand side of the cargo com-partment (� page 326)

Power outlet in front center console

1 Power outlet cover


� Open cover plate (� page 318).

� Pull out cover 1 and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).

Power outlet in front passenger footwell


� Flip up cover and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).

! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle, make sure that the maximum current drawn does not exceed 55 A.

i The power outlets can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (e.g. auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 240 W.

If the engine is off, the battery may become dis-charged if used for long periods of time.

i You can use the power outlets, except for the power outlet in the front center console, even if the ignition is switched off.

An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the vehicle’s electrical voltage does not fall below a minimum level. If the voltage drops to this mini-mum level, the power outlets are automatically switched off. This ensures that enough power re-mains to start the engine.

i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking package*, the storage compartment contains an ashtray with cigarette lighter (� page 324) in-stead.

325

Controls in detail

Useful features

Power outlet in second-row footwell



Power outlet in cargo compartment



Floormats*

Warning! G

Whenever you are using floormats, make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened.

Floormats should always be securely fas-tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1 (� page 327).

Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if nec-essary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals.

Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal move-ment.

i To install or remove the floormat more easi-ly, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible (� page 46).

326

Controls in detail

Useful features

1 Retainer pin2 Eyelet

Removing

� Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1.

� Remove the floormat.

Installing

� Lay down the floormat in the respective footwell.

� Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re-tainer pins 1.

Seat cover under third-row seats

If something falls under the third-row seats, you can remove the seat cover in order to reach under the seats.

Removing seat cover

Example passenger side

� Fold the respective seat halfway in or out (� page 307).

� Reach into the recess in the seat cover.

� Pull the seat cover in the direction of the arrow.

Remove the seat cover to reach under the seats.

Installing seat cover

� Fold the seat halfway in or out (� page 307).

� Put the seat cover back into place using the guide pins.

� Press the seat cover down until it engages.

� Make sure that the seat cover is engaged properly by folding the seat all the way in and out.

327

Controls in detail

Useful features

Heated steering wheel*

The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel.

The stalk is on the lower left-hand side of the steering wheel.

1 Switching on2 Indicator lamp3 Switching off

Switching on


� Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow 1.

The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 2 comes on.

Switching off

� Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow 3.

The heated steering wheel is switched off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out.

For information on the steering wheel, see “Multifunction steering wheel” (� page 30).

i The steering wheel heating is turned off tem-porarily and the indicator lamp 2 remains on when

� the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86°F (30°C)

� the temperature of the steering wheel is above 95°F (35°C)

When these conditions do not apply anymore, steering wheel heating continues.

i Indicator lamp 2 flashes or goes out

� in case of power surge or undervoltage

� in case of a steering wheel heating malfunc-tion

i The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, when you switch off the ignition (� page 41) and open the driver’s door.

328

Controls in detail

Useful features

Telephone*

Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-phone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con-nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle.

The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information on the installation of an ap-proved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regard-ing use of an external antenna.

When the mobile phone is inserted in the cradle, you can operate the telephone us-ing the following devices:

� mobile phone keypad

� COMAND system (see separate operat-ing instructions)

� buttons s and t on the multi-function steering wheel (� page 158)

� Voice Control System* (see separate operating instructions)

Please note that these functions are only available with Mercedes-Benz approved mobile phones.

Warning! G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-out being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning! G

Please do not forget that your primary re-sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we rec-ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele-phone call.

If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

Only operate the COMAND system1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.


1 Observe all legal requirements

i Various mobile phone cradles can be in-stalled in the front center armrest, see separate installation instructions for the mobile phone cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

The functions and services available to you while using the mobile phone depend on your service provider and the type of mobile phone you are using. See also separate operating manual for in-structions on how to use your mobile phone.

329

Controls in detail

Useful features

Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information on features available for your mobile phone of choice.

The cradle is located in the front center armrest.

� Open telephone tray (� page 318).

Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone cradle

Once the mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone cradle, you have to use the hands-free device to respond dur-ing phone calls.

� If applicable, remove the cover for the external antenna connection from the back of the mobile phone and store it in a safe place. Be sure to comply with the mobile phone’s operating instructions as well.

Example illustration

1 Insert the mobile phone2 Connector contact3 Mobile phone cradle

� Slide the lower end of the mobile phone into connector contact 2 on cradle 3.

� Push the top of the mobile phone in di-rection of arrow 1, until the lug on the mobile phone release button engages.

The mobile phone is connected to the network via the external antenna.

The mobile phone is linked to the hands-free device and the multifunc-tion steering wheel.

The battery is charged depending on its charge status and the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch. The charge procedure will be indicated in the mobile phone’s display.

You can place or receive phone calls. You can control other functions of the mobile phone via the control system (� page 189), the Voice Control System* (see separate operating instructions), or the COMAND system (see separate oper-ating instructions).

! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the mobile phone cradle.

i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the mobile phone remains switched on for approxi-mately 10 minutes. If you place or receive a call during this time, the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has been completed.

330

Controls in detail

Useful features

Removing mobile phone from mobile phone cradle


1 Release catch for mobile phone2 Mobile phone cradle

� Press release catch in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of mobile phone cradle 2.

Changing mobile phone cradle

If you require a different cradle for your mobile phone, remove the present cradle before installing a new one.

Removing an existing mobile phone cradle


1 To release the mobile phone cradle2 To remove the mobile phone cradle3 Mobile phone cradle

� Press release button in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.

Installing a different mobile phone cra-dle


1 Contact plate2 Recesses3 Mobile phone cradle

� Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into recesses 2 of contact plate 1.

� Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward until it engages.

i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open flip top before removing from the cradle while a call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis-connected.

331

Controls in detail

Useful features

Tele Aid

Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock and more.

The Tele Aid system

(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)

The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response:

� automatic and manual emergency

� roadside assistance

� information

The Tele Aid system is operational provid-ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cel-lular and GPS coverage is available.

The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted by using the volume control on the COMAND system or on the multifunc-tion steering wheel. To raise, turn the rota-ry volume control on COMAND system clockwise or press button æ on the multifunction steering wheel. To lower, turn the rotary volume control on COMAND system control counterclock-wise or press button ç on the multi-function steering wheel.

� To activate, press the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depend-ing on the type of response required.

! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the sub-scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated.

If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

i The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel (� page 34).

The Roadside Assistance button • (� page 336) and the Information button ¡ (� page 337) are located below the center arm-rest cover.

! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle loca-tion. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.

332

Controls in detail

Useful features

System self-check

Initially, after switching on the ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on).

The message Tele Aid – inoperative appears in the multifunction display.

i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the COMAND system audio is muted and the select-ed mode (radio, CD etc.) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed) inserted in cradle switches off. If you must use this phone, we rec-ommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Remove the phone from the cradle and place the call. The naviga-tion* system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use, and spoken commands are only avail-able by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND system. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND system display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. After the TeleAid call has ended, the optional cellular phone inserted in the cradle switches on again. A PIN entry might be necessary.

Warning! G

If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on the Information button remain illuminated continuously in red and/or the message Tele Aid – inoperative is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

333

Controls in detail

Useful features

Emergency calls

An emergency call is initiated automatical-ly following an accident in which the emer-gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.

An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. See (� page 335) for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.

Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp on the SOS button will begin to flash. The message Connecting call appears in the multifunc-tion display. When the connection is estab-lished, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. All in-formation relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehi-cle model, identification number and color are generated.

A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon af-ter the emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.

The Tele Aid system is available if

� it has been activated and is operation-al. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time

� vehicle battery power is available

� the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center

i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos-sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the informa-tion on to the Response Center.

334

Controls in detail

Useful features

Initiating an emergency call manually

1 Cover2 SOS button

� Briefly press on cover 1.

The cover opens.

� Press SOS button 2 briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded.

� Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.

� Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded.

Warning! G

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-vant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds.

Should this occur, assistance must be sum-moned by other means.

Warning! G

If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-tion. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they re-ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occu-pants.

335

Controls in detail

Useful features

Roadside Assistance button •

The Roadside Assistance button • is located below the center armrest cover.

1 Roadside Assistance button •

� Open the storage tray (� page 319).

� Press and hold button 1 (for longer than 2 seconds).

A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display.

When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established.

� Describe the nature of the need for as-sistance.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Manual for more information.

The following is only available in the USA:

� Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable.

i While the call is connected you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system unit.

336

Controls in detail

Useful features

Information button ¡

The Information button ¡ is located below the center armrest cover.

1 Information button ¡

� Open the storage tray (� page 318).

� Press and hold button 1 (for longer than 2 seconds).

A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display.

When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and lo-cation (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab-lished. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and servic-es is available to you.

For more details concerning the Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password (sent to you sep-arately) to learn more (USA only).

i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Informa-tion button ¡).

See system self-check (� page 333) if the indi-cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.

If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-vant cellular phone network was not available). The message Call failed appears in the mul-tifunction display.

Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us-ing the t button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel or the END Button on the COMAND system.

i While the call is connected, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system.

337

Controls in detail

Useful features

Call priority

If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.

Remote door unlock

In case you have locked your vehicle unin-tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:

� Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

You will be asked to provide your pass-word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement.

� Then return to your vehicle and pull the tailgate recessed handle for minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing.

The message Connecting call ap-pears in the multifunction display.

i The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth-er with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •).

See system self-check (� page 333) if the indi-cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.

If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cel-lular phone network is not available). The mes-sage Call failed appears in the multifunction display.

Information calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the END button on the COMAND sys-tem.

! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu-minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.

i The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center repre-sentative, whereas Roadside Assistance and Information calls can also be terminated by pressing button t on the multifunction steering wheel or using the END button on the COMAND system.

! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.

338

Controls in detail

Useful features

As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call.

The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services

In the event your vehicle was stolen:

� Report the incident to the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident report.

� Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service.

The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.

Garage door opener

The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices. It provides a convenient way to re-place up to three hand-held remote con-trols used to operate devices such as garage door openers, gate openers, or oth-er devices compatible with HomeLink® or some other systems.

Before the integrated remote control can be used, it must be programmed to the ga-rage door opener, gate operator or other device you wish to operate. See the follow-ing instructions for programming informa-tion.

i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is avail-able.

The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting call will appear in the multifunc-tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command.

Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist may attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho-rization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tail-gate recessed handle again.

i When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system (� page 111).

339

Controls in detail

Useful features

Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control

1 Indicator lamp

2 3 4 Signal transmitter button

Needed for programming (not part of vehi-cle equipment):

5 Hand-held remote control of ga-rage door opener, gate operator or other device

6 Hand-held remote control but-ton

Programming the integrated remote control

Step 1:


Warning! G

Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po-tential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object – signaling the door to stop and reverse – does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.

When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage.

Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconscious-ness and possible death.

340

Controls in detail

Useful features

Step 2:

� If you have previously programmed a signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3.

If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time, press and hold the two outer signal transmit-ter buttons 2 and 4 and release them only when indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This proce-dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory.

If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and be-gin directly with step 3.

Step 3:

� Hold end of the hand-held remote control 5 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in (5 to 12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping the indica-tor lamp 1 in view.

Step 4:

� Using both hands, simultaneously press hand-held remote control button 6 and the desired signal trans-mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons until step 5 is com-pleted.

Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

Step 5:

� After indicator lamp 1 changes from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, release the hand-held remote control button and the signal transmitter button.

Step 6:

� Press and hold the just-trained signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and observe indicator lamp 1.

If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re-leased.

i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds.

i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature.

341

Controls in detail

Useful features

Step 7:

� To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

Rolling code programming

To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)

Step 8:

� Locate “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.

Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener Operator’s Manual.

Step 9:

� Press the “training” button on the ga-rage door opener motor head unit.

The “training light” is activated.

You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-ing two steps.

Step 10:

� Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-grammed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).

Step 11:

� Press, hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a sec-ond time to complete the training pro-cess.

Step 12:

� Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal trans-mitter button (2, 3 or 4).

Step 13:

� To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

Gate operator/Canadian programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following:

i Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process.

342

Controls in detail

Useful features

Step 4:

� Press and hold the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release this button until it has been successful-ly trained.

� While still holding down the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle” your hand-held remote control button 6 as follows: Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, and again press and hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se-quence on the hand-held remote con-trol until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds.

� Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete.

Reprogramming a single signal trans-mitter button

To program a device using a signal trans-mitter button previously trained, follow these steps:


� Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button.

� Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af-ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3.

Operation of integrated remote control


� Select and press the appropriate inte-grated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote con-trolled device.

The integrated remote control trans-mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.

Erasing the integrated remote control memory


� Simultaneously press and hold outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, until indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.

The codes of all three channels are erased.

i Upon completion of programming the inte-grated remote control, make sure you retain the hand-held remote control that came with the ga-rage door opener, gate operator or other device. You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu-ture programming of an integrated remote con-trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations.

i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels.

343

Controls in detail

Useful features

Programming tips

If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control, here are some helpful tips:

� Check the frequency of hand-held remote control 5 (typically located on the reverse side of the remote). The in-tegrated remote control is compatible with radio-frequency devices operating between 280-390 MHz.

� Put a new battery in hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the likeli-hood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and more accurate sig-nal to the integrated remote control.

� While performing step 3, hold hand-held remote control 5 at differ-ent lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at varying distances.

� If another hand-held remote control is available for the same device, try the programming steps again using that other hand-held remote control. Make sure new batteries are in the hand-held remote control before beginning the procedure.

� Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly. This may help improve transmitting and/or receiving signals.

i Certain types of garage door openers are in-compatible with the integrated remote control. If you should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated remote control, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.









344

Controls in detail

Useful features

Compass

Calling up the compass

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the off-road menu appears in the multifunction display.

The compass displays the direction into which the vehicle is currently trav-eling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.

To make sure the display is correct, the compass must be set to the proper geo-graphic zone (� page 181). It may also be necessary to calibrate the compass (� page 182).

Infrared reflecting windshield*

1 Infrared transparent areas

Your vehicle is equipped with infrared re-flecting glass, which reduces the amount of radiated heat entering the vehicle interi-or through the windows.

The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through the glass by in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g. electronic toll collection devices.

To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, three infrared transparent areas 1 are placed in the windshield.

i The presence of buildings, bridges, power lines and large antenna masts can influence the displayed values. Metallic or magnetic objects in or on the vehicle can influence the accuracy of the compass.

i If the compass is not calibrated or its function is impaired by outside influences, the message Compass - - - appears in the multifunction display.

345

346

347

Operation

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

Driving instructions

At the gas station

Engine compartment

Tires and wheels

Winter driving

Maintenance

Vehicle care

Operation

In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, main-taining and caring for your vehicle.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

348

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satis-fied you will be with its performance later on.

� Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.

� During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear).

� Shift gears in a timely manner.

� Avoid accelerating by kick-down.

� Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever.

� Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (� page 200) only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving).

After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum.

All of the above instructions, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine, the transfer case, the center differential or the rear differential has been replaced.

i Always obey applicable speed limits.

Operation


�
Driving instructions Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.

To save fuel you should:

� Keep tires at the recommended infla-tion pressures.

� Remove unnecessary loads.

� Remove carriers* when not in use.

� Remove the basic cross bars* when not in use.

� Allow engine to warm up under low load use.

� Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

� Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traf-fic, on short trips and in hilly areas.

Drinking and driving

Pedals

Warning! G

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are a very dangerous combina-tion. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Warning! G

Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-structing the pedal’s range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance.

During sudden driving or braking maneu-vers, the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.

349

Operation


Power assistance Brakes

Warning! G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-hicle.

Warning! G

After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa-ter deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat re-duced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.

It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effec-tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-dent.




350

Operation


To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes.

If your brake system is normally only sub-jected to moderate loads, you should occa-sionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads.

Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) (� page 105).

Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.

The brake fluid level in the reservoir may be too low if the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and an acoustic warning sounds although the parking brake is released (� page 437). Observe additional messages in the multi-function display that may appear (� page 472).

Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive

on for some time, rather than immediately park, so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster.

Warning! G

Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.

Warning! G

If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.

! When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.

When using the engine’s braking power, a drive wheel may not spin for an extended period of time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

351

Operation


Parking brake

When driving on wet roads or dirt covered surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into the parking brake. To prevent corrosion and a reduction in the braking power of the parking brake, observe the following:

� From time to time, lightly engage the parking brake before driving off.

� Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Driving off

Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic.

Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the oper-ating temperature has been reached.

Parking

Warning! G

While performing this procedure, please assure that the vehicle is stopped before applying the parking brake. Otherwise the rear wheels could lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged. Make sure not to endanger any other road users when you engage the parking brake.

! When driving off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.

Warning! G


To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

� Keep right foot on brake pedal.

� Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

� Set the automatic transmission to position P.

� Slowly release brake pedal.

� When parked on an incline, turn front wheel towards the road curb.

352

Operation


Tires

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced.

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-atures).

For more information, see “Tires and wheels” (� page 385).

� Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch position 0 and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.

� Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle when leaving.

Warning! G

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flash-ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs.

Warning! G

Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

Warning! G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

353

Operation


Hydroplaning

Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.

Tire traction

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road.

You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point.

Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires (� page 420) with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season to make sure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires.

Stopping distance, however, is still consid-erably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro-priate caution.

Tire speed rating

Regardless of the tire speed rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to pre-vailing conditions.

Warning! G

If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning! G

Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-mum speed rating of the tires.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious injury and possible death, for you and for others.

354

Operation


GL 320 CDI, GL 450

Your vehicle is factory equipped with “H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

GL 450*

Your vehicle is factory equipped with “W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

Winter driving instructions

The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions.

When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift the automatic transmission to position N. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.

Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect.

Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal.

i For information on speed ratings for winter tires, see “Winter tires” (� page 420).

For additional general information on tire speed markings on the tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating” (� page 418).

i For information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains” (� page 421).

Warning! G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-vent this type of control loss.

Do not engage the transfer case in position LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h) vehicle steering is adversely affected by the Off-road – ABS (� page 104).

355

Operation


If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-cy should be tested as soon as possible af-ter driving is resumed.

For more information, see “Winter driving” (� page 420).

Standing water

For more information, see “Driving through water” (� page 362).

Warning! G

Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.

Warning! G

If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-terior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the ve-hicle not facing the wind.

Warning! G

The outside temperature indicator is not de-signed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-dicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.

! Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force wa-ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.

If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the pas-senger compartment or the engine compart-ment.Water in these areas could cause

� damage to electrical components

� wiring of the engine or transmission

or could result

� in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake, causing severe inter-nal engine damage.

Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i Select the raised level (� page 281) before driving through standing water.

356

Operation


Off-road driving Read this chapter carefully before you be-gin off-road travel.

Familiarize yourself with the vehicle char-acteristics and gear changing before you attempt any difficult terrain off-road driv-ing. We recommend that you start out with easy off-road travel.

Warning! G

Do not load items on the basic cross bars*. It may cause instability during some maneu-vers which could result in an accident.

Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will make it easier to recognize unexpected ob-stacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.

To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehi-cle cannot complete the attempted climb, back it down in reverse gear.

Do not drive along the side of a slope. The vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing so the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity (straight up or downhill).

Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle. You may lose control of the vehicle if you use only the service brake. For information on driving downhill, see “Driving downhill” (� page 361).

Warning! G

Sand, dirt, mud and other material having friction property can cause exceptional wear and tear as well as brake failure.

Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that full braking power may not be available in an emergency.

Warning! G

Please be aware that by raising the vehicle level, the center of gravity also rises. There-fore, always ensure that the vehicle level is as low as possible. With higher ride height the ESP® may activate earlier in certain situations.

357

Operation


Special driving features for off-road driving

The following driving features are available for specific kind of operation:

� Off-road – ABS (� page 104)

� Off-road – ESP® (� page 108)

� Off-road – 4-ETS (� page 110)

� Hill start assist system (� page 199)

� LOW RANGE mode* (� page 203)

� Differential locks* (� page 206)

� Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) (� page 275)

� Off-road driving program (Vehicles without enhanced off-road package*) (� page 279)

� Air suspension (� page 280)

Off-road driving rules

� Engage the off-road driving program (� page 279) or LOW RANGE mode* (� page 203) before driving under off-road conditions.

� If necessary, activate differential locks* (� page 206).

� Make sure you select a vehicle level (� page 281) appropriate to the topo-graphical conditions. Always make sure the vehicle has enough ground clearance.

� Fasten items being carried as securely as possible (� page 297).

� Always navigate gradients with the en-gine on and with the transmission en-gaged in a gear. Switch on the DSR (� page 276) to help maintain a preset speed.

! Observe the following during off-road driving:

� Keep doors, tailgate, windows, and tilt/sliding sunroof* closed whenever driving off-road.

� Adjust vehicle speed to condition of terrain. The more uneven, rutty and steeper the ter-rain, the lower the speed should be. Drive through water slowly at an even speed, avoiding a bow wave.

� Be especially careful when driving in un-known territory. It may be necessary to get out of the vehicle and scout the path you in-tend to take.

� Watch out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.

� Before driving through water, determine its depth.

� Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water, and do not shut off the engine.

358

Operation


Checklist before off-road driving

Engine oil level

� Check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick (� page 381).

Only with a proper oil level can the vehicle obtain a trouble-free oil supply, even on steep gradients.

Tires

� Check the tread depth and maintain specified tire inflation pressure (a placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389)).

� Check tires for possible damage and remove foreign objects.

� Replace missing valve caps.

Rims

� Dented or bent rims can cause tire in-flation pressure loss and damage the tire beads. For this reason, check and, if necessary, change rims before driv-ing off-road.

Vehicle tool kit

� Check if the vehicle jack (� page 497) is functional.

� In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a strong tow rope, a shovel and a small plank (to put under the vehicle jack on sandy soil) with you.

� In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as al-lowed by conditions. This helps overcome the vehicle rolling resistance and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the ground.

� Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It interrupts the forward momentum of the vehicle.

� Always drive onto slopes with the engine running and the vehicle in gear.

� Do not shift automatic transmission to position N.

Warning! G

Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure before driving through sand. However, if you do so, remember to correct the tire inflation pressure (� page 396) before continuing your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation pressure increases the risk of losing control of the vehicle and rolling over.

! If the engine oil level warning lamp (� page 476) comes on while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon at is safe to do so. Check the engine oil level (� page 381).

The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

359

Operation


Driving in steep terrain

Slope angle

1 Overhang angle, front2 Overhang angle, rear

� Comply with the warnings (� page 357) and rules for off-road driving (� page 358).

� Driving on embankments, slopes and other steep inclines should only be done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climb-ing ability is a 100% grade which is equivalent to a slope angle of 45 degrees. Keep in mind that the climbing ability of the vehicle depends on terrain conditions.

� Shift automatic transmission to position 1 (� page 200).

� Drive slowly.

� Avoid excessive engine speeds – drive with moderate engine speeds (max. 3000 rpm).

� Utilize the engine’s braking power when descending a slope, observe the engine speed (do not overrev the en-gine). Apply the service brake as need-ed.

� Check the brakes after a lengthy down-grade drive.

Vehicles with air suspension pack-age

1 2

Raised level 34° 28°

Highway 29° 23°


1 2

Off-road-level 3 36° 30°



Highway 29° 23°

i For maximum engine speed, see “Instru-ment cluster” (� page 26) and see “Engine” (� page 553).

Warning! G

Never turn the vehicle around on steep inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb, back it down in reverse gear.

360

Operation


Traction in steep terrain

The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a 100% grade which is equivalent to a slope angle of 45 degrees. Keep in mind that the climbing ability of the vehicle depends on terrain conditions.

Be easy on the accelerator and watch for continuous wheel traction when driving in steep terrain.

Driving across a hilltop

Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not shift automatic transmission to position N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up too much after climbing a hill.

Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive across the hilltop.

After climbing a hill, driving in this manner prevents the vehicle from:

� losing ground contact when cresting hills

� losing its forward momentum

� speeding up too much after climbing the hill

Driving downhill

� Drive slowly.

� Do not drive at an angle to the incline. Steer into the line of gravity and drive with the front wheels pointing straight downhill. Otherwise, the vehicle may slide sideways off the path and roll over.


� On steep inclines, use the Downhill Speed Regulation (� page 275).

� Utilize the engine’s braking power to reduce vehicle speed.

If this is insufficient, apply the brake gently. Make sure the vehicle is moving in the line of gravity.

� Check the brakes after a lengthy down-grade drive.

i The hill start assist system supports you when driving uphill.

For more information, see “Hill start assist sys-tem” (� page 199).

i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out on a steep incline when the front wheels have then the tendency to slip due to the weight shifting towards the rear axle.The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and limits the torque for the front wheels by braking them. Simultaneously the torque for the rear wheels is increased.

i Vehicles with enhanced off-road package* are equipped with automatic locks for the center and rear axle differential to improve vehicle traction.

361

Operation


Driving through water

1 Fording depth

� Before driving through water, deter-mine its depth.

� Select the highest vehicle level possible (� page 281).

� Switch to off-road driving program (� page 279) or LOW RANGE mode* (� page 203) before driving through water.

� Shift automatic transmission to position 1 or 2 (� page 200).

� Avoid high engine speeds.

� Enter and leave the water only at a shallow spot, driving at walking speed.

� Drive through the water slowly and at a constant speed.

i The special Off-road – ABS (� page 104) setting allows for precise and brief (cyclical) blocking of the front wheels, permitting them to dig into loose ground.

Remember that, when stopped, the front wheels slide across a surface and thus lose their ability to steer the vehicle.

Vehicles with air suspension package

1

Raised level 20.00 in (50 cm)


1

Off-road 3 level 23.60 in (60 cm)



! The water depth must not exceed the respective value listed in the table. The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it. Please note that the water level is correspondingly lower for flowing water.

! Never accelerate before driving into the water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.

362

Operation


� Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water, and do not shut off the engine.

� There is a very high level of driving re-sistance in water. The surface is slip-pery and may not be firm, making pulling away in water difficult and dan-gerous.

� Make sure that only small bow waves are formed when driving the vehicle through water.

� Clean mud off the tire tread after driv-ing through water.

� To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the brake pedal several times while driving after leaving the water.

Crossing obstacles When driving over tree stumps, big rocks and other obstacles, observe the following rules:

� Make sure the off-road driving program (� page 279) or if equipped the LOW RANGE mode* (� page 203) is switched on.



� Check the vehicle clearance before crossing obstacles.

� Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of the front wheels at the center of the ob-stacle, and repeat same with the rear wheel.

! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors while driving through water. Water could otherwise en-ter the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle’s electronics, as well as the interior equipment.

! Obstacles can damage the vehicle underbody or suspension components. If possi-ble use the assistance of a second person out-side the vehicle to scout the path you intend to take and check for adequate ground clearance when you cross obstacles with your vehicle. The person assisting you outside the vehicle should always be a safe distance away from the vehicle and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected vehicle movement.

After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, in-spect vehicle for any damage, especially vehicle underbody and suspension components. Failure to do so can adversely affect the vehicle’s future performance, including increased chance of an accident.

! Special attention is needed when you cross obstacles on a steep incline.

The vehicle could slide sideways as a result of its possible slanted position which in turn may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling over.

363

Operation


Driving on sand

When driving on sand, observe the follow-ing rules:

� Set the raised level (� page 281).


� Shift automatic transmission into a gear range that is appropriate for the terrain.

� In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as conditions permit. This helps overcome the vehicle rolling resistance and re-duce the likelihood of the vehicle sink-ing into the ground.

� Drive in tracks of other vehicles if they are not too deep and you have suffi-cient clearance.

Ruts

A number of off-road tracks or other by-ways have deep ruts which can cause the underbody to come in contact with the ground.

� Make sure the off-road driving program (� page 279), or if equipped, the LOW RANGE mode* (� page 203) is switched on.

� Set the raised level (� page 281).



� Drive next to the ruts rather than through them if at all possible.

� If the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive with one side of the vehicle on the grassy center strip if the route permits.

Warning! G

Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure before driving through sand. However, if you do so, remember to correct the tire inflation pressure (� page 396) before continuing your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation pressure increases the risk of losing control of the vehicle and rolling over.

! Check that the ruts are not too deep and your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient. Otherwise:

� your vehicle may be damaged

� the underbody of the vehicle may come in contact with the ground and you may get stuck

364

Operation


Returning from off-road driving Off-road driving increases strain on the vehicle.

We recommend that you inspect the vehi-cle for possible damage after each off-road trip. Recognizing any damage and a subse-quent timely repair reduces the chance of a possible breakdown or accident later on.

Proceed as follows:

� Switch off the off-road driving program (� page 280) or the LOW RANGE mode* (� page 203).

� Switch off the DSR (� page 276).

� Set the differential locks* to AUTO (� page 207).

� Lower the vehicle back to a level suitable for road conditions, e.g. High-way/High-speed level (� page 281).

� Clean all exterior lamps and check for possible damage.

� Clean the front and rear license plate.

� Remove excessive dirt from tires, wheels, wheel housings, and under-body.

For instance, after driving in mud, clean the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes, and wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet of water.

� Check tires for possible damage.

� Inspect vehicle underbody, oil pan, brake hoses, etc., as well as vehicle un-derbody for possible damage.

� Check for brush or branches caught in the underbody.

� After continued operation in mud, sand, water or other dirty conditions clean the brake discs, wheels, brake pads and check and clean axle joints.

� Conduct a brake test.

Warning! G

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flash-ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-tion to an area which is a safe distance from the roadway.

Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires ap-pear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs.

Damage to the vehicle may influence driving comfort and pose the risk of accident to you and other drivers.

! Brush or branches could increase the possi-bility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake lines, puncture rubber bellows of the axles or drive shafts.

365

Operation


Trailer towing Trailer hitch*

� Only install a trailer hitch receiver ap-proved for your vehicle.

For information on availability and in-stallation, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

� The bumpers on your vehicle are not designed for use with clamp-type hitch-es.

Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to them.

� To reduce the possibility of damage, re-move the hitch ball adaptor from the receiver when not in use.

Electrical connections

The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven-wire harness included in the Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch receiver kit.

For further information, contact an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the maximum permissible vehicle weight:6944 lb (3150 kg).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW):Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It must never exceed the GVWR.

Warning! G

Failure to use proper equipment and driving technique can result in a loss of vehicle con-trol when towing a trailer.

Improper towing or failure to follow the in-structions in this manual can result in vehi-cle damage and/or serious personal injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully to as-sure safe trailer operation.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center should you require an explana-tion of information contained in this manual.

i A four-pole conversion plug is available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as a spare part.

366

Operation


Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum permissible axle weight:

The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc. loaded on the trailer. The maximum permissible gross trailer weight to be towed:7500 lb (3402 kg).

Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the maximum permissible weight on the trailer tongue:600 lb (272 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz approved hitch receiver.

Loading a trailer

� When loading a trailer, you should ob-serve that neither the permissible GTW, nor the GVWR are exceeded.

Maximum permissible values are listed on the safety compliance certification labels for the vehicle and for the trailer to be towed.The lowest value listed must be select-ed when determining how the vehicle and trailer are loaded.

� The tongue weight at the hitch ball must be added to the GVW to prevent exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow vehicle’s rear GAWR.

Checking weights of vehicle and trailer

� To assure that the tow vehicle and trail-er are in compliance with the maximum permissible weight limits have the load-ed rig (tow vehicle including driver, pas-sengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a commercial scale.

� Check the vehicle’s front and rear Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) and Tongue Weight (TW).

The values as measures must not exceed the weight limits listed under “Vehicle and trailer weight and ratings” (� page 366).

GL 320 CDI

Front 3306 lb (1500 kg)

Rear 3968 lb (1800 kg)

GL 450

Front 3240 lb (1470 kg)

Rear 3968 lb (1800 kg)

i We recommend loading the trailer in such a manner that it has a Tongue Weight (TW) between 8% and 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW).

i Maximum trailer weight ratings are calculat-ed assuming the vehicle, plus driver. The weight of other accessories, passengers and cargo will reduce the maximum trailer weight and Tongue Weight (TW) your vehicle can tow.

367

Operation


Attaching a trailer Observe maximum permitted trailer dimensions (width and length).

Most states and all Canadian provinces require

� safety chains between your tow vehicle and the trailer.

The chains should be criss-crossed under the trailer tongue. They must be attached to the hitch receiver, and not to the vehicle’s bumper or axle.

Make sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

� a separate brake system at various trailer weights.

� a break-away switch on trailers with a separate brake system. Check with your local state laws for specific requirements.

The switch activates the trailer brakes in the possible event that the trailer might separate from the tow vehicle.


� Set the parking brake for the vehicle (� page 68).


� Set the vehicle level to Highway (� page 281).

� Vehicle with ADS*: Set the ADS* to AUTO or COMFORT (� page 280).

� Turn off the engine (� page 69).

Warning! G

While you are coupling or decoupling a trail-er, make sure that you do not

� lock or unlock

� open or close

a vehicle door or the tailgate.The vehicle’s level could change and you could endanger yourself and/or others as a result.

Make sure that you do not operate the ADS button* (� page 281) or the vehicle level control system (� page 281) when cou-pling/decoupling the trailer.

! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if trailer is so equipped) directly to the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as your vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If you do, neither the vehicle’s brakes nor the trailer’s brakes will function properly.

i The provided vehicle electrical connector for trailer towing has a brake signal wire for hook-up to a brake controller.

You should consider using a trailer sway control system. For further information, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

368

Operation



� Attach the trailer.

� Plug in all electrical connectors.

Towing a trailer

There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be le-gal, not only for where you reside, but also for where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be the po-lice or local authorities.

Note the following points, when driving with the trailer:

� In order to gain skill and an understand-ing of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic.

� Before you start driving check the

� trailer hitch

� break-away switch

� safety chains

� electrical connections

� lighting and tires

� Adjust the mirrors (� page 52) to permit unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer.

� If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then apply only the trailer brake controller by hand to make sure the brakes are working properly.

� Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving.

� When towing a trailer, check occasion-ally to make sure the load is secure, and that lighting and trailer brakes (if so equipped) are functioning properly.

� Take into consideration that when tow-ing a trailer, the handling characteris-tics are different and less stable from those when operating the vehicle with-out a trailer.

It is important to avoid sudden maneu-vers.

� The vehicle and trailer combination is heavier, and therefore is limited in ac-celeration and climbing ability, and re-quires longer stopping distances.

It is more prone to reacting to cross wind gusts, and requires more sensi-tive steering input.

� If possible, do not brake abruptly, but rather engage the brake slightly at first to permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then increase the braking force.

i When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle level always remains in the Highway setting.

The following applies additionally when towing a trailer:

� The vehicle is lowered to the highway level when it reaches a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if not set to highway level.

� The high-speed level is not available.

The restrictions that apply to towing also apply when using accessories that are connected to the trailer power socket, such as a bicycle rack.

369

Operation


� If the transmission repeatedly shifts between gears on inclines, manually shift to a lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1) (� page 200).

A lower gear and reduction of speed re-duces the chance of engine overload-ing and/or overheating.

� On very steep inclines, not manageable with automatic transmission in 1, switch on off-road driving program (� page 280) or LOW RANGE mode* (� page 203).

� When going down a long hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine’s brak-ing effect.

Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheat-ing the vehicle and trailer brakes.

� If the engine coolant rises to an ex-tremely high temperature (coolant tem-perature needle approaching the red zone) when the air conditioning is on, turn off the air conditioning system.

Engine coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the climate control fan speed to high and setting the temperature control to the maximum hot position.

� Extreme care must be exercised since your vehicle with a trailer will require additional passing distance ahead than when driving without a trailer.

Because your vehicle and trailer is longer than your vehicle alone, you will also need to go much farther ahead of the passed vehicle before you can re-turn to your lane.

Uncoupling the trailer! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce the vehicle’s speed immediately.

In no case attempt to straighten out the tow vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed.

Warning! G

While you are coupling or decoupling a trail-er, make sure that you do not

� lock or unlock

� open or close

a vehicle door or the tailgate.The vehicle’s level could change and you could endanger yourself and/or others as a result.

Make sure that you do not operate the ADS button* (� page 281) or the vehicle level control system (� page 281) when cou-pling/decoupling the trailer.

370

Operation



� Set the parking brake for the vehicle (� page 68).



� Set the parking brake for the trailer.

� Disconnect all electrical plug connec-tors.

� Uncouple the trailer.

� Make sure that the trailer coupling is free of load.


Passenger compartment

Warning! G

As soon as you disconnect the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle, the vehicle will lower. To help avoid personal injury, make sure no one is near the wheel housing or underneath the vehicle before the electrical connection is discon-nected.

When you uncouple the trailer, the vehicle is temporarily raised because the springs are relieved of load. Be especially careful during this process, as you could otherwise injure yourself and/or others. Make sure that any persons remaining in the vehicle do not press the switches for vehicle level control or the ADS*.

Warning! G

Always fasten items being carried as secure-ly as possible.

In an accident, during hard braking or sud-den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

The rear cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. Always use tie down rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo net* when transporting cargo. The cargo net* cannot secure hard or heavy ob-jects. Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo floor area and fastening materials.

371

Operation


Driving abroad

Abroad, there is an extensive Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Control and operation of radio transmitters

COMAND system, radio and telephone*

Telephones and two-way radios

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle.

Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

Warning! G

Do not forget that your primary responsibili-ty is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the COMAND system, radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.


1 Observe all legal requirements.

Warning! G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-out being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

372

Operation


Catalytic converter (gasoline engine)

Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-sions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our rec-ommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine)

Your vehicle is equipped with an oxidation catalyst, an important element in conjunc-tion with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instruc-tions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.

Emission control

Certain engine systems serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law.

These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly ac-cording to factory specifications. Any ad-justments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center autho-rized technicians.

! To prevent damage to the catalytic convert-ers, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.

Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces-sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con-verter, causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire.

Warning! G

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Warning! G

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

373

Operation


Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly accord-ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing require-ments. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet.

Coolant temperature

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem-perature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C).

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning! G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-consciousness and possible death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one win-dow fully open at all times.

Warning! G

� Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids, which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

� Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

374

Operation

At the gas station

�
At the gas station Refueling
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

� Turn off the engine

� by turning the SmartKey to position 0 (� page 42). Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

� by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (� page 43). Open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is now in position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch).

Warning! G

Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flamma-ble and poisonous. They burn violently and can cause serious personal injury.

Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate-rials near gasoline or diesel fuel!

Turn off the engine before refueling.

Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or cloth-ing contact, extinguish all smoking materi-als.

Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel fuel vapors are damaging to your health.

Warning! G

Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the fuel system and engine could be damaged. In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.

! Damage resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Diesel engine: When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel containers, place a filling filter, a suede cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. Otherwise, particles from the fuel container could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel injec-tion system.

i In case the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler flap” (� page 501).

��

375

Operation

At the gas station

�
� Briefly push on fuel filler flap at the po-sition indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

� Open the fuel filler flap completely.

� Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure is released.

� Take off the fuel cap.

� To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit.

� Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out – do not top off or over-fill.

� Replace the fuel cap by turning it clockwise until it audibly engages.

� Close the fuel filler flap.

You should hear the latch close shut.

! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could damage the vehicle paint finish.

Warning! G

Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-sure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump noz-zle, which could cause personal injury.

i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin prevents closing after you have locked the vehicle.

i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the ? malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunc-tion indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on.


i Gasoline engine: Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a min-imum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. Please contact gas station personnel in case labels on the pump cannot be found.

For more information on gasoline, see “Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)” (� page 563), see “Fuel requirements” (� page 563), and the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i Diesel engine:Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). Information on diesel quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. Please contact gas station personnel in case labels on the pump cannot be found.

For more information on diesel fuels, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

�

376

Operation

At the gas station

Low outside temperatures (diesel engine)

To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with improved cold flow characteristics is of-fered in the winter months. Check with your fuel retailer.

Check regularly and before a long trip

� Open the hood (� page 379).

Example GL 450 (GL 320 CDI similar)

1 Brake fluid2 Coolant level3 Windshield washer system and

headlamp cleaning system*

Engine oil level

For more information on engine oil, see “Engine oil” (� page 381).

i Diesel engine:If you have driven the vehicle until the tank is empty, the fuel system needs to be bled (� page 529).

! Diesel engine:The engine is more susceptible to wear and damage if you use

� marine diesel fuel

� heating oil

� additives

The exhaust aftertreatment device will be seriously damaged if you use

� LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (500 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM)

� any other diesel fuel with a sulfur content of above 15 ppm

The use of such non-approved fuels and/or special additives is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The fuel system and engine will otherwise be dam-aged, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

377

Operation

At the gas station

Brake fluid

Coolant

For normal replenishing, use water (pota-ble water quality).

For more information, see “Coolant level” (� page 382) and see “Fuels, coolants, lu-bricants” (� page 560).

Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

For more information on refilling the wash-er reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (� page 384).

Vehicle lighting

Check function and cleanliness. For infor-mation on replacing light bulbs, see “Re-placing bulbs” (� page 508).

For more information, see “Exterior lamp switch” (� page 145).

Tire inflation pressure

For more information, see “Checking tire inflation pressure” (� page 396).

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see “Brake fluid” (� page 562).

378

Operation

Engine compartment

�
Engine compartment Hood
Opening

Warning! G

Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow.

This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and/or others.

Warning! G

If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-perature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department.

Warning! G

You could be injured when the hood is open – even when the engine is turned off.

Parts of the engine can become very hot. To prevent burns, let the engine cool off com-pletely before touching any components on the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety precautions.

Warning! G

To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running.

The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or may even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades.

Warning! G

Vehicles with gasoline engine:The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnos-tic socket) of the ignition system

� with the engine running

� while starting the engine

� if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually

Warning! G

Vehicles with diesel engine:The engine is equipped with a high-voltage electronic control unit for the injection system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components of the injection system (injectors, electrical wires) ��

379

Operation

Engine compartment

�

The hood lock release lever is located in the driver’s footwell.

1 Release lever

� Pull release lever 1 downwards.

The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 pro-trudes slightly from the radiator grille. If not, lift the hood slightly.

2 Handle for opening the hood

� Press and hold handle 2.

The hood is unlocked.

� Pull up on the hood in direction of ar-row and then release it.

The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas-filled struts.

Closing

� Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).

The hood will lock audibly.

� Check to make sure the hood is fully closed.

If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force.

� with the engine running

� while starting the engine


! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield.

Warning! G

When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone.

Make sure that the hood is securely en-gaged before driving off. Do not continue driving if the hood can no longer engage af-ter an accident, for example. The hood could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and endanger you and others.

�

380

Operation

Engine compartment

Engine oil

The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Increased oil consumption can occur when

� the vehicle is new

� the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds

Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period.

Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick

When checking the oil level

� the vehicle must be parked on level ground

� the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off


1 Oil dipstick2 Upper mark3 Lower mark


� Pull out oil dipstick 1.

� Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.

� Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube.

� Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading.

The oil level is correct when it is be-tween lower mark 3 (min.) and upper mark 2 (max.) of the oil dipstick.

� If necessary, add engine oil (� page 382).

For more information on engine oil, see “Technical data” section (� page 560) and (� page 562).

i Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).

381

Operation

Engine compartment

Adding engine oil


1 Filler cap

� Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.

� Add engine oil as required. Never over-fill with oil.

Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water.

� Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.

For more information on engine oil, see “Technical data” section (� page 560) and (� page 562).

Transmission fluid level

The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center check the automatic trans-mission.

Coolant level

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground.

! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System. For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and/or catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the oxi-dation catalyst (diesel engine) not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

382

Operation

Engine compartment

The coolant expansion tank is located on the driver’s side of the engine compart-ment.

1 Cap2 Coolant expansion tank3 Indicator wall4 Coolant level

� Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approx-imately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure.

� Continue turning cap 1 counterclock-wise and remove it.

Coolant level 4 is correct if the level:

� for cold coolant: reaches the top of indicator wall 3 visible through the filling opening

� for warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher

� Add coolant as required.

� Replace and tighten cap 1.

For more information on coolant, see “Coolants” (� page 565).

Warning! G

In order to avoid potentially serious burns:

� Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-cates that the coolant is overheated.

� Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure.

� Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-sure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-der pressure.

� Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-col which may burn if it comes into con-tact with hot engine parts.

383

Operation

Engine compartment

Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

1 Cap for windshield washer reservoir

Fluid for the windshield/rear window washer system and the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of 8.1 US qt (7.7 l).

During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container.

� Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards.

� Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer sol-vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

For more information, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (� page 567).Warning! G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.

! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

384

Operation

Tires and wheels

�
Tires and wheels Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information on test-ed and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Important guidelines

� Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make.

� Tires must be of the correct size for the rim.

� Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.

� Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss or damage to the tire beads.

� If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required.

� Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).

� When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all around).

Warning! G

Replace rims or tires with the same designa-tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for fur-ther information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted:

� The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.

� The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct.

Warning! G

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.

When replacing rims, only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.

Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on re-treads. The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used.

385

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire care and maintenance

Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more informa-tion on checking tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended tire inflation pres-sure” (� page 394).

Tire inspection

Every time you check your tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the following:

� excessive treadwear (� page 387)

� cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber

� bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire

Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions.

Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary.

Life of tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

� Driving style

� Tire inflation pressure

� Distance driven

Warning! G

Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam-aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle.

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.

Warning! G

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.

386

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tread depth

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approx-imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be re-placed.

Recommended minimum tire tread depth:

� Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)

� Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)

1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

Storing tires

Cleaning tires

Warning! G

Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recom-mend that you do not allow your tires

to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

! Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

387

Operation

Tires and wheels

Direction of rotation

Unidirectional tires offer added advantag-es, such as better hydroplaning perfor-mance. To benefit, however, you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified.

An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation (spinning) of the tire.

Loading the vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry.

1) The Tire and Loading Information placard can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-portant information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle.

2) The certification label, also found on the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi-cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle.

i Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi-rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg-ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel.

388

Operation

Tires and wheels

1 Driver’s door B-pillar

Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the Tire and Loading Information placard with regards to loading your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information

Tire and Loading Information placard

1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard

The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389).

� Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.

The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement.

Warning! G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

389

Operation

Tires and wheels

Seating capacity

The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear seating capacity. The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the seating capacity is located on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389).

1 Seating capacity information on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Step 1

� Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard.

Step 2

� Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Step 3

� Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only. Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

390

Operation

Tires and wheels

Step 4

� The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs).

Step 5

� Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Step 6 (if applicable)

� If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (� page 393).

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configura-tions and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard (� page 389).

391

Operation

Tires and wheels

The higher the weight of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available.

For more information, see “Trailer tongue load” (� page 393).

Example Combined weight limit of occu-pants and cargo from placard

Number of occupants (driver and passengers)

Seating configura-tion

Occupants weight Combined weight of all occupants

Available cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (total load limit from placard minus combined weight of all occupants)

1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2

rear: 3

Occupant 1: 150 lbsOccupant 2: 180 lbsOccupant 3: 160 lbsOccupant 4: 140 lbsOccupant 5: 120 lbs

750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs

2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1rear: 2

Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 190 lbsOccupant 3: 150 lbs

540 lbs 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs

3 1500 lbs 1 front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs

392

Operation

Tires and wheels

Certification label

Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) (� page 393) as to not exceed the permis-sible load limit, you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for ei-ther the front or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the certification label. The certification label can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical data” (� page 547).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue load (� page 393) must never exceed the GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to-tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).

To assure that your vehicle does not ex-ceed the maximum permissible weight limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale.

Trailer tongue load

The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-tant weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load typically is between 8% and 15% of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it.

For more information on trailer tongue load, see “Loading a trailer” (� page 367).

393

Operation

Tires and wheels

Recommended tire inflation pressure

Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389).

The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be ad-justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar.

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling, tread life and riding comfort.

In addition to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation pressure label (if available) on the fuel filler flap (� page 375) for any additional infor-mation pertaining to special driving situa-tions. For more information, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (� page 395).

Warning! G

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being over-heated.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.


394

Operation

Tires and wheels

1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment.

Important notes on tire inflation pressure

Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load.

If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal and conditions allow, consult the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap (if available) on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire infla-tion pressure, excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for proper tire inflation pressure.

Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds. You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehi-cle condition. If such information is provid-ed, it can be found on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap (� page 375).

i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

Warning! G

If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly:

� Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.

� Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim.

i Driving comfort may be reduced when the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

395

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi-mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month.

Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm (the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours), the reading will be approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.

Checking tire inflation pressure manually

Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure:

� Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.

� Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.

� Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom-mended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389) or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap. If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire in-flation pressure.

Warning! G





396

Operation

Tires and wheels

� Install the valve cap.

� Repeat this procedure for each tire.

Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)

While the vehicle is being driven, the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota-tional speed. This allows the system to de-tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display.

The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay

� if snow chains are mounted to the vehicle

� in presence of ice and snow

� if you are driving on a loose surface (e.g. sand or gravel)

� if you are driving in a very sporty man-ner (involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in curves)

i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in-flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.

Warning! G

When the multifunction display shows the message Tire pressure Check tires, one or more of your tires is significantly un-derinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicat-ed on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure label. Driving on a sig-nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un-derinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, in-cluding the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recom-mended tire inflation pressure as specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389) or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure la-bel located on the inside of the fuel filler flap (� page 375).

397

Operation

Tires and wheels

Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator

The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations:

� If you have changed the tire inflation pressure

� If you have replaced the wheels or tires

� If you have installed new wheels or tires

� Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.


Make sure the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (� page 157).

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display:

� Press the reset button on the instru-ment cluster (� page 155).

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:RestartRun Flat Indicator?YesCancel

Warning! G

The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres-sure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389) or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap (� page 375).

The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in more than one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator.

The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.

Warning! G

The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire.

If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set, the system will monitor the pressure ac-cording to the incorrect value.

398

Operation

Tires and wheels

If you wish to confirm activation:

� Press button æ.

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:Run Flat Indicatorrestarted

After a certain “learning phase”, the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val-ues for all four tires.

If you wish to cancel activation:

� Press button ç.

or

� Wait until the messageRestartRun Flat Indicator?YesCanceldisappears.

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), (USA only)

The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-sure, as selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires.

i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the instrument cluster (� page 27). Depending on how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS system itself:

� If the telltale illuminates continuously, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS.

� If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and then stays illuminated, the TPMS system itself is not operating properly.

i This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




399

Operation

Tires and wheels

Warning! G

The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure infor-mation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care-fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.

Warning! G

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-Pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significant-ly underinflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

400

Operation

Tires and wheels

Reactivating the TPMS

The TPMS must be reactivated when you have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new level (e.g. because of different load or driving conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures.

� Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389) or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap (� page 375), make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.

� Press button è or ÿ on the mul-tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu ap-pears in the multifunction display (� page 157).

� Press the j or k button repeat-edly until you see the following message:Tire pressure monitoractiveMenu: R-Button

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of in-compatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc-tion develops, it may take up to 10 minutes for the system to signal a malfunction using the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination se-quence.

The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driv-ing if the malfunction has been corrected.

i Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal-function.

Warning! G

It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You might lose control over the vehicle.

i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-ommended for the vehicle operating condition. Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389). Some vehicles may have supple-mental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (� page 395) or for vehi-cle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (� page 395). If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

��

401

Operation

Tires and wheels

�
� Press the reset button (� page 155).
The following message will appear in the multifunction display:Restart tirepressure monitor?

� Press the æ button.

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:Tire pressure monitorrestarted

After driving a few minutes the system verifies that the current tire inflation pressures are within the system’s specified range. Afterwards the current tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference pressures and then moni-tored.


� Press the ç button.

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Moni-toring System (Advanced TPMS)*, (Canada only)

The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-sure, as selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires.

Tire pressure inquiries are made using the multifunction display. The present inflation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes’ travel time.


� Press the j or k button on the multifunction steering wheel until the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display.

i This device complies with RSS-210 of Indus-try Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




i Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s control system can occur. Usually the readings issued by the control system are more precise.

i When the message Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes appears in the multifunction display, the individual inflation pressure values are matched with the tires. The individual values are displayed after a few minutes driving.

�

402

Operation

Tires and wheels

Warning! G


i With a spare wheel without wheel sensor mounted, the system may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the removed wheel for some minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that the indicated value where the spare wheel is mount-ed does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation pressure.

Warning! G

The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure infor-mation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care-fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.

Warning! G

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-Pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle plac-ard or the tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Driving on a signif-icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. ��

403

Operation

Tires and wheels

�
Reactivating Advanced TPMS*
The TPMS must be reactivated when you have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new level (e.g. because of different load or driving conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures.

� Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389) or, if available, the sup-plemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap (� page 375), make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.

� Press button è or ÿ on the mul-tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (� page 157).

� Press the j or k button repeat-edly until you see the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the display or the following message ap-pears in the display

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may effect the vehi-cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

i Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal-function.

Warning! G


i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-ommended for the vehicle operating condition. Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 389). Some vehicles may have supple-mental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (� page 395) or for vehi-cle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (� page 395). If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

�

404

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire pressuredisplayed afterdriving fora few minutes

� Press the reset button (� page 155).

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:Restart tirepressure monitor?

� Press the æ button.

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:Tire pressure monitorrestarted

After a few minutes driving, the current tire inflation pressure values are ac-cepted as reference values and then monitored.


� Press the ç button.

Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

Underinflated tires can:

� cause excessive and uneven tire wear

� adversely affect fuel economy

� lead to tire failure from being overheated

� adversely affect handling characteristics

Overinflated tires

Overinflated tires can:

� adversely affect handling characteristics

� cause uneven tire wear

� be more prone to damage from road hazards

� adversely affect ride comfort

� increase stopping distance

Warning! G


Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Warning! G



405

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire labeling

Besides tire name (sales designation) and manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire.

Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle’s tires:

1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards (� page 413)

2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) (� page 410)

3 Maximum tire load (� page 412)4 Maximum tire inflation pressure

(� page 412)5 Manufacturer6 Tire ply material (� page 415)7 Tire size designation, load and speed

rating (� page 406)8 Load identification (� page 410)9 Tire name

Tire size designation, load and speed rating

1 Tire width2 Aspect ratio in %3 Radial tire code4 Rim diameter5 Tire load rating6 Tire speed rating

i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

For more information, see “Rims and tires” (� page 554).


406

Operation

Tires and wheels

General:

Depending on the design standards used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation.

No letter preceding the size designation (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire based on European design standards.

Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards.

Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards.

Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tire width

The tire width 1 (� page 406) indicates the nominal tire width in mm.

Aspect ratio

The aspect ratio 2 (� page 406) is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width.

Tire code

The tire code 3 (� page 406) indicates the tire construction type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag-onal or bias ply construction; letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.

At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For additional information, see “Tire speed rating” (� page 408).

Rim diameter

The rim diameter 4 (� page 406) is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).

Tire load rating

The tire load rating 5 (� page 406) is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.

For example, a load rating of 91 corre-sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) the tire is designed to support. See also “Maximum tire load” (� page 412) where the maximum load as-sociated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs.

407

Operation

Tires and wheels

For additional information on tire load rating, see “Load identification” (� page 410).

Tire speed rating

The tire speed rating 6 (� page 406) indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire.

Summer tires

Warning! G

The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR (� page 416) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.

Always replace rims and tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.

Warning! G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

i Tire load rating 5 (� page 406) and Tire speed rating 6 (� page 406) are also referred to as “service description”.

Warning! G

Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others.

i Tire load rating 5 (� page 406) and Tire speed rating 6 (� page 406) are also referred to as “service description”.

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)

408

Operation

Tires and wheels

� At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for exam-ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the tire must be referred to. The service description is comprised of the tire load rating 5 (� page 406) and the tire speed rating 6 (� page 406).

If your tire includes “ZR” in the size designation and no service description 5 and 6 (� page 406) is given, the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed ca-pability.

If a service description 5 and 6 (� page 406) is given, the speed capa-bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” is the service description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed capabil-ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).

� Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-thesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire.

All-season and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1

1 or M+S.for winter tires

up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manu-facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions.

409

Operation

Tires and wheels

Load identification

1 Load identification

In addition to tire load rating, special load identification 1 may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designat-ing the tire speed rating (� page 406).

No specification given: absence of any text (like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire.

XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load (or reinforced) tire.

Light Load: designates a light load tire.

C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

U.S. tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires.

The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”.


410

Operation

Tires and wheels

1 DOT2 Manufacturer’s identification mark3 Tire size4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire

manufacturer)5 Date of manufacture

DOT (Department of Transportation)

A tire branding symbol 1 (� page 411) which denotes the tire meets require-ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor-tation.

Manufacturer’s identification mark

The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 (� page 411) denotes the tire manufacturer.

New tires have a mark with two symbols.

Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-bols. For more information on retreaded tires, see (� page 385).

Tire size

The code 3 (� page 411) indicates the tire size.

Tire type code

The code 4 (� page 411) may, at the option of the manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture

The date of manufacture 5 (� page 411) identifies the week and year of manufac-ture.

The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year.

For example, “3202” represents the 32nd week of 2002.i For illustration purposes only. Actual data

on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

411

Operation

Tires and wheels

Maximum tire load

1 Maximum tire load rating

The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support.

For more information on tire load rating (� page 407).

For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities (� page 390).

Maximum tire inflation pressure

1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure

This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire.


Warning! G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.


412

Operation

Tires and wheels

Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure (� page 394) for proper tire inflation.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles)

Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.

1 Treadwear2 Traction3 Temperature resistance

Quality grades can be found, where appli-cable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Warning! G

Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.


Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride com-fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-tance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de-bris, potholes etc. i For illustration purposes only. Actual data

on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

413

Operation

Tires and wheels

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to low-est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the high-est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning! G

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

414

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire ply material

1 Plies in sidewall2 Plies under tread

This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Tire and loading terminology

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).

Air pressure

The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bars.

Aspect ratio

Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage.

Warning! G

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.


415

Operation

Tires and wheels

Bar

Another metric unit for air pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with stan-dard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passen-gers and cargo.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc. loaded on the trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all options, passen-gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

416

Operation

Tires and wheels

Maximum load rating

The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, total load limit and production options weight.

Maximum tire inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions.

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Production options weight

The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

PSI (Pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for air pressure -> bar, kilopascal (kPa).

Recommended tire inflation pressure

Recommended tire inflation pressure for normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire and Loading Information placard locat-ed on driver’s door B-pillar. Provides best handling, tread life and riding comfort. If so equipped, supplemental information per-taining to special driving situations can be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall

The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica-tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”.

Tire load rating

Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.

417

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire ply composition and material used

This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Tire speed rating

Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved.

Total load limit

Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity.

Traction

Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. The amount of grip provided.

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)

Maximum permissible weight on trailer tongue.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two.

Rotating tires

Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire (� page 388).

Warning! G

Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are of the same dimension.

If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.

418

Operation

Tires and wheels

In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.

If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu-ration, tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer’s recommended in-tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If none is available, tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces-sary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation (spinning) direction must be maintained (� page 388).

Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires).

Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.

For information on wheel change, see the “Practical hints” section (� page 495) and (� page 523).

Warning! G

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.

419

Operation

Winter driving

Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This service includes:

� Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration.

� Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to a premixed wind-shield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures (� page 567).

� Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures.

� Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season.

Winter tires

Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and The Rubber Association of Can-ada (RAC) and have been designed specif-ically for use in snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP®, 4-ETS, and EBP in winter operation.

For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design.

Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Winter tires with a tread depth of less than 1/6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.

420

Operation

Winter driving

Snow chains

Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow.

Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains:

� Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations (� page 554).

� Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufac-turer’s mounting instructions.

� Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.

� Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains.

� Do not use snow chains on the spare wheel (� page 556).

Warning! G

If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

! Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive use snow chains on rear tires only.

Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires, use of snow chains is not permissible with the spare wheel.

! Vehicles with ADS*:When driving with snow chains, do not select SPORT mode (� page 281).

i When driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP® (� page 107) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction.

421

Operation

Maintenance

We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display.

Maintenance service indicator message

The maintenance service indicator mes-sage will notify you when the next mainte-nance service is due.

Starting approximately 1 month before the next maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (exam-ple service A):

Service A in XXXXX miles (km)Service A in XXX daysService A in X dayService A due now

The maintenance services will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multifunction display. Types A through H are classified based on estimat-ed time needed to perform the mainte-nance service, ranging:

from Service A

(approximately 1 hour)

to Service H

(approximately 8 hours)

Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of maintenance services and intervals they need to be performed at.

! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since the last maintenance service and calcu-lates other maintenance service work required.

422

Operation

Maintenance

Clearing the maintenance service indicator message

The maintenance service indicator mes-sage is automatically cleared

� after approximately 10 seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving

� after approximately 30 seconds, once the suggested maintenance service term has passed

You can also clear it yourself:

1 Reset button

� Press reset button 1 on the instru-ment cluster.

The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display (� page 164).

Maintenance service term exceeded

If you have exceeded the suggested main-tenance service term, you will see the fol-lowing message in the multifunction display:

Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)Service A exceeded by XXX daysService A exceeded by X day

In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears.

Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed mainte-nance service.

423

Operation

Maintenance

Calling up the maintenance service indicator display

You can call up the maintenance service in-dicator display at any time to check when the next maintenance service is due.


� Press button è or ÿ on the mul-tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display (� page 164).

� Press button k or j until the maintenance service indicator display with the service symbol 9 and the service deadline appears in the multi-function display.

Resetting the maintenance service indicator

In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, you can have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the informa-tion for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such informa-tion is available from either your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.

i If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator.

To arrive at the true maintenance service dead-line, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indi-cator message or maintenance service indicator display.

Do not confuse the maintenance service indica-tor with the engine oil level indicator N.

! If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center correct it.

Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

424

Operation

Vehicle care

�
Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Regular and proper care will help to maintain the value of your vehicle. The best way to protect your vehicle from harmful environmental influences is to wash it and use protective treatments regularly.

While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external in-fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at-tack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage.

Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by:

� Air pollution

� Road salt

� Tar

� Gravel and stone chipping

To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:

� Grease and oil

� Fuel

� Coolant

� Brake fluid

� Bird droppings

� Insects

� Tree resins, etc.

Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences.

More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions:

� near the ocean

� in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions)

� during winter operation

You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion.

In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-aged areas need to be re-undercoated.

Warning! G

Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the partic-ular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside.

Never use fluids or solvents that are not de-signed for cleaning your vehicle.

Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children.

425

Operation

Vehicle care

Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others ap-plied later.

We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.

Power washer

Tar stains

Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended.

Paintwork, painted body components

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”. This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending on the climate and washing detergent used.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of gloss).

! Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.

Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

! Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork.

426

Operation

Vehicle care

Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.

� Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).

Engine cleaning

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo-nents and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents.

Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the engine compartment after every en-gine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lu-bricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.

Vehicle washing

In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible.

When washing the vehicle underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.

Hand-wash

Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight.

� Only use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.

� Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-fused jet of water.

Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake.

� Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently.

� Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois.

Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. ! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.

Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-sratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge.

Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.

427

Operation

Vehicle care

Automatic car wash

You can have your car washed in an auto-matic car wash from the start. Automatic car washes without brushes are prefera-ble.

� To protect the filter system, switch the climate control system (� page 218) or the automatic climate control system* (� page 232) to air recirculation mode.

If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car wash.

When taking the vehicle through an auto-matic conveyor type car wash, observe the following instructions.

Vehicles with SmartKey:

� With the vehicle at a standstill and the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.


� Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the starter switch.



� With the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to park position P.



! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic touchless car wash which use caustic spray. Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the paint or ornamental moldings.

! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set to 0 (� page 64). Otherwise, e.g. the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage.

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors.

Warning! G

When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

428

Operation

Vehicle care

� Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch.

� Switch on the ignition.


� Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N



� Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

Ornamental moldings

For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-tal moldings, use a damp cloth.

Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lenses

� Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-poo, with plenty of water.

i After running the vehicle through an auto-matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the wind-shield (� page 431). This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield.

When leaving the car wash, make sure that the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.

! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings. Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appearance, they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.

For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome clean-er. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

! Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window clean-ing solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There-fore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents.

Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.

Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface.

429

Operation

Vehicle care

Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor cover

1 Distronic* system sensor cover


� Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-poo, with plenty of water and a non-scratching cloth to clean sensor cover 1.

� Restart the engine after cleaning sen-sor cover 1.

Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors

1 Parktronic* system sensors in front bumper

� Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-poo, with plenty of water and a soft, non-scratching cloth to clean sensors 1 on the bumpers.

! To prevent scratches or damage, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor cover 1. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.

! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor covers. Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers.

Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.

! To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.

430

Operation

Vehicle care

Cleaning the Rear View Camera lens*

1 Camera lens

� Only use clean water and a soft, non-scratching cloth to clean the camera lens 1.

Be careful not to apply wax to camera lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wax using the Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water.

Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades

� Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage.

� Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution.

! Do not clean the camera and the area around the camera:

� with a high-pressure cleaner

� with a dry cloth and high pressure

� with aggressive cleaning agents

You could otherwise damage the camera.

Warning! G

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-move SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0) before cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They could tear.

��

431

Operation

Vehicle care

�
� Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win-dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recom-mended.

Light alloy wheels

If possible, clean wheels once a week.

� Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light al-loy wheels.

Plastic and rubber parts

� Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution.

� Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution.

The surface may temporarily change color. If this is the case, wait for it to dry.

! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).

Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

! To clean the window interior, do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners con-taining solvents. Do not touch the inside of the front, rear or side windows and the power tilt/sliding sunroof* or rear panorama roof with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may damage the windows.

! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.

! The vehicle should not be parked for an ex-tended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel paint if the car is not driven after cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should always be warmed-up before it is parked after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care products, take care not to spray them on the brake disks.

Warning! G

Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol-vents will make the surface porous and vehi-cle occupants could suffer serious injuries from plastic parts coming loose in the event of air bag deployment.

�

432

Operation

Vehicle care

Hard plastic trim items

� Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.

Steering wheel

� Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor-oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

Carpets

� Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and Fabric Care for cleaning the car-pets.

Headliner

� Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

Seat belts

� Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.

! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on these parts.

Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge.

Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface.

! Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge.

Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface.

! The seat belts must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.

Warning! G

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

433

Operation

Vehicle care

Upholstery

Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently dis-colored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented.

Leather upholstery*

Please not that leather upholstery is a natural product and is therefore subject to a natural aging process. Leather upholstery may also react to certain ambient influences such as high humidity or high temperature by showing wrinkles for example.

� Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

MB Tex upholstery

� Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure for cleaning the upholstery.

Wood trims

� Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.Warning! G

Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent

� deployment of the front side impact air bags

� deployment of the rear side impact air bags*

� activation of the active head restraints

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:

� Wipe with light pressure only.

� Do not clean with abrasive cleaning agents such as scouring milk or powder.

� Do not soak the leather upholstery.

As leather is a natural product, it could otherwise harden or become porous.

� Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet.

! Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive.

434

435

Practical hints

What to do if …

Where will I find ...?

Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Opening/closing in an emergency

Resetting activated head restraints

Replacing SmartKey batteries

Replacing bulbs

Replacing wiper blades

Flat tire

Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)

Battery

Jump starting

Towing the vehicle

Fuses

Practical hints

What to do if …

Lamps in instrument cluster General information:If any of the following lamps in the instru-ment cluster fails to come on during the

bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary.

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while the engine is running.

ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The BAS, ESP®, EBP and 4-ETS are also switched off (see messages in multi-function display).

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.

If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as the navigation system* or the automatic transmission may also be malfunctioning.

� Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.

� Read and observe messages in the multifunction display (� page 451).

� Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts. The ABS has switched off.

The battery might not be charged sufficiently.

When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out.

If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:

� Have the generator (alternator) and the battery checked.

436

Practical hints

What to do if …

Problem Possible cause/conse-quence

Suggested solution

; (USA only)

3 (Canada only)

The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound.

You are driving with the parking brake set.


There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

� Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon it is safe to do so.


� Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

Warning! G

Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-nated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on.

Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

437

Practical hints

What to do if …


Suggested solution

; (USA only)

3 (Canada only)

-

v

The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving. In ad-dition, the yellow ABS malfunc-tion indicator lamp, and the yellow ESP® warning lamp come on and a warning will sound.

A malfunction in the Electronic Brake Proportioning (� page 109) was detected.

� Have the system checked at an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.


438

Practical hints

What to do if …


? (USA only)

± (Canada only)

The yellow engine malfunc-tion indicator lamp comes on while driving.

There is a malfunction in:

� The fuel management system

� The ignition system

� The emission control system

� Systems which affect emissions

Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency opera-tion) mode (� page 202).

� Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the read-out of diagnostic trouble codes. It is lo-cated in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.

i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local require-ments.

439

Practical hints

What to do if …


Suggested solution

? (USA only)

± (Canada only)

The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.

A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system.The fuel cap may not be closed properly.The fuel system may be leaky.

� Check the fuel cap (� page 375).

If it is not closed properly:

� Close the fuel cap.

If it is closed properly:

� Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Your fuel tank is empty. � After refueling start, turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession.

The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked.

440

Practical hints

What to do if …


v The yellow ABS/ESP® warning lamp comes on while driving.

The ESP® has been switched off.

Risk of accident!

When the ESP® is switched off it will not sta-bilize the vehicle if the system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel is spinning.

� Switch the ESP® back on (� page 108). Exceptions: (� page 107).

� If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

If the ESP® cannot be switched on:


The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunc-tion.

Risk of accident!

� Observe additional messages in the multifunction display.

� Continue driving with added caution.

� Adapt your speed and driving to the pre-vailing road and weather conditions.


441

Practical hints

What to do if …


v The yellow ABS/ESP® warning lamp flashes while driving.

The ESP®, ABS, or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire.

The cruise control and the Distronic* system are deactivated.

� When driving off, apply as little throt-tle as possible.

� While driving, ease up on the acceler-ator.

� Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather condi-tions.

� Do not deactivate the ESP®.Exceptions: (� page 107).


The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp in the fuel gauge comes on while driving.

The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.

� Refuel at the next gas station (� page 375).

442

Practical hints

What to do if …


< The red seat belt telltale comes on for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine.

The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts before driving off.

� Fasten your seat belts.

Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat belt tell-tale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after starting the engine.

< You hear a warning chime for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine.

You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt. � Fasten your seat belts.

The warning chime stops sounding.

443

Practical hints

What to do if …


< The red seat belt telltale comes on while the vehicle is standing still and the engine is running or during driving.

You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts.


The seat belt telltale goes out.

There are items placed on the front passen-ger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.

� Remove the items from the front pas-senger seat and put them in a safe place.

The seat belt telltale goes out.

< During driving the red seat belt telltale flashes and you addition-ally hear an intermittent warning chime with increasing intensity.

The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you and/or your front pas-senger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts.


The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding.

There are items placed on the front passen-ger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.

� Remove the items from the front pas-senger seat and put them in a safe place.

The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding.

i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously.

The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened.

444

Practical hints

What to do if …


l The red distance warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning chime sound.

You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you.

� Apply the brakes immediately.

� Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.

The Distronic* has recognized a stationary ob-stacle on your probable line of travel.

1 The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving.

There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or emergency tensioning device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to deploy unexpectedly in an accident.

� Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi-ately to have the system checked, otherwise

the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpect-edly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.

445

Practical hints

What to do if …


H USA only:Combination low tire pres-sure/TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS illuminates contin-uously.Canada only:Low tire pressure telltale for the Advanced TPMS* illuminates continuously.

The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS* (Canada only) detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.

� Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.

� Read and observe messages in the multifunction display.

If the tire inflation pressure in the respec-tive tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS mal-function telltale goes out after few minutes driving.

H USA only:Combination low tire pres-sure/TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS flashes 60 seconds and then stays illuminated.

There is a malfunction in the TPMS. � Read and observe messages in the multifunction display.

� Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

After the malfunction has been remedied the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving.

446

Practical hints

What to do if …

Warning! G

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-Pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significant-ly underinflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of in-compatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

447

Practical hints

What to do if …

Lamp in center console


Vehicles with OCS* only

59

The front passenger front air bag off indica-tor lamp illuminates and remains illuminat-ed with the weight of a typical adult or some-one larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning. � Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

� Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (� page 463).

Warning! G

If the 59 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passen-ger seat, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

448

Practical hints

What to do if …

Problem Possible cause/consequence

Suggested solution

Vehicles with OCS* only

59

The front passenger front air bag off indica-tor lamp does not illu-minate and/or does not remain illuminated with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat.

The system is malfunction-ing.

� Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat.

� Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present.

� Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.

� If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out, have the system checked as soon as pos-sible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do not transport a child on the front passen-ger seat until the system has been repaired.

� Also note any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (� page 463).

Warning! G

If the 59 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the

weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat, do not transport a child on

the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

449

Practical hints

What to do if …


Vehicles with BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system, Canada only59

The front passenger front air bag off indica-tor lamp illuminates and remains illuminated (� page 87).

A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the passenger seat. Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.

The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the passenger seat.


The front passenger front air bag off indica-tor lamp does not illu-minate or does not remain illuminated with a BabySmartTM child seat properly installed on the passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning. � Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.

� Check installation of the child seat (� page 93).

If the front passenger front air bag off indi-cator lamp remains out:

� Have the system checked at an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

450

Practical hints

What to do if …

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster.

Certain warning and malfunction messag-es are accompanied by an audible signal.

Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator’s Manual.

Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system (� page 169) displays both cleared and uncleared messages.

High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.

Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (� page 155) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the multifunction steering wheel.

Other messages of high priority and mes-sages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (� page 155) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the multifunction steering wheel. They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory (� page 169). Remember that clearing a message will only make the mes-sage disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear.

Warning! G

All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-age or personal injury.

451

Practical hints

What to do if …

On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display.

For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections:

� Text messages (� page 453)

� Symbol messages (� page 469)

Warning! G

No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.

As a result, you will not be able to see infor-mation about your driving conditions, such as speed or outside temperature, warn-ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired.

If you must continue to drive, please do so with added caution. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey.

452

Practical hints

What to do if …

Text messages

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

ABS inoperativeSee Operator’s Manual

The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off.

The ESP® and the BAS are also deactivated.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS avail-able.



Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.

unavailableSee Operator’s Manual

The ABS was deactivated because of insufficient power supply. The charg-ing voltage has fallen below 10 volts.


When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again and the message in the multifunction display should disappear.

If the message in the multifunction display does not disappear:


453

Practical hints

What to do if …


ABS unavailableSee Operator’s Manual

If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v flashes while driving and this message appears, the electron-ic traction system has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes.

As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the electronic traction system switches on again.

The message in the multifunction dis-play disappears and the ESP® warning lamp v goes out.

The self-diagnosis has not yet been completed yet.

The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).

Cruise control andSPEEDTRONIC

inoperative The cruise control is malfunctioning. � Have cruise control checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Cruise control --- mph You have attempted to set a speed while driving below 20 mph (30 km/h).

� Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed (� page 257).

The ESP® is switched off. � Switch on the ESP® (� page 105).

The automatic transmission is set to position P, R, or N.

� Set the automatic transmission to position D (� page 194).

The vehicle is secured with the parking brake.


454

Practical hints

What to do if …


DISTRONIC --- mph You have attempted to set a speed while driving below 20 mph (30 km/h).

� Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed (� page 262).

The ESP® is switched off. � Switch on the ESP® (� page 108).

The automatic transmission is set to position P, R, or N.

� Set the automatic transmission to position D (� page 194).

The vehicle is secured with the parking brake.


inoperative The Distronic* or the Distronic* display are malfunctioning.

� Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Override You have accelerated. The Distronic* has switched off.

� Stop accelerating.

455

Practical hints

What to do if …


DISTRONIC available again Distronic* had been deactivated and is available again.

� Activate Distronic* (� page 268).

currently unavailableSee Operator’s Manual

Distronic* is deactivated because the functionality is impaired by external interferences, e.g. high-frequency sources such as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc.

� Leave the area of the external interference.

� Activate the Distronic* again (� page 268), when the message DISTRONIC available again appears.

Distronic* is deactivated because the Distronic* sensor has not sensed any other vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such, for a long time.

� Try to activate Distronic* again (� page 268), when the message DISTRONIC available again appears.

456

Practical hints

What to do if …


DISTRONIC currently unavailableSee Operator’s Manual

Distronic* is deactivated because

� the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille is dirty

� the functionality is impaired by heavy precipitation or fog

� Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille (� page 430).

� Restart the vehicle.

Distronic* becomes operational again without the engine being restarted when

� dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g. slush or snow)

� the system recognizes full sensor availability due to lessening rain or because the road is drying, for example

� the message in the multifunction display disappears

You can then operate Distronic* as usual again.

457

Practical hints

What to do if …


Depress braketo shift out ofPark

You have tried to shift the automatic transmission into position D, R or N using the gear selector lever without depressing the brake pedal.


Door OpenVehicle not in Park

You have opened the driver’s door and the transmission is still in position D, R or N.

� Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that the automatic transmission is set to position P and that the parking brake is engaged.

Drive to workshopwithoutshifting gears

The automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of the set position be-cause of a malfunction.

If the automatic transmission is set to position D:

� Without changing the automatic transmis-sion from position D, drive to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If the automatic transmission is set to position N, R or P:

� Do not drive.

� Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

458

Practical hints

What to do if …


ESP inoperativeSee Operator’s Manual

In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp v comes on.

The ESP® has detected a malfunc-tion and switched off.

The ABS may still be operational.





The ESP® or the ESP® display is malfunctioning.





The ESP® is deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply.


� Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.

459

Practical hints

What to do if …


ESP unavailableSee Operator’s Manual

The ESP® was deactivated because of insufficient power supply. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts.


When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again and the message in the multifunction display should disappear.

If the message in the multifunction display does not disappear:


If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v flashes while driving and this message appears, the electron-ic traction system has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes.

As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the electronic traction system switches on again.

The message in the multifunction display disap-pears and the ESP® warning lamp v goes out.

The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.

The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).

460

Practical hints

What to do if …


P Shift to P You have started the engine or switched on the ignition with KEYLESS-GO* and opened the driver’s door with the automatic transmission not set to position P.

� Set the automatic transmission to position P.

or

� Close the driver’s door.

Shift to P or Nto start engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button while the auto-matic transmission was set to position R or D.

� Set the automatic transmission to position P or N.

Make sure the brake pedal is depressed when attempting to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop but-ton.

Only shift toPark whenvehicle is stationary

You have tried to shift the auto-matic transmission into position P using the gear selector lever although the vehicle is still in mo-tion.

� Stop the vehicle.


461

Practical hints

What to do if …


SRS Restraint sys. malfunctionVisit workshop

The system is malfunctioning. � Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.

For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the

system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-essarily which could also result in injury.

462

Practical hints

What to do if …

Display message Possiblecause/consequence

Possible solution

(Vehicles with OCS* only)Front passenger airbagenabledSee Operator’s Manual

Front passenger front air bag is activated while driving even though a child, small individual, or object below the system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make the system sense sup-plemental weight.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following:



� Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary.

� Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger seat and make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat is empty.

� Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recog-nize such forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present.

� Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition (� page 42).

(Continued on next page)

463

Practical hints

What to do if …

Display message Possiblecause/conse-quence

Possible solution

Monitor the 59 indicator lamp on the center console (� page 85) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (� page 26) for the following:

With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,

� the 59 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (� page 81) has deactivated the air bag.

� the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the message Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (� page 81), the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

If the 59 indicator lamp

remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small

individuals use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

464

Practical hints

What to do if …

Display message Possible cause/conse-quence

Possible solution

(Vehicles with OCS* only)Front passenger airbagdisabledSee Operator’s Manual

Front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving even though an adult or someone larger than a small individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in weight.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following:



� Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.

� Adjust the seat in a height position (� page 46).

� Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat.

� Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition (� page 42).


465

Practical hints

What to do if …

Display message Possiblecause/conse-quence

Possible solution

Monitor the 59 indicator lamp on the center console (� page 85) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (� page 26) for the following:

With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,

� the 59 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (� page 81) has deactivated the air bag.

� the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the message Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (� page 81), the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

If the 59 indicator lamp

remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front passenger seat even after per-forming the above corrective steps, do not

have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

466

Practical hints

What to do if …


Check tiresThen restartRun Flat Indicator

There was a warning message about a loss in the tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat Indicator has not been reactivated yet.

� Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each tire.

� Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator (� page 398).

Run Flat Indicatorinoperative

The Run Flat Indicator is malfunction-ing.

� Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Tire pressureCheck tires

The Run Flat Indicator indicates that the pressure is too low in one or more tires.

� Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic sit-uation around you.

� Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required (� page 396).

� If necessary, replace the wheel (� page 523).

� Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (� page 398).

Tire pressuredisplayed afterdriving fora few minutes

Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:

The tire inflation pressure is being checked.

� Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.

467

Practical hints

What to do if …


Tire pressure monitorinoperative

The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is malfunctioning.

� Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Tire pressure monitorinoperativeNo wheel sensors

There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires).


� Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Tire pressure monitorWheel sensor missing

One or more sensors defect (e.g. battery is empty).

One or more wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted (e.g. spare tire).


� Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:

The tire pressure for the respective tire is shown in the multifunction display.

Tire pressure monitorcurrentlyunavailable

The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is unable to monitor the tire pressure due to

� a nearby radio interference source.

� excessive wheel sensor temperatures.

� As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed, the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* automati-cally becomes active again after a few minutes driv-ing.

468

Practical hints

What to do if …

Symbol messages

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

# The battery is no longer charging.Possible causes:

� alternator malfunctioning

� broken poly-V-belt

Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping dis-tance is increased.

� Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so.


� Check the poly-V-belt.

If it is broken:

� Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If it is intact:

� Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.

469

Practical hints

What to do if …

Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

# Battery/AlternatorStop vehicle

The battery is defective. � Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so.


� Do not continue to drive.

� Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

{ inoperative Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning.

� Have the Downhill Speed Regulation checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear limit.

� Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.

! Brake pad thickness must be visually in-spected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.

470

Practical hints

What to do if …

Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

; (USA only)

! (Canada only)

Releaseparking brake

You are driving with the parking brake set.


; (USA only)

3 (Canada only)

EBV, ABS, ESP inoperativeSee Operator’s Manual

The EBP, the ABS, and the ESP® have switched off due to a mal-function. The BAS is also switched off.

The brake system is still func-tional but without the EBP, the ABS, and the ESP® available.




471

Practical hints

What to do if …


; (USA only)

3 (Canada only)

Checkbrake fluid level

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

� Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon at is safe to do so.


� Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

? (USA only)

± (Canada only)

EngineService

There may be a malfunction in the

� fuel injection system

� ignition system

� exhaust system

� fuel system

� Have the engine checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Driving with the message Check brake fluid level displayed can result in an ac-cident. Have your brake system checked im-mediately. Do not add brake fluid before

checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You could be seri-ously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

472

Practical hints

What to do if …


Ï Coolant levelStop car, switch engine off

The coolant is too hot.

Among other possible causes (the cooling fan could be malfunctioning), the poly-V-belt could be broken.

� Stop the vehicle in safe location or as soon as it safe to do so.



� Check the poly-V-belt.

If it is broken:

� Do not continue to drive. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If it is intact:

� Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit-ed Warranty.


473

Practical hints

What to do if …

During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).


� Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction display (� page 164).

If the temperature raises again:

� Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately.

Warning! G

Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by open-ing the engine hood. Stay away from the en-gine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

474

Practical hints

What to do if …


B Top up CoolantSee Oper. Manual

The coolant level is too low. � Add coolant (� page 382).

� If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.

! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage.

475

Practical hints

What to do if …

When the message Add 1 qt. engine oil at next refueling (Canada: 1 liter) appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the mini-mum level.

When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further.

Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil.For information on approved engine oils, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.


N Check eng. oil levelat next refueling

The engine oil level is too low. � Check the engine oil level (� page 381).

USA only:Add 1 qt. engine oilat next refueling

Canada only:Add 1 liter engine oilat next refueling

The engine oil level is too low. � Add engine oil (� page 382) and check the engine oil level (� page 381).

Engine oil levelcannot be measured

The measuring system is malfunctioning.

� Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

476

Practical hints

What to do if …

Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/conse-quence

Possible solution

N Engine oil levelStop car, turn engine off

There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.

� Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as it is safe to do so in a safe location.


� Add engine oil (� page 382) and check the en-gine oil level (� page 381).

Engine oil levelReduce oil level

You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the engine and/or the catalytic converter (gaso-line engine) or the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine).

� Have oil siphoned or drained off.

Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal.

Engine oil levelVisit workshop

The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.

� Check the engine oil level (� page 381) and add oil as required (� page 382).

� If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for possible leaks.

! The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis-played could result in serious engine damage

that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

477

Practical hints

What to do if …


c You are driving with one or more doors open.


� Close the door(s).

A Gas cap is open A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.

� Check the fuel cap (� page 375).

If it is not closed properly:

� Close the fuel cap.

If it is closed properly:

� Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

a You are driving with the hood or the tailgate open.

� Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as it is safe to do so in a safe location.

� Close the hood (� page 380) or the tailgate (� page 125).

You are trying to lock the vehicle with the KEYLESS-GO* function with a door or the tailgate open.

� Close all doors and/or the tailgate (� page 125).

478

Practical hints

What to do if …


F Keynot detected

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not recognized while the engine is running because

� the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not in the vehicle

� there is strong radio-frequency interference



� Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started again after the engine is stopped.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily not recognized.

� Change the position of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.

� Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary.

Keynot detected

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not recognized while the ignition is switched on (� page 41) and a door is opened or closed and the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not in the vehicle.

� Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

Otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked nor can the engine be started.

� Change the position of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.

479

Practical hints

What to do if …


F Key detectedin vehicle

A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the vehicle was detected while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.

� Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* out of the vehicle.

Remove key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.


You need a new key There is no additional code avail-able for SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

� Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Changekey batteries

The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis-charged.

� Replace the batteries (� page 506).

Don’t forgetyour key

This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the driver’s door is opened with the engine shut off and no SmartKey in the starter switch.This message is only a reminder.

� Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch (� page 42).

or

� Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving the vehicle.

480

Practical hints

What to do if …


. 3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical num-ber of LEDs have stopped work-ing.

� Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Active headlampsinoperative

The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps system is malfunctioning.


Brake lampLeft

The left brake lamp is malfunc-tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible (� page 515).

Brake lampRight

The right brake lamp is malfunc-tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.


Display malfunctionVisit workshop

The display for the lamps or the system is malfunctioning.


Front foglampLeft

The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.


Front foglampRight

The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.


481

Practical hints

What to do if …


. Parking lampFront Left

The front left parking lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.


Parking lampFront Right

The right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.


High beamLeft

The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Halogen headlamp:


Bi-Xenon* headlamp:


High beamRight

The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Halogen headlamp:


Bi-Xenon* headlamp:


482

Practical hints

What to do if …


. License plate lampLeft

The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.


License plate lampRight

The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.


AUTO Lightinoperative

The light sensor is malfunction-ing. The headlamps switch on automatically.


To switch off the headlamps (U. S. vehicles only):

� In the control system, set lamp operation to manual mode (� page 146).

� Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch (� page 145).

Low beamLeft

The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Halogen headlamp:


Bi-Xenon* headlamp:


483

Practical hints

What to do if …


. Low beamRight

The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Halogen headlamp:


Bi-Xenon* headlamp:


Marker lampFront Left

The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.


Marker lampFront Right

The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.


FoglampRear Left

The left rear fog lamp is malfunc-tioning.


Reverse lampLeft

The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.


Reverse lampRight

The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.


484

Practical hints

What to do if …


. Switch off lights You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch, opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on or removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the vehicle and left the headlamps on.

� Switch off the headlamps (� page 69).

Switch off lightsor remove key

You have opened the driver’s door while the exterior lamp switch is in position U and the SmartKey is still in the start-er switch.

The parking lamps are still on.

� Switch off the headlamps (� page 69).

or


Tail lampLeft

The left tail lamp is malfunction-ing. A substitute bulb is being used.


Tail lampRight

The right tail lamp is malfunc-tioning. A substitute bulb is be-ing used.


485

Practical hints

What to do if …


. Turn signalFront Left

The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.


Turn signalFront Right

The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.


Turn signalRear Left

The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.


Turn signalRear Right

The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.


Turn signalLeft mirror

The turn signal in the left exteri-or rear view mirror is malfunc-tioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working.


Turn signalRight mirror

The turn signal in the right exte-rior rear view mirror is malfunc-tioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working.


486

Practical hints

What to do if …


L Tele Aidinoperative

One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning.

� Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Tele Aidbattery

The emergency power battery for the Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehicle battery is also malfunctioning or drained, Tele Aid will not be operational.

� Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

t Functionunavailable

This display appears if button t or s on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone.

W Top upwasher fluid

The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.

� Add washer fluid (� page 384).

] Clean fuel filter � Have the fuel filter checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

» Replace air filter The air filter is clogged. � Have the air filter checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

487

Practical hints

What to do if …


H Tire pressureCheck tires

The pressure is too low in one or more tires.

� Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required.

Tire pressureCaution - tire defect

One or more tires are deflating. � Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.

� If necessary, change the wheel.

Caution - tire defect Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:

One or more tires are deflating.

The respective tire is shown in the multifunction display.

� Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.


Warning! G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

488

Practical hints

What to do if …


H Tire pressureCheck tires

The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value.


� Check and adjust tire pressure as required.


Check tires Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:

The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value.

The respective tire is shown in the multifunction display.


� Check and adjust tire pressure as required.


Warning! G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

489

Practical hints

What to do if …


n Level selectionnot permitted

You are driving too fast for the desired vehicle level.

� Reduce vehicle speed.

� Set the desired vehicle level again (� page 281).

You are towing a trailer or using acces-sories that are connected to the trailer power socket, e.g. a bicycle rack.

Leveling cancelled You have selected another vehicle level*.

p Reduce speed tounder 20 mph

You are driving too fast for the set vehi-cle level.

� Do not drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Visit workshop The air suspension functional only to a limited extent.

� Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) depending on the set vehicle level.

� Have the vehicle checked at an au-thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Door openVeh. lowering canceled

You have opened a door or the tailgate while the vehicle is being lowered.

490

Practical hints

What to do if …


Visit workshop The air suspension is malfunctioning. � Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) depending on the set vehi-cle level.

� Have the vehicle checked at an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Compressorcooling down

You have selected a higher vehicle level. Due to frequent level changes within a short period, the compressor must first cool down.

� Let the compressor cool until the message disappears.

The selected level will be set once the compressor has cooled.

! When the message Compressor cooling down appears in the multifunction display, driving is still possible. Keep in mind that the ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached, so you can damage the underbody of the vehicle. The selected level will be set once the compressor has cooled.

491

Practical hints

What to do if …


n Vehicle risingMax. 20 mph

The vehicle is adjusting to off-road level 3.


Max. 20 mph You are driving while using off-road level 3*. The message reminds you of the maximum speed at which you may drive with off-road level 3.


p Reduce speed tounder 20 mph

You are driving too fast for the set vehicle level.


being loweredMax. 20 mph

The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level 2.

� Do not drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) until the off-road level 2 is reached.

Warning! G

Adapt your driving style to the modified driv-ing conditions. Avoid extreme, quick steer-

ing movements. Please keep in mind that the driving characteristics of the vehicle have been modified. You should therefore

drive in off-road level 3 with particular cau-tion as it could otherwise lead to an accident and/or serious injury to you or others.

492

Practical hints

What to do if …


k Diff. lock system malfunct.Visit workshop

The differential locks* are malfunctioning.


� Have the vehicle checked at an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Diff. Lock Systemoverheated. Wait briefly.

The differential locks* are too hot and have been deactivated as a re-sult.

� Continue driving with added caution. The lock function is unavailable.

� Wait for the lock system to cool down.

The differential locks will be reactivat-ed as soon as they have cooled off.

m Stop vehicleEngage parking brake

A shifting procedure could not be completed. LOW RANGE* is in neu-tral position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels.

� Do not attempt to continue driving. You could otherwise damage the vehicle’s drivetrain.

� Let the vehicle coast to a halt.

� Engage the parking brake.

� Perform the shifting procedure again (� page 204).

493

Practical hints

What to do if …


m Stop vehicleEngage parking brake

The LOW RANGE system* could only partially carry out the shifting proce-dure or it could not carry out the shifting procedure at all. The system is in idle mode. No power is being transmitted to the drive wheels.

� Do not continue driving.

� Carefully let the vehicle coast to a stop.

� Firmly depress the parking brake.

� Shift gears again in HIGH RANGE or LOW RANGE (� page 204).

Visit workshopIf parked engage pk. brake

The LOW RANGE system* is malfunctioning.


� Engage the parking brake if parked.

� Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possi-ble.

max. speed 25 mph Speed too high for shifting proce-dure.

� Continue driving more slowly.

max. speed 40 mph Speed too high for shifting proce-dure.

� Continue driving more slowly.

shift brieflyinto N

You have reduced engine speed. You may now carry out a shifting proce-dure.

� Briefly shift automatic transmission to position N.

Shifting procress canceledReactivate

The shifting procedure was not car-ried out.

� Repeat the shifting procedure if desired.

494

Practical hints


�
Where will I find ...? First aid kit
The first aid kit is located on the driver’s side in the cargo compartment behind the cover.

1 Lock2 Cover in left side trim panel

� Turn lock 1 90° in direction of arrow.

� Fold down cover 2.

The first aid kit can be removed.

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is stored under the cargo compartment floor.

The vehicle tool kit includes:

� Towing eye bolt

� Wheel wrench

� Alignment bolt

� Vehicle jack

� Fuse chart

� Spare fuses

� Fuse extractor

� Collapsible wheel chock

� Wheel bolts for spare wheel

1 Cargo compartment floor, lowered2 Handle cover

� Open the tailgate (� page 124).

� Push in handle cover 2 as indicated by arrow and pull handle.

� Lift cargo compartment floor 1.

i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing/expired items.

��

495

Practical hints


�

3 Securing hook

� Release securing hook 3 (located be-low the floor handle) from holder.

3 Securing hook4 Cargo compartment floor, raised5 Upper cargo compartment lip

� Engage securing hook 3 on upper cargo compartment lip 5.

You can now access the vehicle tool kit. To remove the vehicle tool kit storage well casing, proceed as described on (� page 499).

6 Alignment bolt7 Towing eye bolt8 Wheel wrench9 Velcro strapa Vehicle jackb Wheel bolts for 18" light alloy rims or

Minispare wheelc Collapsible wheel chockd Spare fuses, fuse chart, fuse extractore Vehicle tool kit storage well casing

� To remove vehicle jack a, loosen vel-cro strap 9.

! With the cargo compartment cover blind installed behind the third-row seats (� page 312), disengage cargo compartment cover blind and flip it forward. Otherwise the strap of the securing hook could damage the cargo compartment cover blind.

�

496

Practical hints


Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located underneath the cargo compartment floor.

Storage position

� Remove vehicle jack from its storage compartment (� page 496).

� Turn crank handle in the direction of ar-row as far as it will go.

! Vehicles with factory-mounted running-boards*:Your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type jack (located under the cargo compartment floor) designed for use with factory-mounted running boards. Only use this jack when jacking up vehicles with factory-mounted running boards as otherwise the vehicle’s underbody can be damaged. See separate instructions for scis-sors-type jack.

! To prevent damage, always disengage the strap of the securing hook and lower the cargo compartment floor (� page 495) before closing the tailgate.

Warning! G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.

Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on a level surface.

Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto jackstands of sufficient capacity before working under the vehicle.

��

497

Practical hints


�

Operational position

� Turn crank handle clockwise.

Before storing the vehicle jack in its stor-age compartment:

� The vehicle jack should be fully col-lapsed.

� The handle must be folded in (storage position).

Setting up the collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to ad-ditionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while changing the wheel.

1 Tilt the plate upward2 Fold the lower plate outward3 Insert the plate

� Tilt both plates upward 1.

� Fold the lower plate outward 2.

� Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of base plate 3.

For information on where to place wheel chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lift-ing the vehicle” (� page 524).

�

498

Practical hints


Spare wheel The Minispare wheel is located underneath the cargo compartment floor (� page 495).

Removing Minispare wheel

� Remove the jack from the vehicle tool kit (� page 496).

1 Minispare wheel2 Retaining screw3 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing

� Loosen retaining screw 2 by turning it counterclockwise.

� Remove vehicle tool kit storage well casing 3.

You can now access the Minispare wheel.

� Remove Minispare wheel 1.

Warning! G

The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-ingly.

The Minispare wheel is for temporary use only. When driving with a Minispare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the Minispare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel.

Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted.

Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minispare wheel is mounted.

i For information on how to mount the Minispare wheel, see “Mounting the spare wheel” (� page 524).

i If retaining screw 2 does not come loose, turn vehicle tool kit storage well casing 3 slightly counterclockwise. Retaining screw 2 should then come loose easily.

499

Practical hints


Unlocking the vehicle

If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the driver’s door using the mechanical key.

Removing the mechanical key

1 Mechanical key locking tab2 Mechanical key

� Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow.

The mechanical key 2 comes out.

� Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing.

Unlocking the driver’s door

� Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s door lock until it stops.

� Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock-wise to position 1 and hold it there.

� Pull the door handle until the locking knob moves up (� page 122).

The driver’s door is unlocked.

� Pull the door handle once more to open the driver’s door.

i Unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

1 Unlocking

2 Mechanical key

500

Practical hints


Locking the vehicle

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, lock the vehi-cle carrying out the following steps.

� Close the front passenger door, the rear right door and the tailgate.

� Open the driver’s door and the rear left door.

� Press the central locking switch on the driver’s door (� page 130).

The locking knobs of the front passen-ger door and the rear doors move down.

If the vehicle battery is disconnected or drained:

� Press down the locking knobs of the front passenger door and the rear doors manually.


� Close the driver’s door.

� Enter the vehicle through the rear left door.

� Press down the locking knob of the driver’s door.


� Close the rear left door.

The vehicle is locked.

Fuel filler flap


The fuel filler flap release is located behind a cover in the right side trim panel of the cargo compartment.

1 Lock2 Cover

! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make sure to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you before proceeding with the next step. The next step will lock the vehicle.

i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap. ��

501

Practical hints


�
� Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock 1 (� page 501).
� Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90° in direction of arrow.

� Remove cover 2 (� page 501).

3 Fuel filler flap release

� Pull red fuel filler flap release 3 in direction of arrow.

The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

� Open the fuel filler flap (� page 375).

�

502

Practical hints

Opening/closing in an emergency

�
Opening/closing in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.

The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located behind a cover on the overhead control panel.

1 Cover



� Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (� page 70).

� Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver’s door can then be closed again.

� Press on cover 1 at the position indi-cated by the arrow.

� Take off cover 1.

2 Crank

� Take crank 2 out of the Operator’s Manual pouch.

� Insert crank 2 into hole.

� Turn crank 2 clockwise to

� slide sunroof closed

� raise sunroof at the rear

� Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to

� slide sunroof open

� lower sunroof at the rear

i The hole may be covered by a noise reduction padding. You will then have to push the crank through the padding at the perforated mark.

i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized if it has been operated manually (� page 255).

503

Practical hints


If the active head restraints have been trig-gered in a rear-end collision, the active head restraints must be reset. Otherwise, the active head restraints cannot offer any additional protection in the event of anoth-er rear-end collision.

You can tell that the head restraints have been activated when they have been moved forward and cannot be adjusted.

� Take the reset tool out of the Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature pouch.

1 Reset tool2 Active head restraint

1 Reset tool2 Active head restraint3 Rectangular opening

i For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

You will find the reset tool for manually operating the active head restraints in the Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature pouch.

Warning! G

For safety reasons, have the active head re-straints checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center after a rear-end collision.

Warning! G

When pushing back the head restraint cush-ion, take care that your fingers do not be-come caught between the head restraint cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may lead to injury.

! Be careful not to damage upholstery.

504

Practical hints


� Guide reset tool 1 into rectangular opening 3 of active head restraint 2.

� Press reset tool 1 downward in direction of arrow until you hear the head restraint release mechanism audibly disengage.

� Pull out reset tool 1.

� Firmly press the active head restraint cushion backward towards the head restraint cover in direction of arrow until it engages.

� Repeat this procedure on the active head restraint for the second front seat.

� After resetting the active head restraints store reset tool 1 in the Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature pouch.

For information on active head restraints, see “Active head restraint” (� page 92).

For information on head restraint adjust-ment, see “Seats” (� page 45).

505

Practical hints


If the batteries in the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis-charged, the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.

� Remove mechanical key 1 from the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (� page 500).

1 Mechanical key2 Battery compartment

� Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.

� Press mechanical key 1 in direction of arrow.

The battery compartment 2 is unlatched.

� Pull battery compartment 2 out of the SmartKey housing.

Warning! G

Keep the batteries out of reach of children.

If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately.

i When inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint.

i When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries.

The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

506

Practical hints


3 Batteries4 Contact spring

� Pull out batteries 3.

� Using a line-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under contact springs 4 with the positive terminal (+) side facing up.

� Return battery compartment 2 into housing until it locks into place.

� Slide mechanical key 1 back into the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

� Check the operation of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

507

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Bulbs

Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-semblies are in good working order at all times.

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for headlamp adjustment.

i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid-ity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging.

i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when the following lamps malfunction:

� Turn signal lamps

� Brake lamps

� Parking lamps

� Tail lamps

Read and observe the messages in the multi-function display (� page 481).

508

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Front lamps

Rear lamps

Lamp Type

1 Parking and standing lamp

W 5 W

2 Headlamps:High beam/high beam flasher H7 (55 W)

Bi-Xenon headlamps*:High beam/high beam flasher spot lamp H7 (55 W)

3 Headlamps:Low beam H7 (55 W)

Bi-Xenon headlamps*:Low beam1

1 Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Do not re-place the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

D2S-35 W

4 Additional turn signal lamp

LED

5 Side marker lamp WY 5 W

Lamp Type

6 Turn signal lamp 3457 AK S-8(30/2.2 cp bulb)

7 Front fog lamp H11 (55 W)

Corner-illuminating front fog lamp* H11 (55 W)

Lamp Type

8 High mounted brake lamp LED

9 Backup lamp P 21 W

a Tail, brake, parking, standing, side marker lamp

P 21/4 W

b Turn signal lamp PY 21 W

c Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)

P 21/4 W

d License plate lamps C 5 W

509

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Notes on bulb replacement

� Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating.

� Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits.

� Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs.

� Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease.

� If the newly installed bulb does not come on, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:

� the additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors

� the high mounted brake lamp

� the Bi-Xenon* low beam lamps

� the Bi-Xenon high beam flasher spot-light*

Warning! G

Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before chang-ing a bulb.

Keep bulbs out of reach of children.

Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you:

� touch or move it when hot

� drop the bulb

� scratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi-cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by a an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i Replacing the bulbs for the front lamps is a technically complex process. For your conve-nience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly.

510

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Replacing bulbs for front lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the following first:

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (� page 145).


1 Housing cover for low beam halogen headlamp

2 Housing cover for high beam halogen bulb (high beam and high beam flasher)

3 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb

4 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb5 Bulb socket for side marker lamp bulb

Low beam bulb (halogen headlamp)

1 Low beam headlamp cover

2 Bulb socket for low beam headlamp

511

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

� Turn cover 1 counterclockwise.

� Remove cover 1.

� Turn bulb socket 2 counterclockwise.

� Pull bulb socket 2 out of the headlamp housing.

� Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb socket 2.

� Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb socket 2.

� Insert bulb socket 2 into the headlamp housing.

� Turn bulb socket 2 clockwise until it engages.

� Place cover 1 on the opening in the headlamp housing.

� Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag-es.

Bi-Xenon* low beam/high beam headlamp

High beam bulb (halogen headlamp)

1 High beam headlamp cover

2 Bulb socket for high beam headlamp

Warning! G

Do not remove the low beam/high beam cover for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon* lamps, it is danger-ous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

512

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

� Turn cover 1 counterclockwise.

� Remove cover 1.



� Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb socket 2.

� Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb socket 2.



� Place cover 1 on the opening in the headlamp housing.

� Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag-es.

Turn signal lamp bulb

1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp



� Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb socket 1.

� Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb socket 1.



Parking and standing lamp bulb

� Turn bulb socket 3 (� page 511) counterclockwise.


� Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3.

� Insert the new bulb into bulb socket 3.



513

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Side marker lamp bulb

� Turn bulb socket 5 (� page 511) counterclockwise.


� Pull the side marker bulb out of bulb socket 5.

� Insert the new side marker bulb into bulb socket 5.



Front fog lamp bulbs

Removing front fog lamp cover:

1 Cover2 Front fog lamp or corner-illuminating

front fog lamp*

� Insert a suitable object (e.g. screwdriv-er) at point indicated by the arrow and pry out cover 1.

Cover 1 is released.

� Swing cover 1 outwards and take it off.

You can now access the front fog lamp.

3 Retaining screws

� Turn retaining screws 3 counterclock-wise.

� Remove front fog lamp 2 out of the bumper.

� Pull electrical connector off.

! If not done carefully and properly, damage to the bumper can result. We therefore recom-mend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

514

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

4 Bulb socket of front fog lamp bulb


� Pull bulb socket 4 out of the housing.

� Pull the front fog lamp bulb out of bulb socket 4.

� Insert the new front fog lamp bulb into bulb socket 4.

� Insert bulb socket 4 into the housing.


� Plug in the electrical connector.

� Insert front fog lamp 2 back into bumper.

� Fasten retaining screws 3.

� Reinsert cover 1 and press it in until it engages.

Additional turn signal lamps bulbs

The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.

If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func-tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re-placed. Have the turn signal unit replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp, do the following first:

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (� page 145).

Tail lamp unit


i To access the bulb socket, you have to remove the cover in the corresponding side trim panel of the cargo compartment.

515

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Opening the side trim panels

Opening the driver’s side trim panel:

1 Lock2 Cover in left side trim panel

� Turn lock 1 90° in direction of arrow.

� Fold down cover 2.

1 Lock2 Storage compartment

� Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock 1.


� Remove storage compartment 2.

Opening the passenger side trim panel:

1 Lock2 Cover in right side trim panel

� Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock 1.


� Remove cover 2.

516

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Replacing bulbs

1 Bulb socket2 Clamp

� Press and hold clamps 2.

� Pull bulb socket 1 outwards.

Bulb socket

1 Backup lamp2 Tail lamp, brake lamp, parking and

standing lamp3 Tail lamp, brake lamp, parking and

standing lamp, side marker lamp4 Turn signal lamp5 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)

� Depending on which bulb needs to be replaced, turn the respective bulb 1 - 5 counterclockwise.

� Pull the bulb out of the housing.

� Insert the new bulb into the bulb sock-et.

� Turn the bulb in the bulb socket clock-wise carefully.

� Insert the bulb socket into the rear lamp.

� Align bulb socket and press bulb sock-et into rear lamp until it audibly engag-es.

� Make sure bulb socket is attached properly.

� Close the respective cover in the cargo compartment.

� Close the tailgate (� page 125).

517

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

License plate lamp

1 License plate lamp cover2 Screws

� Loosen screws 2.

� Remove license plate lamp cover 1.

� Replace the tubular bulb.

� Reinstall license plate lamp cover 1.

� Retighten screws 2.

Adjusting headlamp aim

V Vertical centerlineH Headlamp mounting height, measured

from the center

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. To check and readjust a head-lamp, follow the steps described:

� Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test screen or wall.

� Switch the headlamps on (� page 145).

If the beam does not show a beam pattern as indicated in the figure left, then follow the steps below:

� Open hood (� page 379).

i High beam adjustments simultaneously aim the low beam.

Vehicle should have a normal tailgate load.

518

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Example headlamp, driver’s side

2 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw3 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw

� Always turn adjustment screws 2 and 3 simultaneously for vertical ad-justment until the headlamp is adjust-ed as shown 1 (� page 518). Turn clockwise for upward movement and counterclockwise for downward move-ment.

Graduations:

screw 2: 0.50° pitch

screw 3: 0.67° pitch

The left and right headlamps must be ad-justed individually.

i If it is not possible to obtain a proper head-lamp adjustment, have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

519

Practical hints


Front wiper blades

Removing



� Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (� page 44).

� Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage.

1 Wiper blade2 Cover3 Attachment4 Tab5 Removing

� Press tabs 4 together and tilt wiper blade 1 to detach tabs 4 on both recesses of attachment 3.

Wiper blade 1 is released on one end.

� Maintaining its tilted position, slide wiper blade 1 out of attachment 3 in direction of arrow 5.

Warning! G

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

Warning! G

Wiper blades are components that are sub-ject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be properly wiped. As a result, you may not be able to observe surrounding traffic condi-tions and could cause an accident.

! Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward.

Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind-shield glass without a wiper blade inserted.

Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage.

For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They could tear.

520

Practical hints


Installing

1 Installing2 Tab3 Attachment4 Guide tab5 Cover

� Slide the wiper blade into attachment 3 in direction of arrow 1.

� Make sure guide tab 4 will be placed under cover 5 when fully inserting the wiper blade into attachment.

� Let tab 2 latch into both recesses of attachment 3.

� Check if the wiper blade is securely fastened.

� Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield.

Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm when folding it back.

Rear wiper blade

Warning! G

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the rear window.

Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the rear window glass without a wiper blade inserted.

Make sure the wiper blade is properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause rear window damage.

For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

521

Practical hints


Removing



� Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (� page 44).

� Fold wiper arm 1 away from the rear window until it engages.

1 Wiper arm2 Wiper blade

� Turn wiper blade 2 to form a right angle with wiper arm 1 as shown.

� Hold wiper arm 1 and disengage wip-er blade 2 by carefully sliding it in direction of arrow.

� Remove wiper blade 2.

Installing

1 Wiper arm2 Wiper blade

� Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper arm 1.

� Hold wiper arm 1 and engage wiper blade 2 by pushing it in direction of arrow until it locks into place.

� Check whether the wiper blade is securely fastened.

� Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear window.

Make sure to hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back.! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It

could tear.

522

Practical hints

Flat tire

�
Flat tire Preparing the vehicle
� Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when possible.

� Turn on the hazard warning flasher (� page 151).

� Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight-ahead position.

� Set the parking brake (� page 60).

� Set the automatic transmission to park position P (� page 194).




� Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* button once (� page 70).

� Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey re-moved from the starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again.


� Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway.

Warning! G

The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-ingly.

The Minispare wheel is for temporary use only. When driving with a Minispare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the Minispare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel.

Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted.

Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minispare wheel is mounted.

Warning! G

Your vehicle is equipped with air suspen-sion. Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate while mounting a spare wheel. The vehicle could rise or lower to a previously se-lected level. You or others could be injured as a result.

i Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

523

Practical hints

Flat tire

Mounting the spare wheel

Preparing the vehicle

� Prepare the vehicle as described (� page 523).

� Take the wheel wrench, the collapsible wheel chock, and the vehicle jack out of the cargo compartment (� page 495).

� Take the Minispare wheel out of the cargo compartment (� page 499).

Lifting the vehicle � Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects.

One collapsible wheel chock is includ-ed with the vehicle tool kit (� page 495). For information on set-ting up the collapsible wheel chock, see (� page 498).

When changing wheel on a level surface:

� Place one wheel chock in front of and another sizeable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.

Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill, place the wheel chock and another sizeable object as follows:

� Place the wheel chock and another sizeable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on.

! Vehicles with factory-mounted running-boards*:Your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type jack (located under the cargo compartment floor) designed for use with factory-mounted running boards. Only use this jack when jacking up vehicles with factory-mounted running boards as otherwise the vehicle’s underbody can be damaged. See separate instructions for scissors-type jack.

Warning! G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.

Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up brack-et. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

524

Practical hints

Flat tire

1 Wheel wrench

� On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wheel wrench 1).

The jack take-up brackets are located di-rectly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings.

2 Take-up bracket3 Jack4 Crank

� Place jack 3 on firm ground.

� Position jack 3 under the take-up bracket 2 so that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an in-cline.

� Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack 3 is fully seated in take-up bracket 2 and the jack base evenly meets the ground.

� Continue to turn crank 4 until the wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

! Do not position the jack on the body of the vehicle, as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

! Vehicles with factory-mounted running-boards*:Your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type jack (located under the cargo compartment floor) designed for use with factory-mounted running boards. Only use this jack when jacking up vehicles with factory-mounted running boards as otherwise the vehicle’s underbody can be damaged. See separate instructions for scissors-type jack. ��

525

Practical hints

Flat tire

�
Removing the wheel
1 Alignment bolt

� Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove it.

� Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt 1 supplied with the tool kit (� page 495).

� Remove the remaining bolts.

� Remove the wheel.

Mounting the new wheel

1 Wheel bolt for 19" and 20" light alloy wheels

2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel (locat-ed in vehicle tool kit (� page 495))

� Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.

Warning! G

The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.

� Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.

� Never lie down under the raised vehicle.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This could result in damage to the bolts and wheel hub threads.

! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mount-ing the Minispare wheel. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare wheel will damage the vehicle’s brakes.

�

526

Practical hints

Flat tire

� Guide spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on the wheel hub.

� Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.

� Unscrew the alignment bolt.

� Insert the remaining wheel bolt and tighten it slightly.

! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.

Warning! G

Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.

Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.

Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance.

Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.

Warning! G

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.

Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack.

527

Practical hints

Flat tire

Lowering the vehicle

� Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-ly on its own weight.

� Remove the jack.

1-5 Wheel bolts

� Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

� Store jack and all other vehicle tool kit items back into the storage well.

Warning! G

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

i The removed road wheel cannot be stored in the spare wheel well under the cargo compart-ment floor, but should be transported in the car-go compartment wrapped in a protective cover.

Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS*:Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni-tor until a full size wheel/tire with functioning sensor has been placed back into service on the vehicle.

528

Practical hints

Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)

�
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only) Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty is not recommended. Otherwise, air may be sucked into the fuel system. If this happens, the ? malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on and the engine may not start immediately after refueling the vehicle.
After refueling:


The gear position indicator in the multi-function display should be on P.


� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 for at least 10 seconds (� page 41).

� Return the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 (� page 41).

� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (� page 41) and hold it there for a maximum of 40 seconds or until the engine runs surge-free.

If the engine does not start:

� Wait for approximately 2 minutes.

� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (� page 41) and hold it there for a maximum of 40 seconds or until the engine runs surge-free.

If the engine still does not start, do not make any further attempts to start the engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light truck Center or call Roadside Assistance (� page 336).

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the starter switch (� page 43).

i When the ? malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) has been illuminated for the above condition, it will remain illuminated until the engine was cycled on and off four times in a row.

529

Practical hints

Battery

The battery is located under the front passenger seat.

The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated ser-vice life.

If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.

When replacing the battery, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center about steps you need to observe.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends to have the battery replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Observe all safety instructions and precau-tions when handling automotive batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling batteries. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Wear suitable protective cloth-ing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard.

Wear eye protection.

Rinse any acid spills immediate-ly with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary.

Keep children away.

Follow the instructions in this Operator’s Manual.

530

Practical hints

Battery

! The battery is a valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as “fleece” bat-tery. Such batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps and the battery cover is non-removable. Do not attempt to open the bat-tery as otherwise the battery will be damaged.

Even though VRLA batteries do not require top-ping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be opened to check the electrolyte level, the bat-tery condition must be checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition test-ing intervals.

As with any other battery, the battery may dis-charge if the vehicle is not operated for an ex-tended period of time. You can connect a battery maintenance charge unit tested and approved for use on your vehicle model or disconnect the battery to prevent battery discharge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for more information.

! The factory-equipped VRLA battery is leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement that has the same security features and is of identical size, voltage, and capacity as the factory-equipped battery.

The battery, the battery ventilation hose (� page 536) and the lateral plug (� page 536) must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.

Warning! G

Jump starting must only be done using the jump-start contacts located in the engine compartment (� page 538).

Warning! G

Failure to follow these instructions can re-sult in severe injury or death.

Observe all safety instructions and precau-tions when handling automotive batteries (� page 530).

Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.

531

Practical hints

Battery

Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and reconnecting the battery

Step 1 (Disconnecting)

� Set the automatic transmission to position P (� page 194).

� Firmly depress the parking brake (� page 68).


� Leave the ignition switched on (� page 42).

! Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged.

Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for further information.

Warning! G

Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit.

Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.

Warning! G

Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and reconnecting the battery is a complicated and technically demanding procedure that also requires safety precautions to avoid the risk of injury. We strongly recommend that it be performed by a qualified technician or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center only. Please read the instructions fully before beginning operation and only undertake it if you feel fully capable of performing all of the tasks involved as de-scribed in these instructions. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries (� page 530). Performing the tasks involved incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle and impair the operating safety of the vehicle, and/or cause severe injury to you or others.

i With a disconnected battery you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button will have no effect.

i If your battery is discharged, the vehicle must be jump started (� page 538) using the jump start contacts in the engine compartment, or an accessory battery charge unit* approved by Mercedes-Benz must be connected using the jump start contacts in the engine compartment (see separate instructions for the accessory bat-tery charge unit*) before any of the following steps can be performed. If the battery cannot be jumped or charged, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

532

Practical hints

Battery

� Switch off all electrical consumers.

� Read and observe safety instructions and precautions (� page 530).

� Open the front passenger door.

� Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position (� page 46).


1 Battery cover

� Enter the rear passenger compartment and remove main battery cover 1.


2 Perforated floor carpet

� Cut the floor carpet 2 along the dotted white line (see illustration) until you reach the perforated part. Start cutting at the point indicated by the arrows. Cut carpet using a sharp object (knife etc.).

� Enter the front passenger compart-ment.

� Move the front passenger seat to the most rearward position (� page 46).

i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you had the vehicle jump started:

� Leave the engine running.

� Complete step 1, starting with switching off all electrical consumers.

� Continue with step 2.

� When the front passenger seat is in the most forward position, turn off the engine.

i Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so.

��

533

Practical hints

Battery

�

2 Perforated floor carpet, unfolded

� Fold the floor carpet piece 2 in direction of the arrow.

� Move the front passenger seat to the most forward and upward position again (� page 46).


� Remove SmartKey from starter switch.


� Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (Turn off the engine or all electrical systems using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. Open the driver’s door. With the driver’s door open, the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch).

� Enter the rear passenger compartment again.


3 Air channel4 Clip with pin insert

� Pull pin out of clip 4 in direction of arrow.

� Pull clip with pin 4 outwards.

� Remove air channel 3 by pulling it out in direction of arrow.

i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you had the vehicle jump started, turn off the engine.

�

534

Practical hints

Battery


5 Protection cover6 Battery

� Unclip protection cover 5 from battery 6 and remove it.


7 Positive terminal8 Negative terminal

� Disconnect battery negative lead 8 from negative terminal.

� Remove positive terminal cover.

� Disconnect the battery positive lead 7.

Step 7 (Removing)

9 Battery ventilation hosea Attachment nutb Mounting

� Remove the battery ventilation hose 9 by pulling it out.

� Unfasten and remove attachment nuts a.

� Remove mounting b.

535

Practical hints

Battery

Step 8 (Removing)

c Battery

� Tilt the battery c with the negative terminal side upwards.

� Take out the battery maintaining its tilted position in the direction of the arrow.

Step 9 (Reinstalling)

� Carry out step 8 in reverse order (� page 536).

Battery, shown removed for illustration

9 Battery ventilation hosed Vent plug

� Carry out step 10 to reconnect the battery (� page 536).

� Follow steps 5 to 1 in reverse order to completely reinstall the battery (� page 535) to (� page 532).

Step 10 (Reconnecting)

� If the battery has been removed, first carry out step 8 in reverse order (� page 536).


� Make sure all electrical consumers are turned off.

� Make sure the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch.


� Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (Open the driver’s door. With the driver’s door open, the vehicle’s on-board elec-tronics have status 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch (� page 41)).

! The battery, the battery ventilation hose 9 and the lateral plug d (� page 536) must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.

536

Practical hints

Battery

� Connect the positive lead to the posi-tive terminal and fasten it’s cover (� page 535).

� Connect the negative lead to the nega-tive terminal (� page 535).

Charging the battery

If the battery is discharged, the battery can be charged using the jump-start contacts located in the engine compartment (� page 539).

� Charge the battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

! Never invert the terminal connections!

i The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):

� Set the clock (� page 176).

Vehicles with COMAND system with naviga-tion module*: Time and date are set auto-matically.

� Synchronize the door windows (� page 251).

� Synchronize the power tilt/sliding sunroof* (� page 255).

� Synchronize the power folding exterior rear view mirrors* (� page 212).

Warning! G

Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may escape during charg-ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.

An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger.

537

Practical hints

Jump starting

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the bat-tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow-ing:

� Jump starting should only be performed using the jump-start contacts located in the engine compartment (� page 539).

� Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter1 are cold.

� Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.

� Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start-ing with a higher voltage battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical system, which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

� Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

� Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when the engine is started or running.

Warning! G

Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.

Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.

Read all instructions before proceeding.

1 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.

! Do not tow-start the vehicle.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.

If the engine does not run after several unsuc-cessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalyt-ic converter1.

Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation.

Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still at-tached to a battery.

538

Practical hints

Jump starting

The jump-start contacts are located in the engine compartment.

1 Negative (-) terminal2 Positive (+) terminal3 Positive terminal cover

� Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.

� Turn off all electrical consumers.

� Apply parking brake (� page 68).

� Set automatic transmission to position P (� page 194).


� Remove cover from negative terminal 1.

� Flip up cover 3 of positive terminal 2 in direction of arrow.

1 Negative terminal of discharged battery

2 Positive terminal of discharged battery4 Positive terminal of charged battery5 Negative terminal of charged battery

� Connect positive terminal 2 and 4 with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 4 first.

� Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed.

� Connect negative terminals 1 and 5 of the batteries with the second jumper cable. Clamp the cable to negative terminal 5 of the charged battery first.

� Start the engine of the disabled vehi-cle.

You can now turn on the electrical consum-ers. Do not switch on the headlamps under any circumstances.

� Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 1 and 5 and then from positive terminals 2 and 4.

You can now switch on the headlamps.

� Have the battery checked at the near-est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke.Observe all safety instructions and precau-tions when handling automotive batteries (� page 530).

! Never invert the terminal connections!

539

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.

If circumstances do not permit the recom-mended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recom-mended towing methods can be employed.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).

! Do not tow-start the vehicle.

! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment, with the SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0.

Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports.

To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Use the towing eyes.

Switch off the ESP® (� page 107) and the automatic central locking (� page 130).

! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so could damage the transfer case, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground.

Warning! G

If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if

� the engine will not run

� there is a malfunction in the brake system

� there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system

as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.

Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the starter switch is in position 2 (� page 42).

540

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

Warning! G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground:

� The automatic transmission must be in position N (� page 193).

� The starter switch must be in position 2 (� page 41).

Keep in mind that it is important that the starter switch is in position 2. As soon as the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch or the engine is turned off with KEYLESS-GO* and you open the driver’s door or the front passenger door, the auto-matic transmission will shift to park position P, see “Starter switch positions” (� page 41).

� The battery must be connected and charged.

Otherwise, the starter switch cannot be set to position 2 and the automatic transmission will remain locked in position P.

! Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.

i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, note the following:

With the automatic central locking activated and the starter switch in position 2 (� page 41), the vehicle doors lock if a wheel is turning at a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or above.

To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (� page 130).

i To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning flasher in use, set the starter switch to position 2 and activate combination switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate.

Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.

541

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

Installing towing eye bolt

Depending on whether you are towing a vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye bolt can be screwed into threaded holes which are located behind covers on the right-hand side of each bumper.

1 Cover

1 Cover

Removing cover

� Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the arrow.

� Lift off cover 1 to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt.

Installing towing eye bolt

� Take the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (� page 495).

� Screw towing eye bolt in clockwise to its stop and tighten with wheel wrench.

Removing towing eye bolt

� Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock-wise with wheel wrench.

� Unscrew towing eye bolt.

� Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench back into the vehicle tool kit (� page 495).

Warning! G

In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury, use extreme caution when removing the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe is extremely hot.

i The cover 1 is secured to the bumper by a plastic cord.

542

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

Installing cover

� Engage cover 1 at top and press at bottom.

Stranded vehicle

Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be done with the greatest of care, especial-ly if the vehicle is heavily loaded.

Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or diago-nally, since it could result in damage to the chassis alignment.

Never try to free a vehicle that is still cou-pled to a trailer.

If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer hitch receiver should be pulled backward in its own previously made tracks.

543

Practical hints

Fuses

The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to switch off malfunctioning power circuits.

If a fuse is blown, the components and sys-tems secured by that fuse will stop operat-ing.

If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the cause determined and rectified by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

The following aids are available to help you replace fuses. They are included with the vehicle tool kit (� page 495):

� Fuse chart

The fuse chart explains the fuse alloca-tion and fuse amperages.

� Spare fuses

� Fuse extractor

The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes:

� Fuse box in engine compartment (� page 545)

� Fuse box in cargo compartment (� page 545)

� Fuse box in passenger compartment (� page 546)

Before replacing fuses:

� Apply parking brake (� page 68).


The gear position indicator in the multi-function display should be on P.

� Turn off all electrical consumers.




� Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey re-moved from the starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again.

Warning! G

Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question and do not attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Using other than ap-proved fuses or using repaired or bridged fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire, and/or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems. Have the cause determined and remedied by an au-thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro-priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage recommended in the fuse chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.

544

Practical hints

Fuses

Fuse box in engine compartment

The fuse box is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment.


Fuse box GL 450 (GL 320 CDI similar)

1 Fuse box cover2 Clamps

� Pull clamps 2 in direction of arrow.

� Lift fuse box cover 1 up.

� Install fuse box cover in reverse order.

� Close the hood after checking or re-placing fuses (� page 380).

Fuse box in cargo compartment

The fuse box is located in the cargo com-partment behind the passenger side trim panel.

1 Lock2 Cover

Removing/installing cover


� Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock 1 (� page 545).


� Remove cover 2.

� Install cover 2 in reverse order.

! The fuse box cover must be installed properly to prevent moisture and/or dirt from entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse operation.

545

Practical hints

Fuses

Fuse box in passenger compartment

The fuse box is located behind a cover in the dashboard on the front passenger side.

1 Cover

Opening

� Open the front passenger door.

� Open the glove box (� page 316).

� Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into the edge of the cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow.

� Loosen cover 1 from dashboard using lever.

� Using your hands, pull cover 1 out and remove.

Closing

� Hook cover 1 into the opening at the front.

� Press cover 1 back on until it engag-es.

Emergency engine shut-down

If the engine cannot be turned off as de-scribed in the “Getting started” section (� page 69), you may use the following emergency procedure.

� Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit (� page 496).

� Open the fuse box in engine compart-ment (� page 545).

� Use the fuse extractor to remove fuse 120. Find its location in the fuse chart.

! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw-driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dash-board, as this could damage the fuse box cover or the dashboard.

546

547

Technical data

Parts service

Warranty coverage

Identification labels

Layout of poly-V-belt drive

Engine

Rims and tires

Electrical system

Main Dimensions

Weights

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

Technical data

The “Technical data” section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle.

Parts service

548

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts required for mainte-nance and repair work. In addition, strate-gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service.

More than 300000 different parts for Mercedes-Benz models are available.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subject-ed to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, man-ufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be installed.

! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.

Technical data

Warranty coverage

�
Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will exchange or repair any defec-tive parts originally installed on the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the follow-ing warranties:
� New Vehicle Limited Warranty

� Emission System Warranty

� Emission Performance Warranty

� California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet

Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

549

Technical data


1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar)

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can be found in the following locations:

� on the certification label

� embossed underneath the passenger-side second-row rear seat (� page 551)

� on the lower edge of the windshield (� page 551)

Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)

2 Paintwork code3 VIN

Example certification label (Canada vehicles)

2 Paintwork code3 VIN

i Data shown on certification label are for illustration purpose only. These data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration. Refer to certification label on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

550

Technical data


Second-row seat

4 VIN

� Fold the carpet forwards.

The VIN 4 is now visible.

5 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards

6 Engine number (engraved on engine)7 Vacuum line routing diagram label8 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle

identification and engine numbers.

551

Technical data

Layout of poly-V-belt drive

GL 320 CDI

1 Coolant pump2 Idler pulley3 Automatic belt tensioner4 Power steering pump5 Air conditioning compressor6 Crankshaft7 Idler pulley8 Generator (alternator)

GL 450

1 Idler pulley2 Idler pulley3 Automatic belt tensioner4 Power steering pump5 Air conditioning compressor6 Crankshaft7 Coolant pump8 Generator (alternator)

552

Technical data

Engine

�
Engine
Model GL 320 CDI (164.8221)

1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.

GL 450 (164.8711)

Engine 642 273

Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke engine 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

No. of cylinders 6 8

Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm) 3.66 in (92.90 mm)

Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm) 3.38 in (86.00 mm)

Total piston displacement 182 cu in (2987 cm3) 285 cu in (4663 cm3)

Compression ratio 17.7:1 10.7:1

Output acc. to SAE J 1349 215 hp/4000 rpm(160 kW/4000 rpm)

335 hp/6000 rpm2

(250 kW/6000 rpm)

2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 400 lb-ft/1600 - 2400 rpm(543 Nm/1600 - 2400 rpm)

339 lb-ft/2700 - 5000 rpm(460 Nm/2700 - 5000 rpm)

Maximum engine speed 4500 rpm 6500 rpm

Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Poly-V-belt 2035 mm 2404 mm

553

Technical data

Rims and tires

! Only use tires which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire’s sidewall:

� MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment tires

Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, such as

� poor handling characteristics

� increased noise

� increased fuel consumption

Moreover, tires and rims not approved by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimen-sional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.

i Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressure is located on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 550). Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure infor-mation for driving at high speeds (� page 395) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (� page 395). If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.

i The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equip-ment, but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on your vehicle (Appearance Package, etc.), equipping your vehicle with win-ter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for more information.

554

Technical data

Rims and tires

Same size tires

Model GL 320 CDI,GL 450

GL 320 CDI*,GL 450*

GL 320 CDI*,GL 450*

Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 19 H2 8.5 J x 20 H2

Wheel offset 2.36 in (53 mm) 2.20 in (56 mm) 2.20 in (56 mm)

Summer tires1 - - 275/50 R20 109W

All-season tires1

1 Radial-ply tires

265/60 R18 110H M+S 275/55 R19 111H M+S -

Winter tires1,2

2 Not available as factory equipment.

265/60 R18 110H M+S. 265/55 R19 109H M+S . -

All-terrain tires*1,2 265/60 R18 110H M+S 275/55 R19 111H M+S -

555

Technical data

Rims and tires

Minispare wheel

Model GL 320 CDI,GL 450

Rim 4.5B x 19 H2

Wheel offset 1.58 in (40 mm)

Tire T 165/90D-19 119M1

1 Must not be used with snow chains.

! Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the Minispare wheel rim.

If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the Minispare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pres-sure given on the yellow label on the Minispare wheel rim.

i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the Minispare tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.

Inflate the Minispare tire to approximately 61 psi (4.2 bar).

556

Technical data

Electrical system

�
Electrical system
Model GL 450

Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A

Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW

Battery 12 V/95 Ah

Spark plugs NGK PLKR6A

Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm)

Tightening torque 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)

Model GL 320 CDI

Generator (alternator) 14 V/220 A

Starter motor 12 V/2.0 kW

Battery 12 V/95 Ah

557

Technical data

Main Dimensions

Model GL 320 CDI, GL 450

Overall vehicle length 200.6 in (5096 mm)

Vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded out) 83.7 in (2127 mm)

Vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded in) 76.0 in (1930 mm)

Overall vehicle height, depending on set vehicle level 72.4 in - 75.6 in (1840 mm - 1920 mm)

Overall vehicle height, depending on set vehicle level (vehicles with enhanced off-road package*)

72.4 in - 76.8 in (1840 mm - 1950 mm)

Wheelbase 121.1 in (3075 mm)

Ground clearance, depending on set vehicle level 7.8 in - 10.9 in (197 mm - 277 mm)

Ground clearance, depending on set vehicle level (vehicles with enhanced off-road package*)

7.8 in - 12.1 in (197 mm - 307 mm)

Turning circle 39.7 ft (12.1 m)

Track, front 65.0 in (1651 mm)

Track, rear 65.1 in (1654 mm)

558

Technical data

Weights

�
Weights
Roof load max. 198 lb (90 kg)

559

Technical data


Capacities

Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore only use products tested and approved by Mercerdes-Benz.

Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning! G

Comply with all valid regulations with re-spect to handling, storing and disposing of service fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons or the environment.

Keep service fluids out of the reach of children.

For health reasons, you should prevent service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing.

If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter All models 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine oils

Automatic transmission All models 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid

Transfer case single speed All models 0.5 US qt (0.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid

Transfer case double speed* All models 1.6 US qt (1.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid

Front axle All models 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil

Rear axle All models 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil

Rear axle with differential lock* All models 1.7 US qt (1.6 l) Hypoid gear oil

560

Technical data


Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Power steering All models approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Power Steering Fluid or approved Dexron III ATF

Front wheel hubs All models approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease

Brake system All models - MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)

Cooling system GL 320 CDI approx. 10.0 US qt (9.5 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze

GL 450 approx. 10.6 US qt (10.0 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze

Fuel Tank

including a reserve of

All models 26.4 US gal (100.0 l)

approx. 3.4 US gal (13.0 l)

Gasoline engine:Premium unleaded gasoline:Minimum Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)

Diesel engine:ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM)

Air conditioning system All models - R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

All models 8.1 US qt (7.7 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1

1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (� page 567).

561

Technical data


Engine oils

Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore, only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System. For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Engine oil additives

Air conditioning refrigerant

R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.

Brake fluid

Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will provide you with additional information.

! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System, or chang-ing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Please follow Maintenance System recommen-dations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may damage the engine. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system will occur.

Warning! G

During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.

Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance Booklet for replacement inter-val.

562

Technical data


Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)

Fuel requirements

Gasoline engine

Only use premium unleaded fuel:

� The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.

The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.

Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.

Warning! G

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury.

Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate-rials near gasoline!

Turn off the engine before refueling.

Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in-haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, extinguish all smoking materials.

Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health.

! To maintain the engine’s durability and per-formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-able and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:

� Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded gasoline as soon as possible.

� Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.

� Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.

� Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain.

563

Technical data


These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Diesel engine

Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).

To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with improved cold flow characteristics is of-fered in the winter months. Check with your fuel retailer.

Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up, especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:

� Warm-up hesitation

� Unstable idle

� Knocking/pinging

� Misfire

� Power loss

In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label.

Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to the engine operation.! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not

blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The fuel system and engine will otherwise be damaged, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

564

Technical data


Coolants

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:

� Corrosion protection

� Freeze protection

� Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point)

The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corro-sion protection.

If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35°F (-37°C), the boiling point of the cool-ant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).

The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protec-tion. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.

Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Maintenance booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solu-tion or other Mercedes-Benz approved products of equal specification are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level.For information on other Mercedes-Benz approved products of equal specification, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 50% anticor-rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze protection to approximately -35°F [-37°C]). If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approximately -49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorro-sion/antifreeze.

If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instruc-tions.

The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, con-sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze separately from each other, could cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

565

Technical data


Anticorrosion/antifreeze

Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the

aluminum parts. Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.

Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.

Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for service.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity

Approximate freeze protection

Model -35°F (-37°C) -49°F (-45°C)

GL 320 CDI 5.0 US qt (4.75 l) 5.5 US qt (5.2 l)

GL 450 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)

566

Technical data


Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

Both the windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* are supplied from the windshield washer reservoir.

The windshield washer reservoir has a ca-pacity of approximately 8.1 US qt (7.7 l).

� Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or con-centrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer sol-vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ration

For temperatures above freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water:

� 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water

(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal [4.0 l] water)

For temperatures below freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit ” and commercially avail-able premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:

� 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent

(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)

Warning! G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

567

568

Index

AABS 103

Indicator lamp 436Messages in the

multifunction display 453Off-road - ABS 104

Accelerator position, automatic transmission 198

Accessory weight 415Accident 67Active head restraint 92, 135, 504Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 280Air bags 76

Children 77, 93Front passenger front air bag off

indicator lamp 31, 32, 85Front, Driver 79Front, Passenger 79Occupant Classification System*

(OCS) 81Safety guidelines 78Side impact (front and rear*) 80Window curtain 80

Air conditioning refrigerant 562Air conditioning system see

Climate control orAutomatic climate control (3-zone)*

Air conditioning, Cooling 226, 241Air distribution, Front 221, 236Air distribution, Rear 229, 245Air pressure see Tire inflation pressureAir recirculation mode 224, 239Air suspension package 280

Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 280

Messages in themultifunction display 490

Vehicle level control 281Air vents 229Air vents*, Rear 246Air vents, Front 222, 236Air volume 222, 237Alarm system see Anti-theft systemsAlignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 496, 526Anticorrosion/antifreeze 561, 566

Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror 210Antiglare, Rear view mirrors* 211Antilock Brake System see ABSAnti-theft systems 112

Anti-theft alarm system 111, 112Immobilizer 111

Aquaplaning see HydroplaningArmrest storage compartments

Front 318Ashtrays* 322Aspect ratio 415ATF 382Attaching a trailer 368Audio menu 166

CD operation 167Radio operation 166Satellite radio* operation

(USA only) 166Auto-dimming*, Rear view mirrors 211Automatic central locking,

Control system 183

569

Index

Automatic climate control (3-zone)* 230Air conditioning refrigerant 561Air conditioning, Cooling 241Air distribution, Front 236Air distribution, Rear 245Air recirculation mode 239Air vents*, second-row seats 246Air vents*, third-row seats 247Air vents, Front 236Air volume 237Control panel, Front 232Control panel, Rear 243Deactivating system 234Defogging 237Defrosting 237Maximum cooling, MAXCOOL 239Rear passenger compartment 243Rear window defroster 215Residual engine heat (REST) 242Using driver-side settings for

all temperature zones 242

Automatic headlamp mode 146Automatic lighting control,

Interior lighting 152Automatic locking when driving 130Automatic transmission 58

Accelerator position 198Emergency operation

(limp-home mode) 202Gear ranges 200Gear selector lever 58, 192Gear selector lever position 195Gear shifting malfunctions 202Hill start assist system 199Kickdown 198Shifting procedure 195Starting the engine 57Steering wheel gearshift control 201Towing a trailer 200Transmission fluid level 382Transmission positions 196

Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF

BBabySmartTM

Air bag deactivation system 87, 450Self-test 87

BackrestSeat 46Seat, Lumbar support 139Seat, Multicontour* 140

Backup lampsMessages in the

multifunction display 481Replacing bulbs 515

Bar 416BAS 105

Lamps in instrument cluster 436Messages in the

multifunction display 453Basic cross bars* 297Batteries, SmartKey

Check lamp 114, 117Checking battery condition 122Messages in the

multifunction display 469Replacing 506

570

Index

Battery, Vehicle 530Charging 537Disconnecting and connecting 532Jump starting 538Removing and installing 532

Bead 416Beverage holder see Cup holderBi-Xenon headlamps* see headlampsBolts, Spare wheel 499Brake fluid 562

Checking 377Messages in the

multifunction display 472Brake lamp

Cleaning lenses 429Messages in the


Brake pads 350Messages in the

multifunction display 470Brakes 350

Warning lamp 437Break-in period 348Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs

Button for Voice control* system 30, 158

CCalifornia retail buyers and lessees,

Important notice for 11Camera see Rear view camera*Can holder see Cup holderCapacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants 560Card holder 33, 37, 321Cargo compartment cover blind 312Cargo net* 313Cargo tie-down rings 304Carpets, Cleaning 433Carriers* 297Catalytic converter

(gasoline engine) 373CD changer 167, 316CD player 167Center console

Lower part 33Upper part (Vehicles with

enhanced off-road package*) 32Upper part (Vehicles without

enhanced off-road package*) 31

Central lockingAutomatic 130Locking/unlocking from the

inside 130Switch 130

Certification label 550CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator

lamp 439, 440Checking tire pressure electronically with

the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS)*,(Canada only) 402

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), (USA only) 399

ChecklistOff-road driving 359Returning from off-road driving 365

571

Index

Children in the vehicle 93Air bags 77, 93Blocking rear door window

operation 100Indicator lamp, Front passenger front

air bag 85, 87, 450Infant and child restraint systems 88,

94LATCH-type child seat anchors 97Occupant Classification System*

(OCS) 81Cigarette lighter* 324Climate control 216

Air conditioning refrigerant 561Air conditioning, Cooling 226, 227Air distribution, Front 221Air distribution, rear 229Air recirculation mode 224Air vents*, second-row seats 222Air vents, Front 222Air volume 222Control panel*, Rear 228Control panel, Front 218Deactivating system 220Defogging 224Defrosting 223

Rear window defroster 215Residual engine heat (REST) 227

Clock 27, 176Setting time 176

Cloth upholstery, Cleaning andcare of 434

Cockpit 24Cockpit Management and Data System

see COMAND SystemCold tire inflation pressure 416Collapsible wheel chock 498COMAND System see separate operating

instructionsCombination switch 63, 65, 149Compass 345

Adjustment 181Calibration 182Calling up the compass 345

Control and operation of radio transmitters 372

Control system 157Multifunction display 157Multifunction steering wheel 158Resetting to factory default 171

Control system menus 157Audio 166DISTRONIC* 169NAV* 168Off-road 168Settings 170Standard display 164TEL* 189Trip computer 187Vehicle configuration 185Vehicle status message memory 169

Control system submenus 161, 163, 173Comfort* 184Instrument cluster 174, 175Lighting 178Time/Date 176Vehicle 181

Coolant 382, 565Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio

and quantity 566Capacities 560Checking coolant level 377, 382Messages in the

multifunction display 473, 475Temperature 374Temperature display 164

572

Index

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 150Messages in the


Crossing obstacles 363Cruise control 257

Activating 259Messages in the

multifunction display 454Cup holders 321

Cleaning 322Front center console 322Front center console,

Removing/Installing 322Rear armrest 321

Curb weight 416

DDate display, Setting 176, 177Daytime running lamp mode 147

Setting 178Deep water see Standing waterDefogging windshield 223, 237Defrosting, Front 223, 237Defrosting, Rear 215

Delayed shut-offExterior lamps 179Interior lighting 180

Department of Transportation see DOTDiesel engine

Preglow indicator lamp 29Differential locks* 206

A few words about 206Messages in the

multifunction display 493Switching 207

DifficultiesWhile driving 66While starting 60

Digital clock see ClockDigital speedometer 157, 165Dimensions, Vehicle 558Direction of rotation (tires) 388Displays

Digital speedometer 157, 165Distronic* 265Maintenance service indicator 422Messages in the

multifunction display 451Multifunction display 157

Outside temperature 157, 165Selecting 175Symbol messages 469Text messages 453Vehicle status message 170, 451Vehicle system settings, Control

system 161, 163, 170Distance to empty (range), Trip

Computer 187Distronic* 262

Activating 268Cleaning system sensor 430Control system 266Deactivating 270Distance warning function* 274Distance warning function*

activating/deactivating 186Driving hints 272Messages in the

multifunction display 455Sensor cover 430Warning and indicator lamps 265

573

Index

DoorEntry lamps 154Locking, In an emergency 501Locking/unlocking,

KEYLESS-GO* 41, 72Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 40, 71Messages in the

multifunction display 478Opening from inside/outside 116,

122Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 338Unlocking, Mechanical key 500

Door control panel 35Door handle 35Door windows see Power windowsDOT 410, 416Downhill driving

Cruise control 259Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) 275


Drinking and driving 349

Driving 54, 349Abroad 372Hydroplaning 354In winter 355, 420Instructions 54, 349Problems 66Safety systems 103Systems 257Through standing water 356Through water 362Tips 198With Distronic* 272

Driving off 61Driving safety systems

4-ETS 109ABS 103BAS 105EBP 109ESP® 105

Driving systems 257Adaptive Damping System

(ADS)* 280Air suspension package 280Cruise control 257Distronic* 262

Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) 275

Off-road driving program(Vehicles withoutenhanced off-road package*) 279

Parktronic system* 290Rear view camera* 295Vehicle level control 281

EEasy-entry/exit feature

Activating (driver’s seat)* 184For third-row seats 132

Easy-entry/exit feature* 49EBP 109

Indicator and warning lamps 438, 471

Electrical connectionsTrailer 366

Electrical fuses see FusesElectrical system, Technical data 557Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBPElectronic Stability Program see ESP®Electronic Traction System see 4-ETSEmergency calls

Tele Aid 334

574

Index

Emergency operationFuel filler flap 501Locking/unlocking the vehicle 500,

501Power tilt/sliding sunroof*,

Manual operation 503Emergency operation

(Limp-Home Mode) 202Emergency operations

Exit for third-row seats 134Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 338Tailgate, Opening from the inside

manually 124Emergency Tensioning Device see ETDEmergency, In case of

Battery, Jump starting 538Engine shut-down 546First aid kit 495Flat tire 523Fuses 544Hazard warning flasher 151Instrument cluster, Indicator

lamps 436, 437, 438, 439, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446

Roadside Assistance 12, 336Towing the vehicle 540

Emission control 373Information label 551System warranties 10Vacuum line routing diagram

label 551Engine

Belt layout 552Belt layout (GL 320 CDI) 552Break-in recommendations 381Cleaning 427Compartment 379Emergency engine shut-down 546Malfunction indicator lamp 29, 472Maximum engine speed 156, 553Messages in the

multifunction display 472Number 551Starting 57Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 59Starting with the SmartKey 58Tachometer 29, 156Technical data 553Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 70Turning off with the SmartKey 70

Engine coolant see CoolantEngine oil 381, 562

Adding 382, 562Additives 562Changing 382, 562Checking level 381Checking with the oil dipstick 381Consumption 381Filler neck 382Messages in the

multifunction display 476Recommended engine oils and oil

filters 562Enhanced Off-road Package*

Vehicle level control 285ESP® 27, 105

Four wheel electronic traction system with ESP® 105

Messages in themultifunction display 459, 460

Off-road-ESP® 108Warning lamp 27, 441, 442

575

Index

ETD 91, 445Safety guidelines 78

Expanding cargo compartment 306Exterior rear view mirrors 52, 211

Folding 212Power folding* 211Synchronizing 212

FFastening the seat belts 54Filler neck, Engine oil 382First aid kit 495Flat tire 523

Lifting the vehicle 524Lowering the vehicle 528Minispare wheel 499Mounting the spare wheel 524Preparing the vehicle 524

Floormats* 326

FluidsAutomatic transmission fluid 382,

560Brake fluid 378, 561, 562Capacities 560Engine coolant 378, 382, 561, 565Engine oil 381, 560, 562Power steering fluid 561Windshield washer and headlamp

cleaning system* 378, 567Fog lamps 148

Corner-illuminatingfront fog lamps* 150


Rear fog lamp 149Replacing bulbs 514

4-ETS 109Off-road - 4-ETS 110

Front air bags 79Front defroster 223, 237Front lamps see HeadlampsFront passenger front air bag 74, 79

Messages in the multifunction display 463, 464, 465, 466

Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 31, 32, 85

Front seat heat restraints seeHead restraints

Front towing eye 542Fuel 376, 561

Additives 564Capacities, Fuel tank 561Consumption statistics 187, 188Filling the tank 375Fuel filler flap and cap 375, 501Fuel gauge 29Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 29,

442Premium unleaded gasoline 376,

561, 563Requirements, Octane rating 563

Fuel capMessages in the

multifunction display 478

576

Index

Fuel consumption statisticsSince last reset 188Since start 187

Fuel filler flap 375Locking/unlocking 375Opening 375Opening in an emergency 501

Fuel tankCapacity 561Filler flap 375

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 560Fuses 544

Fuse box in cargo compartment 545Fuse box in engine compartment 545Fuse box in passenger

compartment 546Fuse chart 495, 544Fuse extractor 495, 544Replacing 544Spare fuses 495, 544

GGarage door opener 339Gasoline see FuelGAWR 416Gear range

Automatic transmission 192, 200Limiting 200Shifting into optimal 202

Gear selector lever 25, 58, 192Cleaning 433Gearshift pattern for automatic

transmission 192Messages in the

multifunction display 461Position indicator 195, 200Transmission position 195

Global locking/unlocking see Key,SmartKey

Glove box 316Good visibility 210

Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWRGross Trailer Weight see GTWGross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWRGross Vehicle Weight see GVWGTW 416GVW 416GVWR 416

HHalogen headlamp see HeadlampsHands-free microphone 34Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 433Hazard warning flasher 151Head restraints 46, 135

Active head restraint 92, 135Front seats, Adjusting 46Rear seats 93Rear seats, Adjusting 137Rear seats, Removing and

installing 138Headlamp aim

Adjusting 518Headlamp cleaning system* 210, 384

Reservoir capacity 561Headlamp shut-off delay see Delayed

shut-off, Exterior lamps

577

Index

HeadlampsAutomatic headlamp mode 146Bi-Xenon* 481, 512Cleaning lenses 429Cleaning system* 210, 384Halogen 511High beam see High beam flasherHigh beam see High beam headlampsLight sensor, Messages in the

multifunction display 483Low beam see Low beam headlampsManual headlamp mode 146Messages in the

multifunction display 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 486

Replacing bulbs 508, 509Switch 62, 145

Heated seats see Seat heating*Heated steering wheel* 328Height adjustment

Vehicle level control(Vehicles with Air suspension package) 283

Vehicle level control(Vehicles with enhanced Off-road Package*) 285

High beam flasher 63, 149High beam headlamps

Indicator lamp 29Messages in the

multifunction display 482Replacing bulbs 509, 511, 512Switching on 63, 149

High mounted brake lamp 509Hill start assist system 199Hinged quarter windows* see

Power windowsHood 379


Opening 379Hooks

Loading 306Horn 25HVAC see Climate control or

automatic climate control (3-zone)*Hydroplaning 354

IIdentification labels see LabelsIgnition 42, 44, 59Immobilizer 111Indicator lamps see Lamps, Indicator and

warningInfant and child restraint systems see

Children in the vehicleInflation pressure see Tires,

Inflation pressuresInformation button see Tele AidInfrared reflecting windshield* 345Inside door handle 122Instrument cluster 26, 28, 155

Illumination brightness 155Lamps 436Messages in display see Multifunction

display messagesMultifunction display 157Outside temperature indicator 156Selecting language 174

Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster, Illumination brightness

Instrument panel see Instrument cluster

578

Index

Instruments and controls see CockpitInterior lighting 151

Delayed shut-off 180Interior rear view mirror 52

Antiglare positions 210Auto-dimming mirrors* 211

Interior storage spaces seeStorage compartments

Intermittent wipingWindshield wipers 64

JJack 496, 497

Lifting the vehicle 524Jump starting 538

KKey, Mechanical 500Key, SmartKey 114

Batteries 122, 506Battery check lamp 114Checking battery condition 122Closing the power windows

(Convenience closing feature) 252Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof*

(Convenience closing feature) 252

Closing, Power tailgate* 128Factory setting 116Locking/unlocking 40, 71, 114Locking/unlocking, Global

setting 116Loss of 122Messages in the

multifunction display 480Opening the power windows

(Summer opening feature) 251Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*

(Summer opening feature) 251Remote control 114Replacing batteries 506Selective setting 116Starter switch positions 42Starting the engine 57Turning off the engine 70

Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*Batteries 122, 506Battery check lamp 117Checking battery condition 122Closing the power windows

(Convenience closing feature) 252

Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof*(Convenience closing feature) 252

Closing/locking, Power tailgate* 129

Factory setting 120Important notes 119Locking/unlocking 41, 71, 117Locking/unlocking, Global

setting 120Loss of 122Messages in the

multifunction display 479, 480Opening the power windows

(Summer opening feature) 251Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*

(Summer opening feature) 251Remote control 117Replacing batteries 506Selective setting 121Start/stop button 43Starter switch positions 42, 43Starting the engine 59Turning off the engine 70

579

Index

Kickdown 198Kilopascal 416

LLabels 550

Certification 550Emission control information 551Engine number 551Paintwork code 550Vacuum line routing diagram 551Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) 550Lamp sensor see Light sensorLamps, exterior 509

Front 509Light sensor, Messages in the

multifunction display 483Messages in display 481Messages in the multifunction

display 481, 483, 485Rear 509Switch 145

Lamps, indicator and warningABS 27, 436Adaptive Damping System

(ADS)* 281Alarm system 112Battery (SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO*) 121Battery (SmartKey) 116Brakes 27, 437, 438Center console 31, 32, 448CHECK ENGINE 29, 439, 440Differential locks* 207Distance warning lamp* 265Downhill Speed Regulation 276Engine diagnostics 29, 439, 440ESP® 27, 441, 442Fog lamps, Front/rear 145Front passenger front air bag off 31,

32, 80, 87, 450Fuel reserve 29, 442High beam headlamps 29Instrument cluster 26, 28, 436, 437,

438, 439, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446

Off-road driving program 280Parktronic* 292

Preglow indicator, Diesel engine 29Seat belt telltale 29, 91, 443Seat belts 444Seat heating* 140Seat ventilation* 142SRS 29, 74, 91, 445Turn signals 27Vehicle level control 283, 285

Language, Setting 174LATCH-type child seat anchors see

Children in the vehicleLayout of poly-V-belt drive (GL 450) 552Layout of poly-V-belt drive

(GL 320 CDI) 552Leather upholstery*, Cleaning and

care of 434Lever for cruise control 257License plate lamps 518


Replacing bulbs 509, 518Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 432Light sensor


Lighter see Cigarette lighter*

580

Index

Lighting, Exterior and interior 145Limp-Home Mode 202, 439, 440Loading see Vehicle loadingLocator lighting 148, 179Lock buttons, KEYLESS-GO*

Outside door handle 72Locking the vehicle see KeyLoss of keys, Mechanical key 122Loss of keys, SmartKey 122Loss of keys, SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO* 122Loss of Service and Warranty Information

Booklet 549Low beam headlamps


Replacing bulbs 509Switching on 62, 145

LOW RANGE mode* 203Messages in the

multifunction display 493, 494Lubricants 560Lumbar support 139

MMain dimensions 558Maintenance 12, 422

Calling up service indicator display 424

Clearing service indicator message 423

Maintenance System 422Resetting service indicator 424Service indicator message 422Service term exceeded 423

Maintenance System 422Manual headlamp mode see HeadlampsMaximum cooling, MAXCOOL* see

Automatic climate control (3-zone)* 239

Maximum load rating, Tires 417Maximum loaded vehicle weight,

Tires 417MB Tex upholstery, Cleaning and

care of 434Mechanical key 500

Memory function* see SeatsMenus see Control system menusMessages in display see Multifunction

display messagesMicrophone, Hands-free 34Minispare wheel see Spare wheelMirrors

Adjusting 52Auto-dimming rear view

mirrors* 211Exterior rear view mirror 52Interior rear view mirror 52, 210

MON 376, 563Multicontour seat* 140Multifunction display 157

Changing settings see Control system menus and Control system sub-menus

Displaying current gear range 200Selecting display 175Selecting language 174

581

Index

Multifunction display messages 451ABS 453Air suspension 490Air suspension package* 490Brake fluid 472Brake lamps 481Brake pads 470Check engine 472Coolant 475Cruise control 454Distronic* 455Doors 478Downhill Speed Regulation 470EBP 471Engine coolant 473, 475Engine oil 476ESP® 441Fog lamps, Front 481Fog lamps, Rear 484Front passenger front air bag 463,

464, 465, 466Fuel cap 478Gear selector lever 461Headlamps 481, 483, 484, 486Hood 478

Key, SmartKey 480Key, SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO* 479, 480Lamps 481, 483, 484, 486Low tire pressure 467, 488, 489Parking brake 461, 471Parking lamps 482Tele Aid 487Telephone* 487Turn signals 486Vehicle battery 469Windshield washer fluid 487

Multifunction steering wheel 30, 158Button operation 158

NNavigation system* 168

See separate COMAND Systemoperating instructions

Net, Cargo* 313Net, Parcel 320Neutral gear position, Automatic

transmission 192New vehicle, Break-in period 348Night security illumination 148, 179Normal occupant weight 417Number, Vehicle Identification (VIN) 550

OOccupant distribution 417Occupant safety 74

Active head restraint 92Air bags 76Children and air bags 77, 93, 96Children in the vehicle 93Fastening the seat belt 54Front passenger front air bag off

indicator lamp 82, 85, 86Infant and child restraint systems 94LATCH-type child seat anchors 97OCS* 81OCS*, Messages in the multifunction

display 463, 464, 465, 466Seat belts 54, 78

OCS* 81Self-test 86

Odometer 156, 157, 164

582

Index

Off-road - 4-ETS 110Off-road - ABS 104Off-road - ESP® 108Off-road driving

Checklist 359, 365Crossing obstacles 363Driving instructions for off-road

driving 357Driving through water 362Returning 365Rules 358Special driving features 358Steep terrain 360

Off-road driving program (Vehicles without enhanced off-road package*) 279

Oil level see Engine oil, Checking levelOne-touch gearshifting 202Operating safety 17Operator’s Manual 10Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 429Outside temperature see DisplaysOverdue maintenance service term 423Overhead control panel 34Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) 373

PPaintwork code 550Paintwork, Cleaning 426Panic alarm 102Panorama roof, Rear 214Parcel net

Front passenger footwell 320Front seat backrests 320

Parking 68, 352On hills 68Over things that burn, Potential

consequences 68, 373Parking brake 60, 68

Lamps, Indicator and warning 437Messages in the

multifunction display 471Releasing 61

Parking lamps 509Messages in the


Parking position*Exterior rear view mirrors 185, 211

Parktronic* 31, 32, 290Cleaning system sensors 430Minimum distance 292Range 291Switching on/off 293System malfunction 294System sensors 291System sensors, Cleaning 430Warning indicators 25, 292

Parts service 548PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see

Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp

Passenger compartment 371Fuse box 546Interior lighting 151Interior rear view mirror 34Parcel net in front passenger

footwell 320Passenger safety see Occupant safetyPedals 349Phone see Telephone*

583

Index

Plastic and rubber parts, cleaning 432Poly-V-belt drive

Layout (GL 450) 552Layout (GL 320 CDI) 552

Positions (Memory function*) see SeatsPounds per square inch see PSIPower assistance 350Power outlets 325Power seat see Seats, PowerPower tilt/sliding sunroof* 253

Convenience closing feature 252Opening/closing 253Opening/closing in an

emergency 503Stopping 252Summer opening feature 251Synchronizing 255

Power washer 426

Power windows 248Cleaning 431Convenience closing feature 252Door windows 248Hinged quarter windows* 250Opening/closing 248Rear door windows,

Blocking operation 100Summer opening feature 251Synchronizing, Door windows 251

Practical hints 495Premium unleaded gasoline 563Problems

While driving 66With starting see Starting difficultiesWith the vehicle 18

Product information 9Production options weight 417PSI 417Push-starting see Tow-starting

QQuarter windows* see Power windows

RRadio

Audio menu, Control system 166Selecting station 166Selecting station (satellite*) 166

Radio transmitters 372Range (distance to empty) 188Range of the sensors

Parktronic* 291Reading lamp*, third-row 153Reading lamp, front 152Reading lamp, second-row 153Rear automatic climate control 243, 245Rear center console ashtray see Ashtray*Rear climate control* 228Rear door windows

Blocking operation 100Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps

584

Index

Rear lamps see Tail lampsRear panorama roof, Sunshade 214Rear seat head restraints see

Head restraintsRear towing eye 542Rear view camera* 295Rear view mirrors see MirrorsRear window defroster 215Rear window wiper/washer 65Rear windows see Power windowsRear wiper blade 521Recommended tire inflation

pressure 417Recovery services,

Stolen vehicle (Tele Aid) 339Refrigerant, Air conditioning 562Refueling 375Regular checks 377Reminder, Seat belt see Seat belts, TelltaleRemote control

SmartKey 114SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 117

Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 338

Replacing bulbs 508Additional turn signals,

Exterior rear view mirrors 515Backup lamps 508, 509, 515Brake lamps 508, 509, 515Corner-illuminating front fog

lamps* 508, 509, 514Fog lamp, Rear 508, 509, 515Fog lamps, Front 508, 509, 514High beam headlamps 508, 509, 512License plate lamps 508, 509, 518Low beam headlamps 508, 509, 511Parking/standing lamps 508, 509,

513, 515, 517Side marker lamps, Front 508, 509,

511, 514Side marker lamps, Rear 508, 509,

515, 517Tail lamps 508, 509, 515, 517Turn signal lamps, Front 508, 509,

513Turn signal lamps, Rear 508, 509,

515, 517

Reporting safety defects 19Research Octane Number see RONReset button, In instrument cluster 171Reset tool

Active head restraints, Depository 504

Residual heat and ventilation 227, 242Reverse gear position, Automatic

transmission 192Rims 417, 554Roadside Assistance 12Roadside Assistance button see Tele AidRON 376, 563Roof rails 297Rubber parts, Cleaning 432Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 397

SSafety

Driving safety systems 103Occupant safety 74Reporting safety defects 19

Safety belts see Seat beltsSatellite radio* 166Seat belt force limiter 91

585

Index

Seat belts 88Children in the vehicle 93Cleaning 433Fastening 54Height adjustment 56Messages in the

multifunction display 443, 444Proper use of 56, 90Safety guidelines 78Telltale 29, 88, 443Warning lamp 444

Seat cushion depth see SeatsSeat heating* see SeatsSeat ventilation* see SeatsSeating capacity 390Seats 45, 132

Adjusting 45Cushion depth, Multicontour

seat* 140Easy entry/exit feature for

third-row seats 132Emergency exit for

third-row seats 134Heating* 140Lumbar support 139

Memory function* 143Multicontour seat* 140Second-row, Folding 308Third-row, Folding electrically 307,

310Ventilation* 142

Securing cargo 304Cargo tie-down rings 304Hooks 306

Selector lever see Gear selector leverSelf-test

BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system 87

Lamps in the instrument cluster 436OCS* 86Tele Aid 333Vehicle battery 530

Service and warranty information 10Service intervals see Maintenance, Service

indicatorService life

Tires 386Service see MaintenanceService system see Maintenance SystemService, Parts 548

SettingsAdaptive Damping System

(ADS)* 280Air suspension 280Clock 176Comfort functions* 184Control system menus 160, 162Control system submenus 161, 163,

173Date 163, 173, 176Daytime running lamp mode 178Factory, SmartKey 116Factory, SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO* 120Individual, Vehicle 170Instrument cluster 174Language, multifunction display 174,

175Lighting 178Memory function* 144Resetting all, Control system 171Selective, SmartKey 116Selective, SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO* 121Time 176Vehicle configuration 185

586

Index

Vehicle level control 281Shifting

Automatic transmission 58, 192Side impact air bags 80Side marker lamps

Cleaning lenses 429Messages in the

multifunction display 484Replacing bulbs 514, 517

Side windows see Power windowsSidewall 417SmartKey see Key, SmartKeySmartKey see Key, SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO*Snow chains 421Snow tires see Winter tiresSpare fuses 495Spare wheel 499

Mounting 524Wheel bolts 496, 526

Speed settingsCruise control 259Distronic* 268

Speedometer 27, 265

Spinning see Tires, Direction of rotationSRS 90

Indicator lamp 29, 445Messages in the

multifunction display 445Standing lamps 145

Replacing bulbs 508, 509, 513, 515, 517

Standing water, Driving through 362Starter switch 25, 42

Positions 42Starting difficulties, Engine 60Starting, Engine 57Steep terrain, Driving 360Steering column 50, 51Steering wheel 49

Adjustment, Electrically* 51Adjustment, Manually 50Buttons 30, 158Cleaning 433

Steering wheel gearshift control,Automatic transmission 201

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 339

Storage compartments 36, 316Armrest, Front 318Cup holder 321Cup holders 321Door pockets 36Front center console 318Glove box 316Parcel net, Front passenger

footwell 320Parcel nets, Front seat backrest 320Rear seats, In front of 319

Storing tires 387Stranded vehicle 543Submenus see Control system submenusSun visors 213Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof*Sunshade

Rear panorama roof 214Suspension tuning see Air suspension

packageSymbols used in this Operator’s

Manual 16

587

Index

TTachometer 29, 156

Displaying current gear range 200Overspeed range 156

Tail lamps 515Cleaning lenses 429Messages in the

multifunction display 485Replacing bulbs 509, 517

TailgateClosing from the inside,

Electrically* 127Closing from the outside

(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) 128

Opening from the inside, Electrically* 126

Opening from the inside, Manually 124

Opening from the outside 124

Tar stains 426Technical data 547

Air conditioning refrigerant 561, 562Brake fluid 561, 562Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants

etc. 560, 561Coolant 561, 565Dimensions, Vehicle 558Electrical system 557Engine 553Engine oil 560, 562Engine oil additives 562Fuel requirements 563Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 560Gasoline additives 564Main dimensions 558Premium unleaded gasoline 563Rims 554Tires 554Weights 559Windshield washer and headlamp

cleaning* system 561, 567

Tele Aid 332Call priority 338Emergency calls 334Hands-free microphone 34Information 337Initiating an emergency call

manually 335Messages in the

multifunction display 487Remote door unlock 338Roadside Assistance 336SOS button 335Stolen Vehicle Recovery

services 339System self-check 333

Telephone cradle*Changing 331

Telephone* 329Answering/ending a call 190Changing mobile phone cradle 331Dialing a number from the phone

book 190Ending a call or rejecting an incoming

call 190

588

Index

Hands-free microphone 34Inserting in cradle 330Installing a different mobile phone

cradle 331Messages in the

multifunction display 487Operation 189Phone book 190Redialing 191Rejecting/ending a call 190Removing from cradle 331Tray 318

TemperatureCoolant 164Display mode, Status indicator 175Interior temperature 221Interior temperature, setting see

Climate control or Automatic climate control (3-zone)*

Outside temperature 165Sensor, Interior temperature 218,

232Sensor, Outside temperature 156Setting display unit 165

Tether attachment points, see Children in the vehicle

Third-row sunshade 214Three-zone Automatic climate control see

Automatic climate control (3-zone) *Ticket holder 321Tie-down rings 304Tightening torque

Screws, Basic cross bars* 300, 301, 302

Wheel bolts 528Tilt/sliding sunroof* see Power tilt/sliding

sunroof*Time 176TIN 410, 417Tire and Loading Information

Placard 389Terminology 415

Tire Identification Number see TIN

Tire inflation pressureChecking manually 396Checking tire pressure electronically

with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS)*, (Canada only) 402

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), (USA only) 399

Recommended tire inflation pressure 394

Tires 385, 554Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (Advanced TPMS)*,(Canada only) 402

Air pressure 415Care and maintenance 386Chains 421Cleaning 387Combination low tire pressure/TPMS

malfunction telltale, USA only 27Direction of rotation, Spinning 388Driving instructions 353Hydroplaning 354Important guidelines 385

589

Index

Important notes, Tire inflation pressure 395

Inflation pressure 378, 394, 396Information placard 389Inspection 386Load rating 406, 407, 417Loading Information 389Loading terminology 415Loading the vehicle 388Low tire pressure telltale, Canada

only 27, 446Maximum load 418Messages in the

multifunction display 446Ply composition and material

used 418Problems under-/overinflation 405Retreads 385Rims and tires 554Rotating 388Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 397Service life 386Sizes 406Snow chains 421Spare wheel 499, 524Speed rating 354, 408, 418

Storing 387Temperature 395, 414Terminology 415TIN 410, 417Tire Identification Number see TINTire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS), (USA only) 399TPMS malfunction telltale 446Traction 354, 414, 418Tread 418Tread depth 387, 420Treadwear indicators 418Vehicle maximum load on 418Wear pattern 419Winter tires 420

Tongue Weight Rating see TWRTools 495Top tether

Children in the vehicle 99Towing

Trailer 200, 366, 369Towing eye bolt 542Towing the vehicle 542, 543Tow-starting 538, 540

Traction 414, 4184-ETS, Driving safety systems 103,

109Trailer

Attaching 368Checking weights 367Electrical connections 366Hitch* 366Loading 367Towing 366, 369Weights and ratings 366

Transfer case 203LOW RANGE mode* 203Switching LOW RANGE mode* 204

Transmission gear selector lever see Gear selector lever

Transmission position indicator 157Transmission positions 195Transmission see Automatic transmissionTraveling abroad 372Tread 418Tread depth 387, 420Treadwear indicators 418Trip computer 187Trip odometer, resetting 156

590

Index

Turn signal lampsCleaning lenses 429Messages in the


Turn signals 63Additional in mirrors 509Bulbs 509, 517Cleaning lenses 429Indicator lamps 27

Turning off the engine 70TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) 418

UUniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards 418Units, Settings

Speedometer 175Temperature 175

Unleaded gasoline, Premium 561Unlocking the vehicle see KeyUphill driving

Cruise control 259Upholstery

Cleaning and care of 434Useful features 316

VVacuum line routing diagram label 551Vehicle

Battery 530Break-in period 348Care 425Control system, Settings menu 170Dimensions 558Locking/unlocking 40, 68, 114Locking/unlocking in an

emergency 500Modifications and alterations,

Operating safety 17Proper use of 17Total load limit 418Towing 540Washing 425Weights 559

Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings 366

Vehicle care 425Vehicle Identification Number see VINVehicle jack 496, 497Vehicle level control 281

Vehicle level control (Vehicles withenhanced Off-road Package*) 285

Vehicle level control*Messages in the

multifunction display 490Vehicle lighting 378Vehicle loading

Basic cross bars* 297Cargo compartment cover blind 312Cargo net* 313Cargo tie-down rings 304Carriers* 297Expanding cargo compartment 306Hooks 306Load limit 390Loading instructions 303Loading terminology 415Parcel nets 320Roof rails 297Terminology 415

Vehicle maximum load on the tire 418Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen

(Tele Aid) 339

591

Index

Vehicle status message memory menu 169

Vehicle tool kit 495Vehicle washing 427VIN 551Voice control system*

Button on multifunction steering wheel 30, 158

Hands-free microphone 34

WWarning indicators

Parktronic* 292Warning lamps see Lamps, Indicator and

warningWarning sounds

Distance warning function* 274Distronic* 265Exterior lamps 145Parking brake 61Parktronic* 294Seat belt telltale 88

Warranty coverage 10, 549Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluidWasher reservoir level 567Washing the vehicle 425Wear pattern, Tires 419Weights, Vehicle 559Wheel

Bolts 496Change 524Removing 526Spare 499, 524Tightening torque 528

Wheel, Tires and 385Wheels

Sizes 555Window curtain air bags 80Windows see Power windowsWindows, cleaning 431Windshield

Cleaning 431Cleaning wiper blades 431Cleaning, Windshield washer fluid 65Defogging 224, 238Infrared reflecting* 345Washer fluid 384, 561, 567

Windshield washer fluidMessages in the

multifunction display 487Mixing ratio 567Refilling 384Reservoir level 384Wiping with 65

Windshield washer system 384, 567Windshield wipers 63

Cleaning wiper blades 431Fast continuous wiping 64Fast intermittent wiping 64Rear window wiper/washer 65Replacing wiper blades 520Slow continuous wiping 64Slow intermittent wiping 64

Winter driving 420Snow chains 421Tires 420

Winter driving instructions 355Winter tires 420Wood trims, cleaning 434

592

Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.

For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.

For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.

Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.

Press time October 17, 2006GSP/TID

Printed in U. S. A

Warning! G

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.

If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Documents

2007 Mercedes Benz Gl Owners Manual